ENQVIRIES
TOVCHING
THE
DIVERSITY
of
LANGVAGES
,
and
RELIGIONS
through
the
cheife
parts
of
the
world
.
WRITTEN
By
Edw.
Brerewood
lately
professor
of
Astronomy
in
Gresham
Colledge
in
LONDON
.
LONDON
Printed
for
IOHN
BILL
.
1614.
The
CONTENTES
of
the
CHAPTERS
in
this
booke
.
CHAP.
-
PAGE
.
1
Of
the
ancient
largenesse
of
the
Greeke
tongue
.
-
1.
2
Of
the
Decaying
of
the
antient
Greeke
tongue
,
&
of
the
present
vulgar
Greeke
.
-
8.
3
Of
the
ancient
largenesse
of
the
Roman
tongue
in
the
time
of
the
Roman
Empire
.
-
13.
4
That
the
Roman
tongue
abolished
not
the
vulgar
languages
,
in
the
foraine
prouinces
of
the
Romaine
Empire
.
-
20.
5
Of
the
beginning
of
the
Italian
,
French
and
Spanish
languages
.
-
30.
6
Obiections
touching
the
extent
of
the
Latine
tongue
and
the
beginning
of
the
mentioned
Languages
with
their
solutions
,
-
39.
7
Of
the
antient
languages
of
Italie
,
Spaine
,
Fraunce
and
Afrique
.
-
45.
8
Of
the
largenesse
of
the
Slauonish
,
Turkish
,
and
Arabique
languages
.
-
58.
9
Of
the
Syriaque
and
Hebrew
tongues
.
-
62.
10
Of
the
sundry
parts
of
the
World
inhabited
by
Christians
.
-
66.
11
Of
the
parts
of
the
World
possessed
by
Mahumetans
.
-
79.
12
Of
the
sundry
regions
of
the
World
inhabited
by
Idolaters
.
-
86.
13
Of
the
Iewes
dispersed
in
seuerall
parts
of
the
World
.
-
92.
14
Of
the
Quantitie
and
proportion
of
the
parts
of
the
earth
,
possessed
by
the
seuerall
sorts
of
the
aboue
mentioned
religions
.
-
118.
15
Of
the
diuerse
sorts
or
sects
of
Christians
in
the
world
,
and
of
their
seuerall
Regions
.
And
first
of
the
Grecians
.
-
124.
16
Of
the
Syrians
,
or
Melchites
.
-
129.
17
Of
the
Georgians
,
Circassians
and
Mengrellians
.
-
134.
18
Of
the
Muscouites
and
Russians
.
-
136.
19
Of
the
Nestorians
.
-
139.
20
Of
the
Indians
or
Christians
of
St.
Tho.
-
144.
21
Of
the
Iacobites
.
-
151.
22
Of
the
Copthi
or
Christians
of
Aegypt
.
-
155.
23
Of
the
Habassines
.
-
163.
24
Of
the
Armenians
.
-
170.
25
Of
the
Maronites
.
-
175.
26
Of
the
seuerall
Languages
wherin
the
Liturgies
of
Christians
in
seuerall
parts
of
the
World
are
celebrated
.
-
184.
TO
THE
MOST
REVEREND
FATHER
in
God
,
the
Lord
Archbishop
of
Canterbury
his
Grace
,
Primate
of
all
England
,
and
Metropolitane
,
and
one
of
his
Maiesties
most
Honourable
Priuie
COVNCELL
.
Most
Reuerend
,
THe
argument
of
this
discourse
being
religion
,
to
whom
could
it
be
more
fitlie
presented
then
to
your
Grace
,
hauing
(
vnder
his
most
Excellent
Maiestie
)
worthily
the
chiefe
care
hereof
.
Besides
,
the
Author
of
this
worke
,
whilest
he
liued
,
so
much
honoured
your
sincere
and
religious
courses
in
managing
the
publique
affaires
of
your
eminent
place
,
that
had
he
thought
of
the
publishing
thereof
,
no
doubt
but
he
would
haue
presumed
to
gaine
some
luster
vnto
it
from
your
gracious
Patronage
.
Succeeding
him
in
his
temporall
blessings
,
I
doe
endeuour
to
succeede
him
in
his
virtues
,
dutifull
affection
towards
your
grace
,
and
prayers
to
the
almightie
,
for
the
good
of
his
Church
,
to
increase
daily
your
honours
,
and
happinesse
.
Your
Graces
in
all
humble
obseruance
to
be
commanded
ROB.
BREREWOOD
.
A
PREFACE
TO
THE
READER
shewing
the
occasions
the
Author
had
to
write
the
ensuing
Discourse
,
and
breifly
describing
the
generall
state
of
Protestantes
in
Europe
for
a
supply
to
the
same
worke
.
SVCH
as
are
delighted
with
profound
speculations
,
and
the
diligent
search●ng
out
of
hidden
verities
,
they
haue
not
all
the
same
proiectes
,
but
their
various
cogitations
are
vsually
fixed
vpon
diuers
ends
.
Some
(
saith
a
deuout
Father
)
know
that
they
may
be
knowne
,
and
this
is
vanity
:
some
know
,
onely
that
they
may
know
,
and
this
is
curiosity
:
others
know
to
edifie
,
and
this
is
charity
.
How
distastfull
the
vanity
of
the
first
sort
was
vnto
the
learned
,
and
iudicious
Author
of
this
ensuing
discourse
,
his
priuate
and
retyred
course
of
life
,
his
setled
,
and
constant
vnwillingnesse
,
whilest
he
enioyed
his
earthly
tabernacle
,
to
expose
any
of
his
accurate
labours
to
the
publicke
viewe
of
the
world
,
may
sufficiently
testifie
:
and
yet
to
auoyde
the
fruitelesse
curiosity
of
the
second
ranke
,
he
was
euer
most
ready
in
priuate
either
by
conference
,
or
writing
to
instruct
others
repayring
vnto
him
,
if
they
were
desirous
of
his
resolution
in
any
doubtfull
pointes
of
learning
within
the
ample
circuit
of
his
deepe
apprehension
.
From
this
his
modest
,
and
humble
charity
(
vertues
which
rarely
cohabite
with
the
swelling
windenesse
of
much
knowledge
)
issued
this
spisse
and
dense
,
yet
polished
;
this
copious
,
yet
concise
;
this
concise
yet
cleare
and
perspicuous
Treatise
of
the
variety
of
Languages
and
Religions
through
the
chiefe
regions
of
the
world
.
[
](A16718-e1750-b)a
a
Praefac
.
in
paraph.
in
Epist.
ad
Rom.
Erasmus
giuing
the
reason
why
S.
Paul
writeth
to
the
Romans
in
the
Greeke
,
saith
,
it
was
the
large
extent
then
of
this
language
,
that
his
instructions
might
more
generally
be
vnderstood
;
to
make
the
truth
of
Erasmus
assertion
more
euident
,
he
was
intreated
to
point
out
particularly
the
amplenesse
,
and
multitude
of
such
Regions
,
wherein
this
learned
tounge
was
aunciently
most
vulgar
.
[
](A16718-e1810-b)b
b
In
Mithrid
.
Gesner
,
and
Viues
affirming
that
the
Spanish
,
[
](A16718-e1850-b)c
c
Commen●
in●
.
19.
&
ciuit
.
cap.
7.
Italian
,
and
French
tongues
are
but
the
latine
depraued
,
and
corrupted
by
the
inundation
of
the
Gothes
,
[
](A16718-e1880-b)d
d
Euor●a
in
psal.
138
&
Tractat.
7.
in
Ioan.
and
Vandals
ouer
the
Southerne
partes
of
Europe
,
and
Saint
Augustine
intimating
that
the
latine
was
commonly
spoken
in
some
partes
of
the
skirts
of
Affricke
which
border
vpon
the
Mediterrane
sea
;
it
was
demanded
of
him
,
whether
in
the
forenamed
Countries
about
the
more
auncient
times
of
the
primitiue
Church
,
the
latine
was
the
common
language
,
and
whether
the
decay
of
it
,
was
the
originall
of
the
vulgar
tongues
vsed
by
their
Inhabitants
in
after
ages
.
And
forasmuch
as
Guido
Fabritius
doth
clearely
demonstrate
the
vulgar
tongue
of
Iury
in
the
daies
of
our
blessed
Sauiours
pilgrimage
here
vppon
earth
to
be
the
Syriacke
,
which
(
saith
[
](A16718-e1980-b)e
e
Prae.
ad
Sy●iacum
Test.
Matius
)
grew
out
of
the
mixture
of
the
auncient
Chaldee
,
and
Hebrew
,
and
was
so
different
from
the
later
,
[
](A16718-e2030-b)f
f
Prae●●
,
ad
G●●m
.
●yria
that
the
one
could
not
be
vnderstood
by
the
other
:
he
was
questioned
in
which
of
these
languages
the
Hebrew
or
Syriacke
the
publicke
reading
of
the
sacred
Scriptures
in
those
times
were
prformed
.
Lastly
,
whereas
there
are
many
Christians
in
Greece
,
Asia
,
Muscouia
,
Aegypt
,
and
Aethiopia
,
it
was
desired
of
him
that
he
would
more
distinctly
set
downe
the
Countries
wherein
they
liued
,
their
superiours
to
whom
they
are
subiect
,
and
their
differences
from
the
Romane
Church
,
that
it
might
more
manifestly
appeare
,
how
idle
are
the
common
vaunts
amongst
the
ignorant
of
her
amplitude
,
as
though
all
the
Christian
world
saue
a
few
Protestantes
shut
vp
in
some
obscure
corner
of
Europe
,
professed
the
same
faith
she
embraceth
and
were
within
the
territories
of
her
Iurisdiction
.
The
falsehood
of
which
glorious
boastings
are
in
part
most
liuely
discouered
in
this
learned
Tractate
,
describing
the
diuers
conditions
of
Christians
in
the
East
,
North
and
Southerne
Regions
of
the
earth
which
haue
no
subordination
vnto
the
Papall
Hierarchie
,
but
not
in
the
West
,
where
Protestantes
haue
cheifely
their
aboade
;
and
therefore
to
make
it
a
more
compleate
worke
,
it
will
not
be
amisse
compendiously
to
declare
their
multitudes
,
amplenesse
,
and
seuerall
habitations
in
this
Europaean
world
.
To
begin
with
the
remotest
partes
hereof
Eastward
;
in
the
kingdome
of
Polonia
,
as
it
is
this
present
,
confining
on
the
West
at
the
riuers
of
Warta
,
and
Odera
with
the
Marchesates
of
Silesia
and
Brandeburge
,
on
the
East
at
the
riuers
of
Nieper
and
Bresnia
with
Moscouia
,
on
the
South
at
the
Riuer
of
Niester
with
Moldauia
,
at
the
[
](A16718-e2240-b)g
g
Ne
commemorem
dit●onis
amplitudinem
(
inquit
Erasmus
de
Regno
Poloniae
loquens
)
complectentis
Russos
etiam
A●bos
,
&
L●tuanos
quibus
omnibus
latissimè
imperat
a
vistula
flumine
ad
Tauricam
Cheron●sum
,
a
mari
Balthico
ad
Caparthum
montem
Sigismundus
Rex
.
Eras
epist
ad
Polo
.
Se●r
tar
.
praefix
expo
in
orat
.
do
.
Caparthian
mountaines
,
with
Hungarie
,
on
the
North
with
the
Baltique
sea
,
hauing
vnder
its
dominion
Polonia
,
Lituania
,
Liuonia
,
Podolia
,
Russia
the
lesse
,
Volhimia
,
Masouia
,
Prussia
,
which
vnited
as
it
were
within
one
roundish
inclosure
,
are
in
circuit
about
2600.
miles
,
and
of
no
lesse
space
then
Spaine
,
and
France
layd
together
,
in
this
so
large
and
ample
kingdome
the
Protestants
in
great
numbers
are
diffused
through
all
quarters
thereof
;
hauing
in
euery
Prouince
their
publicke
Churches
,
and
congregations
orderly
seuered
and
bounded
with
Diocesses
,
whence
are
sent
some
of
the
cheefest
and
most
principall
men
of
worth
vnto
their
Generall
Synods
,
which
within
these
few
yeares
they
haue
frequently
held
with
great
celebritie
,
and
with
no
lesse
Christian
prudence
and
piety
.
For
whereas
there
are
diuers
sorts
of
these
Polonicke
Protestants
,
some
embracing
the
Waldensian
,
or
the
Bohemick
,
others
the
Augustane
,
and
some
the
Heluetian
confession
,
and
so
doe
differ
in
some
outward
circumstances
of
Discipline
,
and
ceremony
:
yet
knowing
well
that
a
kingdome
diuided
cannot
stand
,
and
that
the
one
God
whom
all
of
them
worship
in
spirit
is
the
God
of
peace
and
concord
,
they
iointly
meet
at
one
Generall
Synode
,
and
their
first
Act
alway
is
,
a
religious
and
solemne
profession
of
their
vnfained
consent
in
the
substantiall
points
of
Christian
Faith
,
necessary
to
saluation
.
Thus
in
Generall
Synodes
at
[
](A16718-e2390-b)a
a
Anno.
1570.
Sendomire
,
[
](A16718-e2420-b)b
b
1573.
Cracouia
,
[
](A16718-e2450-b)c
c
1578.
Petricoue
,
[
](A16718-e2480-b)d
d
1●●3
.
Wlodislaue
,
[
](A16718-e2510-b)e
e
1●95
.
See
the
Acts
of
the
Synods
themselues
Torune
,
(
vnto
which
resorted
in
great
troops
Christians
of
all
Orders
,
States
,
and
degrees
,
out
of
all
Prouinces
of
this
most
potent
kingdome
)
they
declared
the
Bohemicke
,
Helueticke
and
Augustane
confessions
seuerally
receiued
amongst
them
to
agree
in
the
principall
heads
of
Faith
,
touching
the
holy
Scripture
,
the
sacred
Trinitie
,
the
Person
of
the
sonne
of
God
,
God
and
man
,
the
prouidence
of
God
,
Sinne
,
Freewil
,
the
Law
,
the
Gospel
,
Iustification
by
Christ
,
Faith
in
his
name
,
Regeneration
,
the
catholike
Church
,
and
Supreame
head
thereof
Christ
,
the
Sacraments
,
their
number
and
vse
,
the
state
of
soules
after
death
,
the
resurrection
&
life
eternal
,
they
decreed
,
that
wheras
in
the
forenamed
confessions
there
is
some
difference
in
phrases
,
and
formes
of
speech
concerning
Christs
presence
in
his
holy
supper
,
which
might
breed
dissention
,
all
disputations
touching
the
manner
of
Christs
presence
should
bee
cut
off
;
seeing
all
of
them
doe
beleeue
the
presence
it selfe
,
and
that
the
Eucharisticall
elements
are
not
naked
and
empty
signes
,
but
doe
truely
performe
to
the
faithfull
receiuer
that
which
they
signifie
,
and
represent
,
and
to
preuent
future
occasions
of
violating
this
sacred
consent
,
they
ordained
that
no
man
should
be
called
to
the
sacred
ministery
without
subscription
thereunto
,
and
when
any
person
shal
be
excluded
by
excommunication
from
the
congregation
of
one
con●ession
,
that
he
may
not
be
receiued
by
the
congregation
of
another
;
Lastly
,
forasmuch
as
they
accord
in
the
substantiall
verity
of
Christian
doctrine
,
they
professe
themselues
content
to
tolerate
diuersitie
of
ceremonies
,
according
to
the
diuerse
practise
of
their
particular
Churches
,
and
to
remoue
the
least
suspition
of
rebelling
,
and
sedition
,
wherewith
their
malitious
,
and
calumniating
aduersaries
might
blemish
the
Gospell
,
although
they
are
subiect
vnto
many
greeuous
pressures
,
from
the
adherents
of
Antichrist
,
yet
they
carnestly
export
one
another
to
follow
that
worthy
and
Christian
admonition
of
Lactantius
:
Defendenda
Religio
est
,
non
occidendo
,
sed
moriendo
,
non
saeuitia
sed
patientia
,
non
scelere
,
sed
fide
,
illa
enim
bonorum
sunt
,
haec
malorum
.
This
is
the
state
of
the
professors
of
the
Gospell
in
the
electiue
Monarchy
of
Polonia
,
who
in
the
adioyning
countries
on
the
South
Transiluania
and
Hungarie
,
are
also
exceedingly
multiplied
.
In
the
former
by
the
fauor
Gabriel
Bartorius
now
Prince
of
that
Region
,
who
not
many
yeares
,
since
hath
expulsed
thence
all
such
as
are
of
the
Papall
faction
,
in
a
manner
the
whole
body
of
the
Inhabitants
(
except
some
few
rotten
and
putred
limmes
of
Arrians
,
Antitrinnitarians
,
Ebionites
,
Socinians
,
Anabaptists
,
who
heere
as
also
in
Polonia
,
Lituania
Borussia
haue
some
publicke
Assemblies
)
are
professed
Protestants
:
in
the
later
,
a
greater
part
,
specially
beeing
compared
onely
with
such
as
are
there
addicted
to
the
Romish
superstition
.
But
hence
Eastward
in
the
kingdom
of
Bohemia
consisting
of
32.
thousand
parishes
,
(
now
become
in
a
manner
hereditary
to
the
house
of
Austria
,
as
likewise
the
kingdome
of
Hungary
)
and
its
appurtenances
,
the
Marchesates
of
Lusatia
,
Morauia
,
the
Dukedome
of
Silesia
,
all
which
iointly
in
circuit
containe
770.
miles
,
the
Protestants
are
esteemed
two
third
parts
;
&
in
Austria
it selfe
,
and
the
countries
of
Goritia
,
Tirolis
,
Cilia
,
the
principalities
of
Sueuia
,
Alsatia
,
Brisgoia
,
Constans
,
now
annexed
thereunto
,
the
most
part
of
the
people
,
and
especially
of
the
[
](A16718-e2750-b)a
a
Nobiles
fere
omnes
(
qui
in
subditos
su●s
,
et
clientes
iudicia
exercent
,
eorumque
nonnulli
vitae
,
et
necis
●●●ent
pot●sta●e
●●●mouarum
opininum
veneno
inflecti
sunt
.
Thesau
.
polit.
Apot.
6.
Nobility
are
the
same
way
affected
,
and
are
in
regard
of
their
number
so
potent
,
that
they
are
fearefull
vnto
their
malignant
opposites
.
And
almost
they
are
of
the
same
number
,
and
strength
in
the
neighbour
countries
of
the
Arch-Duke
of
Gratzden
(
a
branch
of
the
house
of
Austria
,
namely
in
Stiria
,
Carinthia
,
Carniola
,
saue
since
the
yeare
1598.
they
haue
not
had
in
these
countries
the
publicke
exercise
of
their
Religion
by
the
importunate
and
clandestine
solicitations
of
the
Iesuites
:
who
notwithstanding
in
respect
of
the
number
,
and
▪
potencie
of
the
[
](A16718-e2810-b)a
a
Illustres
domini
Ordinarij
,
necnon
prouinciahum
pars
maxima
nihil
non
agit
,
vt
manere
nobis
(
ministris
Euangel●●
)
liceret
sed
Iesuitam
instigationes
quam
totius
prouinciae
supplicationes
plus
poterant
.
Histo.
persecut
Grae.
car●●s
.
Nobility
on
the
Protestant
partie
euen
in
Gratts
the
prime
City
of
Styria
,
could
not
effect
their
desires
,
vntill
in
the
yeare
forementioned
vnder
pretence
of
conducting
the
Arch-Dukes
sister
into
Spaine
to
bee
wife
vnto
the
now
Philip
the
third
sundry
Embassadors
from
the
Princes
of
Italy
,
the
Pope
,
&
the
King
of
Spaine
attended
with
many
souldiers
had
full
possession
of
the
city
,
and
presently
fourteene
Ministers
of
the
Gospell
in
one
day
were
by
force
and
violence
thence
eiected
.
But
the
condition
of
the
Protestants
residing
amongst
the
Cantons
of
Heluetia
,
and
their
confederates
the
city
of
Geneua
,
the
towne
of
S.
Gall
,
the
Grisons
,
Valesians
,
or
seuen
communities
,
vnder
the
Bishop
of
Sedune
,
is
a
great
deale
more
happie
,
and
setled
;
in
so
much
that
they
are
two
third
parts
,
hauing
the
publique
and
free
practise
of
Religion
:
for
howsoeuer
of
the
13.
Cantons
,
onely
these
fiue
,
[
](A16718-e2930-b)b
b
Thesaur
.
Pol.
Apot.
49.
Zuricke
,
Schaf●use
,
Glarona
,
Basile
,
Abatistella
are
entirely
Protestant
;
yet
these
in
strength
,
and
amplenesse
of
territory
much
exceede
the
other
seuen
,
and
hence
Zuricke
the
chiefe
of
the
fiue
,
in
all
publicke
meetings
,
and
Embassages
hath
the
first
place
.
Already
then
we
find
the
state
of
Orthodox
professors
of
the
Gospell
to
be
such
,
that
we
neede
not
complaine
of
their
paucitie
,
and
if
wee
further
proceede
to
view
the
many
regions
of
the
Empire
,
we
shall
haue
cause
to
magnifie
the
goodnesse
of
God
for
their
multitudes
.
The
whole
Empire
,
excluding
Bohemia
,
and
Austria
(
because
the
King
of
the
one
is
rather
an
Arbiter
in
the
election
of
the
Emperour
,
then
an
Elector
,
in
this
sole
case
giuing
his
voice
when
the
other
six
Electors
are
equally
diuided
,
and
the
Archduke
of
the
other
hath
onely
a
kind
of
extraordinary
place
in
the
Dyet
amongst
the
Ecclesiasticall
Princes
,
as
sometimes
the
Duke
of
Loraine
had
)
consisteth
of
three
Orders
,
or
States
,
the
Princes
Ecclesiasticall
,
the
Princes
Temporall
,
and
the
free
Cities
.
The
last
of
these
before
some
of
them
come
to
be
possessed
by
the
French
,
Polonian
,
Heluetians
,
and
others
were
in
number
about
[
](A16718-e3040-b)a
a
Liberae
ciuitates
quae
non
alium
principem
praeter
Imperatorem
agnoscunt
,
&
suis
vtuntur
quaeque
legibus
,
olim
erant
88.
lam
vero
pauc●o
res
sunt
,
alijs
a
Galliarum
,
&
Poloniae
Regibus
,
&
alijs
occupatis
.
Thes.
polit.
apot
.
6.
88.
and
although
in
regard
of
this
multitude
,
at
this
present
they
are
much
diminished
;
yet
the
remainders
of
them
are
so
potent
,
that
a
few
of
them
,
termed
the
Hanse-Citties
seated
in
the
Notherne
part
of
Germany
inclusiuely
betweene
Dantisck
eastward
,
Hamburg
westward
,
and
ioyned
in
an
offensiue
,
and
defensiue
league
,
haue
been
able
to
make
good
their
opposition
against
some
mightie
neighbour
Princes
infringing
immunities
.
These
with
the
rest
of
the
[
](A16718-e3120-b)b
b
Protestantium
partes
sequuntur
liberae
Ciuitates
,
seculares
Principes
ferē
omnes
;
Catholico●um
à
secularibus
Principes
pauci
,
v●
〈◊〉
Cl●●●nsis
.
Thesaur
.
Pol.
Apot
6.
Free
Citties
(
which
are
of
some
number
,
and
strength
)
doe
all
in
a
manner
either
in
whole
,
or
part
(
for
in
some
of
them
as
in
Ratisbone
,
Argentine
,
Augusta
,
Spire
,
Wormes
,
Francfort
vpon
Moen
both
Papists
and
Protestants
make
publique
profession
)
embrace
the
sincere
doctrine
of
the
Gospell
.
And
if
wee
passe
ouer
the
Ecclesiasticall
Princes
,
who
(
excepting
the
three
Electour
Ar●hbishops
,
of
Colen
Mentz
,
and
Triuers
,
the
Archbishops
of
Wer●zburg
,
and
Saltsburg
,
and
some
elect
Bishops
or
Administrators
of
bishopricks
being
laymen
,
and
of
the
reformed
Religion
)
are
of
small
power
;
all
the
Princes
Temporall
of
the
Empire
(
none
of
note
excepted
besides
the
Duke
of
Bauaria
)
are
firmely
Protestantes
.
Now
what
the
multitudes
of
subiects
are
professing
the
same
faith
with
these
Princes
,
we
may
guesse
by
the
amplenes
of
the
dominions
vnder
the
gouernment
of
such
only
as
for
their
commands
are
chiefe
,
and
most
eminent
amongst
them
;
As
of
the
Prince
Elector
Palatine
,
the
Duke
of
Saxonie
,
the
Marquesse
of
Brandeburge
,
the
Duke
of
Wirtenburg
,
Landgraue
of
Hesse
,
Marquesse
of
Baden
,
Prince
of
Anhalt
,
Dukes
of
Brunswicke
,
Holst
,
Luenburg
,
Meckleburge
,
Pomerane
,
Sweyburge
,
Nauburge
▪
amongst
whom
the
Marquesse
of
Brandeburge
hath
for
his
Dominion
,
not
only
the
Marchasate
it selfe
contayning
in
circuit
about
520.
miles
,
&
furnished
with
fiftie
cities
,
and
about
threescore
other
walled
Townes
;
but
likewise
part
of
Prussia
,
for
which
he
is
feudatarie
vnto
the
king
of
Poland
,
the
Region
of
Prignitz
,
the
Dukedome
of
Crossen
,
the
Signories
of
Sternberg
,
and
Cotbus
,
the
Countie
of
Rapin
,
and
lately
the
three
Dukedomes
of
Cleue
,
Gulick
,
and
Berg
,
of
which
the
two
former
haue
either
of
them
in
circuit
130.
miles
.
Neare
adioyning
vnto
these
three
last
Dukedomes
,
are
those
Prouinces
of
the
low
Countries
gouerned
by
the
States
,
namely
Zutphen
,
Vtrech
,
Oberyssel
,
Groningham
,
Holland
,
Zeland
,
West-frizland
,
in
which
onely
Protestants
haue
the
publicke
(
for
otherwise
Arrians
,
Anabaptists
,
Socinians
are
here
priuately
tolerated
)
and
free
exercise
of
their
Religion
,
as
also
in
the
neighbour
dominion
of
the
Earle
of
East
-
Freezland
.
But
to
passe
from
these
vnited
Prouinces
vnder
the
States
vnto
France
;
in
this
mighty
kingdome
,
those
(
as
they
usually
stile
them
)
of
the
Religion
,
besides
the
Castels
,
and
fortes
that
doe
belong
in
propertie
vnto
the
Duke
of
Bullen
,
the
Duke
of
Rohan
,
Count
of
Laual
,
the
Duke
of
Trimouile
,
Mounsieur
Chastillion
,
the
Mareshall
of
Digners
,
the
Duke
of
Sully
,
and
others
,
are
seased
of
above
70.
Townes
hauing
Garrisons
of
souldiers
gouerned
by
Nobles
and
Gentlemen
of
the
Religion
;
they
haue
800.
Ministers
receiuing
pensions
out
of
the
publicke
Finance
,
and
are
so
dispersed
through
the
chiefe
prouinces
of
the
kingdome
,
that
in
the
Principalitie
of
Orange
,
Poincton
almost
all
the
Inhabitants
,
in
Gasconynie
halfe
;
in
Languedoc
,
Normandie
,
and
other
westerne
Prouinces
,
a
strong
partie
professe
the
Euangelicall
trueth
.
Which
multitudes
,
although
they
are
but
small
,
and
as
it
were
an
handfull
in
comparison
of
all
bearing
the
names
of
Papists
throughout
the
spacious
continent
of
France
;
yet
in
regard
of
such
as
are
entirely
Popish
,
they
haue
some
proportion
.
For
to
omitte
a
great
part
of
French
Papists
,
who
in
heart
beleeue
the
sincerity
of
the
Gospell
,
but
dare
not
make
profession
thereof
for
worldly
respects
,
as
to
obtaine
great
Offices
,
to
auoide
penalties
,
and
iniustice
in
their
litigious
suites
;
almost
all
the
lawyers
,
[
](A16718-e3640-b)a
a
Vide
instruct
&
Missin's
des
Roys
Tres
ch●s●●ns
&
●eleurs
Ambassadeu●s
,
concernant
le
Councile
de
Trent
.
Bor●ellum
l.
4
de
decret
Ecclesiae
Gallicae
.
●
ti.
21.22
Dua
reuam
li.
2
de
benefi
cap.
10
11.
●
5
cap.
11.
and
learned
sort
who
no
doubt
haue
many
adherents
of
lesse
knowledge
,
hold
,
That
the
Bishop
of
Rome
was
aunciently
the
first
and
chiefest
Bishop
according
to
the
dignity
of
precedencie
,
and
order
,
not
by
any
diuine
Institution
,
but
because
Rome
was
the
chiefe
Citty
of
the
Empire
;
That
he
obtained
his
primacy
ouer
the
Westerne
Church
by
the
guift
and
clemency
of
Pipine
,
Charles
the
great
,
and
other
Kings
of
France
,
and
hath
no
power
to
dispose
of
Temporall
things
;
That
it
belongeth
to
Christian
Kings
and
Princes
to
call
Ecclesiasticall
Synods
,
and
to
establish
their
decrees
,
to
make
Ecclesiasticall
lawes
for
the
good
of
the
Church
,
reforme
the
abuses
therein
,
and
to
haue
the
same
power
and
authority
ouer
sacred
persons
in
causes
Ecclesiasticall
,
as
was
exercised
by
Iosias
,
and
Constantine
the
Great
,
who
said
he
was
a
Bishop
ouer
the
outward
things
of
the
Church
;
That
the
lawes
whereby
their
Church
is
to
bee
gouerned
are
onely
the
Canons
of
the
more
ancient
Councels
,
and
their
owne
Nationall
Decrees
,
and
not
the
Decretals
of
the
Bishops
of
Rome
;
That
the
Councell
of
Constance
assembled
by
Sigismund
the
Emperour
,
&
with
a
concurrent
consent
of
other
Christian
Princes
,
decreeing
a
Generall
Synode
to
be
superiours
vnto
the
Pope
,
and
correcting
many
enormious
abuses
in
the
Roman
Church
which
yet
remaine
in
practise
,
was
a
true
oecumenicall
Councell
,
and
so
likewise
the
Councell
of
Basill
;
That
the
Assembly
of
Trent
was
no
lawfull
Councell
,
and
the
Canons
thereof
are
rather
to
be
esteemed
the
Decrees
of
the
Popes
who
called
and
continued
it
,
then
the
Decrees
of
the
Councell
it selfe
,
because
in
this
Assembly
Bishops
onely
(
contrary
to
the
practise
of
the
Councell
of
Basill
)
had
decisiue
voyces
,
and
the
greatest
parts
of
Bishops
were
Italian
the
Popes
vassals
;
and
besides
,
nothing
was
then
determined
that
was
not
at
Rome
fore-determined
by
the
Pope
;
That
the
Sacrament
of
the
Lords
Supper
ought
to
be
administred
vnder
both
kinds
,
and
at
the
least
a
great
part
of
diuine
seruice
is
to
be
performed
in
their
vulgar
tongues
;
Thus
are
the
greater
number
of
Lawyers
and
learned
men
in
France
affected
,
and
those
who
are
throughly
popish
are
for
the
most
part
men
of
the
basest
sort
wholy
leauened
with
the
bitter
slanders
and
calumniations
of
malicious
Friers
.
Now
if
to
all
the
forenamed
kingdomes
,
Principalities
,
Dukedomes
,
States
,
Citties
abounding
with
professors
of
the
trueth
,
we
adde
the
Monarchies
of
Greate
Britannie
,
Denmarke
,
Sweden
,
wholy
in
a
manner
Protestant
,
wee
shall
finde
them
not
much
inferiour
in
number
and
amplitude
to
the
Romish
partie
;
especially
if
we
consider
that
the
very
bulke
and
body
hereof
,
Italy
,
and
Spaine
,
are
by
a
kinde
of
violence
,
and
necessity
,
rather
then
out
of
any
free
choice
and
iudgement
deteined
in
their
superstition
;
namely
by
the
iealousie
,
crueltie
,
and
tyrannous
vigilancy
of
the
inquisition
,
and
their
owne
ignorance
,
being
[
](A16718-e3720-b)a
a
Vide
indicem
libro
.
prohi
.
ed●t
.
iussu
Clem.
8.
Et
Azou
.
lin.
8.
Morel
.
Ins●t
.
cap.
26.
by
Clement
the
8.
vtterly
debarred
from
all
reading
of
the
Sacred
Scriptures
,
whereby
they
might
come
to
the
knowledge
of
the
Truth
.
And
if
any
shall
except
that
the
Protestants
in
diuerse
Countries
before
mentioned
cannot
bee
reputed
as
one
body
,
and
of
one
Church
,
by
reason
of
many
differences
,
and
hot
contentions
amongest
them
,
let
such
remember
,
that
howsoeuer
some
priuate
men
in
this
holy
society
rather
then
of
it
,
preferring
their
nouell
and
passionate
fancies
,
before
the
peace
of
the
Church
,
purchased
with
Christs
precious
bloud
,
and
the
publicke
weale
of
Christian
Monarchies
,
vnnaturall
toward
their
owne
deere
Mother
,
rending
that
wombe
wherein
they
were
new
borne
by
the
lauer
of
Regeneration
,
forgetfull
of
their
heauenly
embassage
,
which
is
not
onely
to
reconcile
men
vnto
God
,
but
men
with
men
,
so
farre
neglecting
their
owne
eternall
saluation
,
as
to
be
vnmindfull
of
that
most
vndoubted
truth
,
He
that
is
not
in
charity
,
is
in
death
,
trampling
vnder
foote
that
glorious
legacie
of
their
Lord
and
Maister
,
My
peace
I
giue
vnto
you
,
my
peace
I
leaue
with
you
,
haue
in
heat
of
contention
,
and
bitternesse
of
their
soules
strained
and
racked
their
weake
vnderstandings
,
to
make
differences
betweene
themselues
,
euen
in
the
maine
Articles
of
Faith
,
and
branded
one
another
with
blasphemy
,
and
heresie
,
yet
these
vnchristian
and
vncharitable
dissensions
are
not
to
be
imputed
to
the
whole
sacred
community
of
Orthodox
Churches
,
whose
harmony
and
agreement
in
necessary
points
of
Faith
,
are
onely
to
be
esteemed
by
their
confessions
which
by
publicke
authority
they
haue
diuulged
vnto
the
world
.
How
many
are
the
differences
both
in
doctrine
and
discipline
betweene
the
Proctors
for
the
Papall
faction
,
touching
Discipline
?
some
teach
their
cheefetaine
the
Pope
may
erre
,
others
that
he
cannot
:
some
that
he
is
subiect
vnto
a
Generall
Councell
,
others
that
hee
is
aboue
it
:
some
that
all
Ecclesiasticall
authority
is
immediately
in
the
Prelates
of
the
Church
,
others
that
it
is
onely
in
the
Pope
,
and
from
him
deriued
vnto
inferiour
Bishops
:
some
that
he
hath
temporall
authorities
ouer
Princes
,
others
not
;
concerning
doctrine
,
some
at
firme
that
predestination
both
by
grace
,
and
glory
is
meerely
from
Gods
free
pleasure
,
others
from
foreseene
desert
and
merit
,
some
that
all
the
bookes
or
part
of
them
belonging
vnto
the
old
Testament
which
were
not
in
the
Canon
of
the
Iewish
Church
are
Apocriphall
,
others
canonicall
euen
in
the
matters
of
Faith
:
some
that
there
is
no
originall
sinne
inherent
in
vs
,
but
only
imputed
,
others
that
it
is
both
inherent
and
imputed
:
some
that
wee
are
most
freely
iustified
,
by
the
meanes
of
Faith
,
Hope
,
&c.
others
by
the
value
,
and
merit
of
these
vertues
:
some
that
faith
is
onely
a
generall
assent
vnto
diuine
truths
,
others
that
it
is
a
speciall
perswasion
touching
the
remission
of
our
sinnes
through
Christ
,
some
that
wee
appeare
righteous
in
Gods
sight
,
partly
through
imputed
,
partly
through
inherent
righteousnesse
,
others
onely
by
inherent
:
some
that
eternall
life
is
due
vnto
our
works
onely
by
vertue
of
Gods
free
and
gratious
promise
,
others
through
the
merit
of
the
worke
done
:
some
that
all
the
morall
good
works
of
Infidels
,
and
Ethnicks
are
sinnes
,
others
that
they
are
without
sinne
;
some
that
the
B.
Virgin
was
conceiued
without
originall
sinne
,
others
the
contrary
,
and
that
with
such
eagernesse
,
that
the
one
condemne
the
other
of
heresie
:
yet
because
these
contentions
are
betweene
priuate
men
,
and
they
all
(
in
Spaine
and
Italie
,
but
not
in
France
,
as
hath
beene
(
hewed
)
accord
in
the
cheefe
points
of
doctrine
publiquely
established
in
the
Councell
of
Trent
,
they
boast
much
of
their
vnity
.
Although
then
some
priuate
men
vnworthy
to
take
the
word
of
peace
and
reconciliation
into
their
virulent
and
contentious
mouthes
,
led
more
by
passion
,
and
their
owne
selfe-pleasing
conceipt
,
then
by
the
sacred
rules
of
truth
,
and
piety
,
haue
laboured
to
sow
the
tares
of
dissention
in
the
vineyard
of
the
Lord
,
and
heereby
haue
made
crooked
some
few
branches
cleauing
vnto
them
:
yet
the
generall
societies
of
Orthodox
Churches
in
the
publicke
confessions
of
their
faith
,
doe
so
agree
,
that
there
is
a
most
sacred
harmony
betweene
them
in
the
more
substantiall
points
of
Christian
Religion
necessary
to
saluation
.
This
is
manifest
out
of
the
confessions
themselues
,
which
are
these
,
the
Anglicane
,
the
Scotiane
,
French
,
Heluctian
former
,
and
later
,
the
Belgie
,
Polonie
,
Argentine
,
Augustane
,
Saxonicke
,
Wirtenbergicke
,
Palatine
,
Bohemicke
or
Weldensian
confession
:
for
there
is
none
of
the
Churches
formerly
pointed
out
in
diuers
places
of
Europe
which
doth
not
embrace
one
of
these
confessions
,
and
all
of
them
harmoniously
conspire
in
the
principall
Articles
of
Faith
,
and
which
neerest
concerne
our
eternall
saluation
;
as
in
the
infallible
verity
and
full
sufficiency
of
the
Scriptures
,
diuine
essence
and
vnitie
of
the
euerlasting
Godhead
,
the
sacred
Trinitie
of
the
three
glorious
persons
,
the
blessed
incarnation
of
Christ
,
the
omnipotent
prouidence
of
God
,
the
absolute
supreame
head
of
the
Church
,
Christ
,
iustification
by
Faith
through
Christ
,
and
the
nature
of
a
liuely
faith
,
repentance
,
regeneration
and
sanctification
,
the
difference
betweene
the
Law
,
and
the
Gospell
,
touching
freewill
,
sinne
,
and
good
works
,
the
Sacraments
their
number
and
vse
,
the
notes
of
the
Church
,
the
diuine
authority
of
Magistrates
,
the
resurrection
,
and
state
of
soules
after
death
.
And
for
the
cheefe
point
of
difference
which
is
conceiued
to
be
betweene
the
professors
of
the
Gospell
about
the
presence
of
Christ
in
the
sacred
Eucharist
;
such
as
are
parties
in
this
contention
ingenuously
confesse
,
that
de
reipsa
,
touching
the
thing
it selfe
there
is
no
opposition
but
only
we
varie
in
some
ordinances
,
and
circumstances
of
the
thing
.
We
agree
reipsa
,
in
the
matter
it selfe
,
although
we
differ
according
to
the
diuersity
of
Gods
gifts
in
expressing
aptly
and
cleerely
what
we
conceiue
concerning
this
matter
.
We
all
acknowledge
that
the
holy
Symboles
,
or
signes
,
are
not
inanes
significationes
,
barely
significatiue
,
but
what
by
diuine
institution
they
represent
and
testifie
vnto
our
soules
,
is
as
truly
and
certainly
deliuered
vnto
vs
from
God
as
the
symboles
themselues
.
But
the
question
is
,
whether
as
the
signe
with
the
thing
signified
is
present
in
respect
of
our
body
,
and
not
rather
in
regard
of
our
well
receiuing
it
by
faith
.
Moreouer
,
whether
as
both
the
signe
,
and
thing
signified
are
exhibited
to
all
,
so
all
receiue
both
,
some
to
life
,
others
to
their
perdition
.
So
that
wee
all
beleeue
the
true
communication
of
the
true
body
and
bloud
of
our
Lord
Iesus
Christ
,
onely
concerning
the
manner
of
communication
is
the
controuersie
.
But
who
can
rightlie
iudge
that
for
this
the
sacred
vnion
and
fellowship
of
Churches
,
is
to
be
dissolued
.
There
being
so
excellent
a
foundation
and
firm
ground-worke
of
vnity
betweene
the
Protestants
,
how
worthy
a
worke
would
it
be
for
Christian
Princes
to
imitate
the
professors
of
the
Gospell
in
the
kingdome
of
Polonia
,
and
by
a
generall
Assembly
of
moderate
,
and
vnpartiall
Iudges
and
sensible
of
the
bleeding
wounds
religion
receiueth
by
sects
,
and
discords
,
make
vp
the
ruines
and
breaches
of
Churches
,
caused
hitherto
through
priuate
contention
,
&
to
sement
them
together
(
if
it
shall
please
God
out
of
the
riches
of
his
mercy
to
prosper
their
heroicall
and
religious
endeauours
)
with
an
euerlasting
bond
of
concord
.
There
were
neuer
greater
hopes
of
the
successe
of
so
noble
and
●ncomparable
a
worke
,
then
in
this
age
which
hath
affoorided
vs
the
blessing
of
our
most
gratious
Soueraigne
,
so
religiously
studious
of
publicke
peace
,
and
so
exquisitelie
enabled
with
many
rare
endowments
to
promote
so
pious
and
renowned
an
action
.
In
the
meane
time
,
if
any
in
these
priuate
distractions
concerning
matters
of
Religion
excited
by
the
malice
of
Sathan
,
and
his
wretched
instruments
,
shall
doubt
which
way
to
take
,
let
him
folow
the
graue
&
diuine
instructions
of
that
excellent
light
of
the
Church
S.
Augustine
;
who
first
exhorteth
vs
not
to
busie
our selues
ouermuch
in
enquiring
after
those
things
quae
nihil
certi
habent
in
Scriptura
,
which
haue
no
firme
footing
in
the
Scriptures
,
but
in
receiuing
,
or
reiecting
them
to
follow
the
custome
,
&
practise
of
particular
Churches
wherein
we
liue
;
otherwise
(
saith
[
](A16718-e3940-b)a
a
Epist.
86.
he
)
If
we
will
dispute
of
these
things
,
&
contend
one
with
another
:
orietur
interminata
luctatio
,
there
will
hence
arise
an
endlesse
strife
.
And
his
second
admonition
is
,
that
for
the
establishing
of
our
consciences
in
points
of
faith
necessary
to
obtaine
eternall
life
,
we
would
follow
our
blessed
Sauiours
commandement
:
Search
the
Scriptures
,
Why
(
[
](A16718-e3980-b)b
b
In
Psal.
21.
saith
this
deuout
and
learned
Father
speaking
to
contentious
Christians
)
doe
we
striue
?
we
are
brethren
.
Our
Father
hath
not
dyed
intestate
:
he
hath
made
his
last
wil
:
he
is
dead
,
&
risen
againe
.
There
is
contention
still
about
an
inheritance
as
long
as
the
Testament
is
not
made
knowne
,
but
when
it
is
published
in
judgement
all
are
silent
to
heare
it
.
The
Iudge
attentiuely
listneth
vnto
it
,
the
Aduocats
hold
their
peace
:
the
cryers
command
silence
,
&
the
whole
multitude
present
,
stand
in
a
suspence
,
that
the
words
of
a
dead
man
lying
in
his
graue
without
sense
and
life
may
be
rehearsed
.
Are
the
words
of
a
dead
man
&
interred
,
so
powerfull
&
aualeable
,
and
shall
the
Testament
of
Christ
sitting
in
heauen
be
impugned
?
Open
it
,
let
vs
read
,
we
are
brethren
,
why
do
we
striue
?
Our
father
hath
not
left
vs
destitute
of
his
last
wil
:
he
that
made
it
liueth
for
euer
;
he
heareth
our
voice
&
acknowledgeth
his
owne
voice
.
Let
vs
reade
,
why
contend
we
?
Hauing
found
the
inheritance
let
vs
lay
hold
of
it
aperi
,
lege
:
open
and
read
.
OF
THE
ANCIENT
LARGENES
of
the
Greeke
tongue
.
CHAP.
1.
GREECE
,
as
it
was
ancientlie
knowen
by
the
name
of
Hellas
,
was
inclosed
betwixt
the
Bay
of
Ambracia
,
with
the
riuer
Arachthus
,
that
falleth
into
it
on
the
West
,
and
the
riuer
Peneneus
on
the
North
,
Strabo
.
l.
8.
non
longè
a
principio
.
&
the
Sea
on
other
parts
.
So
that
Acarnania
and
Thessalie
,
were
toward
the
Continent
,
the
vtmost
regions
of
Greece
.
But
yet
,
not
the
Countreys
onely
contained
within
those
limits
,
but
also
the
kingdomes
of
Macedon
,
and
Epirus
;
being
the
next
adioyning
prouinces
(
Macedon
toward
the
North
,
Epirus
toward
the
West
)
had
aunciently
the
Greeke
tongue
for
their
vulgare
language
:
for
although
it
belonged
originally
to
Hellas
alone
,
yet
in
time
it
became
vulgare
to
these
also
.
Secondly
,
it
was
the
language
of
all
the
Isles
in
the
Aegaean
sea
;
of
all
those
Ilands
I
say
,
that
are
betwixt
Greece
and
Asia
,
both
,
of
the
many
small
ones
,
that
lie
between
Candie
and
Negropont
,
named
Cyclades
(
there
are
of
them
53.
)
and
of
all
aboue
Negropont
also
,
as
farre
as
the
Strait
of
Constantinople
.
Thirdly
,
of
the
Isles
of
Candie
,
Scarpanto
,
Rhodes
,
and
a
part
of
Cyprus
,
and
of
all
the
small
Islands
along
the
coast
of
Asia
,
from
Candie
to
Syria
.
Fourthly
,
not
only
of
al
the
West
part
of
Asia
the
lesse
,
(
now
called
Anatolia
,
and
corruptly
Natolia
)
lying
toward
the
Aegaean
sea
,
as
being
verie
thicke
planted
with
Greeke
Colonies
:
Sen●e
.
Consol.
ad
Helu
.
c.
6.
Pl●n
.
l.
5.
c.
29.
Isocrat
.
in
Panegiric
.
long
.
post
.
med.
Lucian
.
in
Dialog.
de
Amorib
.
non
longè
.
ab
Init.
of
which
,
some
one
,
Miletus
by
name
,
is
registred
by
Seneca
,
to
haue
bene
the
mother
of
75.
by
Plinie
,
of
80.
Cittyes
;
But
on
the
North
side
also
toward
the
Euxine
sea
,
as
farre
(
saith
Isocrates
)
as
Sinope
,
and
on
the
South
side
respecting
Afrique
,
as
farre
(
saith
Lucian
)
as
the
Chelidonian
Isles
,
which
are
ouer
against
the
confines
of
Lycia
with
Pamphylia
.
And
yet
although
within
these
limits
onely
,
Greeke
was
generally
spoken
,
on
the
Maritime
coast
of
Asia
,
yet
beyond
them
,
on
both
the
shoares
Eastward
,
were
many
Greeke
Cities
(
though
not
without
Barbarous
Cities
among
them
.
)
And
specially
I
find
the
North
coast
of
Asia
,
euen
as
farre
as
Trebizond
,
to
haue
bin
exceedingly
well
stored
with
them
.
But
,
it
may
be
further
obserued
likewise
out
of
histories
,
that
not
onely
al
the
maritime
part
of
Anatolia
could
vnderstand
and
speake
the
Greeke
tongue
,
but
most
of
the
inland
people
also
,
both
by
reason
of
the
great
traffique
,
which
those
rich
Countries
had
for
the
most
part
with
Grecians
,
and
for
that
on
all
sides
,
the
East
onely
excepted
,
they
were
inuironed
with
them
.
Yet
neuerthelesse
,
it
is
worthy
obseruing
,
that
albeit
the
Greeke
tongue
preuailed
so
farre
in
the
Regions
of
Anatolia
,
as
to
be
in
a
manner
generall
,
yet
for
all
that
,
it
neuer
became
vulgar
,
nor
extinguished
the
vulgar
languages
of
those
Countries
.
For
it
is
not
onely
particularly
obserued
of
the
Galatians
,
by
Hierome
,
Hieron
.
in
P●oem
l.
●
.
com
.
Epist.
ad
Galat.
Strab.
l.
14.
that
beside
the
Greeke
tongue
,
they
had
also
their
peculiar
language
,
like
that
of
Trier
:
and
of
the
Carians
by
Strabo
,
that
in
their
language
were
found
many
Greeke
words
,
which
doth
manifestly
import
it
to
haue
beene
a
seuerall
tongue
:
but
it
is
directly
recorded
by
[
](A16718-e4580-b)*
*
Lib.
citato
long
.
post
.
med.
et
Plin.
l.
6.
c.
1.
Strabo
,
(
out
of
Ephorus
)
that
of
sixteene
seuerall
nations
,
inhabiting
that
tract
,
onely
three
were
Grecians
,
and
all
the
rest
,
(
whose
names
are
there
registred
)
barbarous
;
and
yet
are
omitted
the
Cappadocians
,
Galatians
,
Lydians
,
Maeonians
,
Cataonians
,
no
smal
prouinces
of
that
Region
.
Euen
as
it
is
also
obserued
by
Plinie
,
and
others
,
that
the
22.
languages
,
wherof
Mithridates
king
of
Pontus
,
Plin.
l.
7.
c.
24.
Val.
Max.
l.
●
.
c
7
Gell.
l.
17.
c.
17.
is
remembred
to
haue
bene
so
skilfull
,
as
to
speake
them
without
an
interpreter
,
were
the
languages
of
so
many
nations
subiect
to
himselfe
,
whose
dominion
yet
we
know
,
to
haue
bene
contained
,
for
the
greatest
part
,
within
Anatolia
.
And
,
although
all
these
bee
euident
testimonies
,
that
the
Greeke
tongue
was
not
the
vulgar
or
natiue
language
of
those
parts
,
yet
,
among
all
none
is
more
effectuall
,
then
that
remembrance
in
the
second
Chapter
of
the
Acts
,
Act.
2.9
.
&
1●
.
where
diuers
of
those
Regions
,
as
Cappadocia
,
Pontus
,
Asia
,
Phrygia
,
and
Pamphylia
,
are
brought
in
for
instances
of
differing
languages
.
Fiftly
,
Of
the
greatest
part
of
the
maritime
coast
of
Thrace
,
not
onely
from
Hellespont
to
Byzantium
,
(
which
was
[
](A16718-e4750-b)*
*
Dousa
.
I●in
.
Constantinopolit
.
pag.
24.
that
part
of
Constantinople
,
in
the
East
corner
of
the
Citie
,
where
the
Serraile
of
the
Great
Turke
now
standeth
)
but
aboue
it
,
all
along
to
the
out-lets
of
Danubius
.
And
yet
beyond
them
also
;
I
finde
many
Greeke
Citties
to
haue
beene
planted
along
that
coast
,
Scylax
Carimand
.
in
Periple
.
Iornand
de
Reb.
Getic
.
c.
5
(
Scylax
of
Carianda
is
my
Author
with
some
others
)
as
far
as
the
Strait
of
Caffa
,
and
specially
in
Taurica
.
Yea
,
and
beyond
that
strait
also
Eastward
,
along
all
the
sea
coast
of
Circassia
,
and
Mengrelia
,
to
the
riuer
of
Phasis
,
&
thence
compassing
to
Trebizond
,
I
finde
mention
of
many
scattered
Greeke
Cities
:
that
is
,
(
to
speake
briefly
)
in
all
the
circumference
of
the
Euxine
Sea
.
Sixtly
,
(
from
the
East
and
North
to
turne
toward
the
West
)
it
was
the
language
of
al
the
West
,
and
South
Ilands
,
that
lie
along
the
coast
of
Greece
,
from
Candie
to
Corfu
,
which
also
was
one
of
them
,
and
withall
,
of
that
fertile
Sicilie
,
in
which
one
Iland
,
I
haue
obserued
in
good
histories
,
aboue
30.
Greeke
Colonies
;
to
haue
beene
planted
,
and
some
of
them
goodly
cities
,
Scrab
L.
6.
in
medi●
.
specially
Agrigentum
and
Syracusa
,
which
later
Strabo
hath
recorded
to
haue
beene
180.
furlongs
,
that
is
,
of
our
miles
22.
and
½
in
circuit
.
Seuenthly
,
Not
onely
of
all
the
maritime
coast
of
Italy
,
that
lyeth
on
the
Tyrrhene
Sea
,
from
the
riuer
Garigliano
,
(
Liris
it
was
formerly
called
)
to
Leucopetra
,
the
most
Southerly
point
of
Italie
,
for
all
that
shoare
being
neere
about
240.
miles
,
was
inhabited
with
Greeke
colonies
:
And
thence
forward
,
of
all
that
end
of
Italie
,
that
lieth
towards
the
Ionian
sea
,
about
the
great
baies
of
Squilacci
and
Taranto
(
which
was
so
thicke
set
with
great
and
goodly
Citties
of
Grecians
,
that
it
gained
the
name
of
Magna
Graecia
)
but
,
beyond
that
also
,
of
a
great
part
of
Apulia
,
lying
towards
the
Adriatique
sea
.
Neither
did
these
maritime
parts
onely
,
but
,
as
it
seemeth
the
Inland
people
also
towards
that
end
of
Italie
,
speake
the
Greeke
tongue
.
For
I
haue
seene
a
few
olde
coines
of
the
Brutians
,
and
more
may
be
seene
in
Goltzius
hauing
Greeke
inscriptions
,
wherein
I
obserue
they
are
named
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
,
Goltz
.
in
Num●smat
.
Magnae
Greciae
Tab.
24.
with
an
ae
,
and
two
tt
.
and
not
as
the
Romane
writers
terme
them
,
Brutij
.
And
I
haue
seene
one
peece
also
of
Pandosia
,
an
inland
Citie
of
those
parts
,
with
the
like
.
Neither
was
the
vulgare
vse
of
the
Greeke
tongue
,
vtterly
extinct
in
some
of
those
parts
of
Italie
,
Galat
in
descriptione
Callipolis
.
till
of
late
:
for
Galateus
a
learned
man
of
that
Country
,
hath
left
written
,
that
when
he
was
a
boy
,
(
and
he
liued
about
.
120.
yeares
agoe
)
they
spake
Greeke
in
Callipollis
a
Cittie
on
the
East
shore
of
the
Bay
of
Taranto
.
But
yet
it
continued
in
Ecclesiasticall
vse
in
some
other
parts
of
that
region
of
Italie
much
later
:
Bar.
lib.
5.
de
Antiquit.
Calabriae
.
for
Gabriel
Barrius
that
liued
but
about
40.
yeares
since
,
hath
left
recorded
,
that
the
Church
of
Rossano
(
an
Archiepiscopall
Cittie
in
the
vpper
Calabria
)
retained
the
Greeke
tongue
and
ceremony
till
his
time
,
and
then
became
Latine
.
Rocca
Tract
.
de
Dialectis
in
Italica
li●gua
.
Nay
,
to
descend
yet
a
little
neerer
the
present
time
,
Angelus
Rocca
that
writ
but
about
20.
yeares
agoe
,
hath
obserued
,
that
he
found
in
some
parts
of
Calabria
,
and
Apulia
,
some
remainders
of
the
Greeke
speech
to
be
still
retained
.
Eightly
,
and
Lastly
,
that
shoare
of
Fraunce
,
that
lieth
towards
the
mediterraine
sea
,
from
Rodanus
to
Italie
,
was
possessed
with
Grecians
,
for
[
](A16718-e5420-b)*
*
Strab.
l.
4.
non
long
.
a
princip.
Thuscid
.
l
1.
Massilia
was
a
Colonie
of
the
Phoceans
,
and
from
it
many
other
Colonies
were
deriued
,
and
[
](A16718-e5450-b)*
*
Strab.
loco
citato
.
Plin.
L.
3.
C.
5.
placed
along
that
shore
,
as
farre
as
Nicaea
,
in
the
beginning
of
Italie
,
which
also
was
one
of
them
.
And
yet
beside
all
these
forenamed
,
I
could
recken
vp
verie
manie
other
dispersed
Colonies
of
the
Greekes
both
in
Europe
,
and
Asia
,
and
some
in
Afrique
,
for
although
I
remember
not
,
that
I
haue
read
in
any
history
,
any
Colonies
of
the
Grecians
to
haue
beene
planted
in
Afrique
,
any
where
from
the
greater
Syrtis
Westward
,
except
one
in
Cirta
,
a
Cittie
of
Numidia
,
placed
there
by
Micipsa
the
son
of
Masinissa
,
as
is
mentioned
in
Strabo
:
yet
thence
Eastward
it
is
certaine
some
were
:
Strab.
L.
17.
for
the
great
Citties
of
Cyrene
,
and
Alexandria
,
were
both
Greeke
.
And
it
is
euident
,
not
onely
in
[
](A16718-e5640-b)*
*
Loco
iam
citato
.
Ptolom
.
Tab.
3.
Africae
.
Mela.
l.
1.
C.
8.
Strabo
and
Ptolemie
,
but
in
Mela
,
and
other
Latine
writers
,
that
most
of
the
Citties
of
that
part
carried
Greeke
names
.
And
Lastly
,
Hierome
hath
directly
recorded
,
that
Libia
,
which
is
properly
that
part
of
Afrique
adioyning
to
Aegypt
,
was
full
of
Greeke
Citties
.
These
were
the
places
,
where
the
Greeke
tongue
was
natiuely
and
vulgarly
spoken
,
Hieroni●
.
Loco
supra
citato
.
either
originally
,
or
by
reason
of
Colonies
.
But
yet
for
other
causes
,
it
became
much
more
large
and
generall
.
One
was
the
loue
of
Philosophie
,
and
the
liberall
arts
,
written
in
a
manner
onely
in
Greeke
.
Another
,
the
exceeding
great
trade
and
traffique
of
Grecians
,
in
which
,
aboue
all
nations
,
except
perhaps
the
old
Phenicians
(
to
whom
yet
they
seeme
not
to
haue
beene
inferior
)
they
imployed
themselues
.
A
third
,
beyond
all
these
,
because
those
great
Princes
,
among
whom
al
that
Alexander
the
Great
had
conquered
,
was
diuided
,
were
Grecians
,
which
for
manie
reasons
,
could
not
but
exceedingly
spreade
the
Greeke
tongue
,
in
all
those
parts
where
they
were
Gouernors
:
among
whom
,
euen
one
alone
,
Seleucus
by
name
,
is
registred
by
Appian
,
to
haue
founded
in
the
East
parts
vnder
his
gouernement
,
Appian
.
L.
de
Bel●s
Syriac
.
at
least
60
Citties
,
al
of
them
carrying
Greeke
names
,
or
else
named
after
his
father
,
his
wiues
,
or
himselfe
.
And
yet
was
there
a
fourth
cause
,
that
in
the
after
time
greatly
furthered
this
inlargement
of
the
Greeke
tongue
,
namely
the
imployment
of
Grecians
in
the
gouerment
of
the
prouinces
,
after
the
translation
of
the
Imperiall
seate
to
Constantinople
.
For
these
causes
I
say
,
together
with
the
mixture
of
Greeke
Colonies
,
dispersed
in
many
places
(
in
which
fruitfulnesse
of
Colonies
,
the
Grecians
far
passed
the
Romanes
)
the
Greeke
tongue
spred
very
farre
,
especially
towards
the
East
.
In
so
much
,
that
all
the
Orient
(
which
yet
must
be
vnderstoode
with
limitation
,
namely
the
Orientall
part
of
the
Romane
Empire
,
or
to
speake
in
the
phrase
of
those
times
,
the
dioces
of
the
Orient
,
which
contained
Syria
,
Palestine
,
Cilicia
,
and
part
of
Mesopotaneia
and
of
Arabia
)
is
said
by
Hierome
,
Hieror
.
bisuper
.
to
haue
spoken
Greeke
:
which
also
Isidore
,
specially
obserueth
,
in
Aegypt
,
and
Syria
,
to
haue
beene
the
Dorique
dialect
.
I●●dor
.
Origin
.
L.
9
C.
1.
And
this
great
glory
,
the
Greeke
tongue
held
in
the
Apostles
time
,
and
long
after
,
in
the
Easterne
parts
,
till
by
the
inundation
of
the
Saracens
of
Arabia
,
it
came
to
ruine
in
those
prouinces
,
about
.
640
yeares
after
the
birth
of
our
Sauiour
,
namely
,
in
the
time
of
the
Emperour
Heraclius
(
the
Arabians
bringing
in
their
language
together
with
their
victories
,
into
all
the
regions
they
subdued
)
euen
as
the
Latine
tongue
is
supposed
to
haue
perished
by
the
inundation
and
mixture
of
the
Gothes
,
and
other
barbarous
nations
in
the
West
.
Of
the
Decaying
of
the
ancient
Greeke
tongue
,
and
of
the
present
vulgar
Greeke
.
CHAP.
2.
BVt
at
this
day
,
the
Greeke
tongue
is
very
much
decayed
,
not
onely
as
touching
the
largenesse
,
and
vulgarnesse
of
it
,
but
also
in
the
purenesse
and
elegancy
of
the
language
.
For
as
touching
the
former
,
First
,
in
Italie
,
Fraunce
,
and
other
places
to
the
West
,
the
naturall
languages
of
the
countries
haue
vsurped
vpon
it
.
Secondly
,
in
the
skirts
of
Greece
it selfe
,
namely
in
Epirus
,
and
that
part
of
Macedon
,
that
lieth
towards
the
Adriatique
sea
,
the
Sclauonique
tongue
hath
extinguished
it
.
Thirdly
,
in
Anatolia
,
the
Turkish
tongue
hath
for
a
great
part
suppressed
it
.
And
Lastly
,
in
the
more
Eastward
,
and
South
parts
,
as
in
that
part
of
Cilicia
,
that
is
beyond
the
riuer
Piramus
,
in
Siria
,
Palestine
,
Aegypt
and
Libia
,
the
Arabian
tongue
hath
abolished
it
:
Abolished
it
I
say
,
namely
,
as
touching
any
vulgar
vse
,
for
,
as
touching
Ecclesiasticall
vse
,
many
Christians
of
those
parts
still
retaine
it
in
their
Leiturgies
.
So
that
,
the
parts
in
which
the
Greeke
tongue
is
spoken
at
this
day
,
are
(
in
few
words
)
but
these
.
First
Greece
it selfe
(
excepting
Epirus
,
and
the
West
part
of
Macedon
.
)
Secondly
,
the
Isles
of
the
Aegaean
sea
.
Thirdly
,
Candie
,
&
the
Isles
Eastward
of
Candie
,
along
the
coast
of
Asia
to
Cyprus
(
although
in
Cyprus
,
diuers
other
languages
are
spoken
,
beside
the
Greeke
)
and
likewise
the
Isles
Westward
of
Candia
,
along
the
Coastes
of
Greece
,
and
Epirus
,
to
Corfu
.
And
Lastly
,
a
good
part
of
Anatolia
.
But
as
I
said
,
the
Greeke
tongue
,
is
not
onely
thus
restrained
,
in
comparison
of
the
ancient
extention
that
it
had
,
but
it
is
also
much
degenerated
and
impaired
,
as
touching
the
purenesse
of
speech
,
being
ouergrowne
with
barbarousnesse
:
But
yet
not
without
some
rellish
of
the
ancient
elegancie
.
Neither
is
it
altogether
so
much
declined
from
the
antient
Greeke
,
Bellon
.
Obseruat
.
L.
1.
c.
3
Turcogroec
.
L.
3.
&
5.
as
the
Italian
is
departed
from
the
Latine
,
as
Bellonius
hath
also
obserued
,
and
by
conferring
of
diuers
Epistles
of
the
present
language
,
which
you
may
finde
in
Crusius
his
Turcograecia
,
with
the
ancient
tongue
,
may
be
put
out
of
question
,
which
corruption
yet
,
certainely
hath
not
befallen
that
language
,
through
any
inundation
of
barbarous
people
,
as
is
supposed
to
haue
altered
the
Latine
tongue
,
for
although
I
know
Greece
to
haue
beene
ouerrunne
,
&
wasted
,
by
the
Gothes
,
yet
I
finde
not
in
histories
,
any
remembrance
of
their
habitation
,
or
long
continuance
in
Greece
,
&
of
their
coalition
into
one
people
with
the
Grecians
,
without
which
,
I
conceaue
not
,
how
the
tongue
could
be
greatly
altered
by
them
.
And
yet
certaine
it
is
,
that
long
before
the
Turkes
came
among
them
,
their
language
was
growne
to
the
corruption
wherein
now
it
is
,
for
that
,
in
the
writings
of
Cedrenus
,
Nicetas
,
and
some
other
late
Greekes
,
(
although
long
before
the
Turkes
inuasion
)
there
is
found
,
notwithstanding
they
were
learned
men
,
a
strong
rellish
of
this
barbarousnesse
:
Insomuch
that
the
learned
Grecians
themselues
,
Ge●●ach
.
in
epist.
ad
Crusi●m
.
TurcoGrae●
.
L.
7.
pag.
489.
acknowledge
it
to
bee
very
ancient
,
and
are
vtterly
ignorant
,
when
it
began
in
their
language
:
which
is
to
me
a
certaine
argument
,
that
it
had
no
violent
nor
sodaine
beginning
,
by
the
mixture
of
other
forrain
nations
among
than
,
but
hath
gotten
into
their
language
,
by
the
ordinarie
change
,
which
time
and
many
common
occasions
that
attend
on
time
,
are
wont
to
bring
to
all
languages
in
the
world
,
for
which
reason
,
the
corruption
of
speech
growing
vpon
them
,
by
little
and
little
,
the
change
hath
beene
vnsensible
.
Yet
it
cannot
be
denied
(
and
[
](A16718-e6630-b)*
*
●
Zygomalos
in
Epist.
ad
Cius
.
Turcog
.
pag.
some
of
the
Grecians
themselues
confesse
so
much
)
that
beside
many
Romane
words
,
which
from
the
translation
of
the
imperiall
seate
to
Constantinople
,
began
to
creepe
into
their
language
,
as
we
may
obserue
in
diuers
Greeke
writers
of
good
antiquitie
,
some
Italian
words
also
,
and
Slauonian
,
and
Arabique
,
and
Turkish
,
and
of
other
nations
,
are
gotten
into
their
language
,
by
reason
of
the
great
traffique
and
commerce
,
which
those
people
exercise
with
the
Grecians
.
For
which
cause
,
as
Bellonius
hath
obserued
,
Bello●
.
Obseruat
.
L.
1.
C
3.
it
is
more
altered
in
the
maritime
parts
,
and
such
other
places
of
foraigne
concourse
,
then
in
the
inner
region
.
But
yet
,
the
greatest
part
of
the
corruption
of
that
language
,
hath
beene
bred
at
home
,
and
proceeded
from
no
other
cause
,
then
their
owne
negligence
,
or
affectation
.
As
First
,
(
for
example
)
by
mutilation
of
some
words
,
pronouncing
and
writing
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
for
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
for
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
&c.
Vide
Crus
.
Turcograec
.
pag.
44.224.242.391
398.399
.
&c.
Secondly
,
by
compaction
of
seuerall
words
into
one
,
as
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
for
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
for
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
&c.
Thirdly
,
by
confusion
of
sounde
,
as
making
no
difference
in
the
pronouncing
of
three
vowels
,
namely
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
,
and
two
dipthongues
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
and
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
,
all
which
fiue
they
pronounce
by
one
letter
i
,
as
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
,
they
pronounce
icos
,
icon
,
stithi
,
lipi.
Fourthly
,
by
translation
of
accents
,
from
the
syllables
to
which
in
ancient
pronouncing
they
belonged
,
to
others
.
And
all
those
foure
kindes
of
corruption
,
are
very
common
in
their
language
:
for
which
reasons
,
and
for
some
others
,
which
may
bee
obserued
in
Crusius
,
Burrana
,
Burran
.
in
Coron.
pretiosa
.
&c.
the
Greeke
tongue
,
is
become
much
altered
(
euen
in
the
proper
and
natiue
words
of
the
language
)
from
what
anciently
it
was
.
Yet
neuerthelesse
it
is
recorded
by
some
,
that
haue
taken
diligent
obseruation
of
that
tongue
,
Gerlach
.
apud
C●us
.
l.
7.
Turcograec
.
pag.
489.
in
the
seuerall
parts
of
Greece
,
that
there
be
yet
in
Morea
,
(
Peloponnesus
)
betwixt
Napoli
and
Monembasia
(
Nauplia
and
Epidaurus
they
were
called
)
some
14
townes
,
the
Inhabitants
where
are
called
Zacones
(
for
Lacones
)
that
speake
yet
the
ancient
Greeke
tongue
,
but
farre
out
of
Grammer
rule
:
yet
,
they
vnderstand
those
that
speake
grammaticallie
,
but
vnderstand
not
the
vulgar
Greeke
.
Bellon
.
Obseru.
l.
2.
c.
111.
As
Bellonius
likewise
remembreth
another
place
,
neere
Heraclea
in
Anatolia
,
that
yet
retaineth
the
pure
Greeke
for
their
vulgar
language
.
But
the
few
places
being
excepted
,
it
is
certaine
,
that
the
difference
is
become
so
great
,
betwixt
the
present
and
the
ancient
Greeke
that
their
liturgie
,
[
](A16718-e7080-b)*
*
Burdouitz
.
in
epist.
ad
Chitrae
.
apud
Illum
in
Lib
de
Statu
Ecclesia●
.
pag.
47.
which
is
yet
read
in
the
ancient
Greeke
tongue
,
namely
that
of
Basil
,
on
the
Sabbaths
and
solemne
daies
,
and
that
of
Chrysostome
on
common
daies
,
is
not
vnderstood
(
or
but
little
of
it
)
by
the
vulgar
people
,
as
learned
men
that
haue
beene
in
those
parts
,
haue
related
to
[
](A16718-e7120-b)*
*
Vid.
Chitrae
.
loc.
citato
,
&
Turcograec
.
Crusij
.
pag.
327.
&
415.
&c.
others
,
and
to
my selfe
:
which
may
be
also
more
euidently
prooued
to
bee
true
by
this
,
because
the
skilfull
in
the
learned
Greeke
,
cannot
vnderstand
the
vulgar
.
Of
the
ancient
largenesse
of
the
Roman
tongue
in
the
time
of
the
Roman
Empire
.
CHAP.
III.
THe
ordinary
bounds
of
the
Romane
Empire
were
,
on
the
East
part
Euphrates
,
and
sometimes
Tigris
:
On
the
North
the
Riuers
of
Rhene
&
of
Danubius
,
and
the
Euxine
sea
:
On
the
West
the
Ocean
:
On
the
South
the
Cataracts
of
Nilus
,
in
the
vtmost
border
of
Aegypt
,
and
in
Afrique
the
mountaine
Atlas
.
Which
,
beginning
in
the
West
,
on
the
shoare
of
the
Ocean
,
ouer
against
the
Canarie
Ilands
,
runneth
Eastward
almost
to
Aegypt
,
being
in
few
places
distant
from
the
Mediterrane
sea
,
more
then
200
miles
.
These
I
say
,
were
the
ordinary
bounds
of
that
Empire
in
the
Continent
:
for
,
although
the
Romanes
passed
these
bounds
sometimes
,
specially
toward
the
East
and
North
,
yet
they
kept
little
of
what
they
wan
,
but
within
those
bounds
mentioned
,
the
Empire
was
firmely
established
.
But
heere
,
in
our
great
Isle
of
Britaine
,
the
Pictes
wall
was
the
limit
of
it
,
passing
by
Newcastle
,
and
Carleil
,
from
Tinmouth
on
the
East
sea
,
to
Solway
frith
on
the
West
,
being
[
](A16718-e7360-b)*
*
Spartian
.
in
Hadriano
&
in
Seuero
.
first
begunne
by
the
Emperour
Adrian
,
and
after
finished
or
rather
repaired
,
by
Septimius
Seuerus
.
To
this
greatnesse
of
Dominion
,
Rome
at
last
arriued
from
her
small
beginnings
.
And
small
her
beginnings
were
indeed
,
considering
the
huge
dominion
to
which
she
attained
.
For
first
,
the
Circuit
of
the
Cittie
wall
,
at
the
first
building
of
it
,
by
Romulus
in
Mount
Palatine
,
could
not
be
fully
one
mile
:
for
the
Hill
it selfe
,
as
is
obserued
by
Andrea
Fuluio
,
And
▪
Fulu
.
l.
2.
Antiq.
Rom.
Ca.
3.
a
Citizen
and
Antiquarie
of
Rome
,
hath
no
more
in
circuite
:
And
,
that
Romulus
bounded
the
Pomerium
of
the
Citie
(
which
extended
somewhat
beyond
the
wall
)
with
the
foot
of
that
hill
in
compasse
Gellius
hath
left
registred
.
Gell.
L.
13.
C.
14.
Strab.
L.
1.
Secondly
the
Territorie
and
liberties
of
Rome
,
as
Strabo
hath
remembred
,
extended
at
the
first
,
where
it
stretched
farthest
scarse
six
miles
from
the
Citie
.
And
thirdly
,
the
first
Inhabitants
of
Rome
,
as
I
finde
recorded
in
Dionysius
of
Halicarnassus
,
Dionys
Hal.
l.
2.
Antiq.
Romanar
.
were
not
in
number
aboue
3300
,
at
the
most
.
Yet
,
with
Time
,
and
fortunate
successe
,
Vopisc
.
in
Aureliano
,
Rome
so
increased
,
that
in
Aurelianus
his
time
,
the
circuit
of
the
Citie
wall
,
was
50.
miles
,
as
Vopiscus
hath
recorded
:
And
the
Dominion
,
grew
to
the
largenesse
aboue
mentioned
,
containing
about
3000
miles
in
length
,
and
about
1200
in
breadth
:
and
lastly
the
number
of
free
Cittizens
,
euen
in
the
time
of
Marius
,
that
is
long
before
forraine
Citties
and
Countries
,
beganne
to
be
receiued
into
participation
of
that
freedome
,
was
found
to
be
463000.
as
Eusebius
hath
remembred
:
Euseb.
in
Chronico
.
ad
Olymp.
174.
Of
free
Cittizens
I
say
,
(
for
they
onely
came
into
Cense
)
but
if
I
should
adde
,
their
wiues
,
and
Children
,
and
seruants
,
that
is
,
generally
all
the
Inhabitants
,
[
](A16718-e7640-b)*
*
Lipsius
de
Magni●
.
Romana
.
l.
3.
c.
3.
a
learned
man
hath
esteemed
them
,
and
not
without
great
likelihood
of
truth
,
to
haue
beene
no
lesse
,
then
3.
or
4.
millions
.
Beyond
these
bounds
therefore
of
the
Romane
Empire
,
(
to
speake
to
the
point
in
hand
)
the
Roman
tongue
could
not
be
in
any
common
vse
,
as
neither
,
to
speake
of
our
kings
dominions
,
in
Ireland
,
Scotland
,
nor
Northumberland
,
as
being
no
subiects
of
the
Romane
Empire
.
And
that
within
these
bounds
,
it
stretched
farre
and
wide
,
(
in
such
maner
as
I
will
afterward
declare
)
two
Principall
causes
there
were
.
One
was
,
the
multitude
of
colonies
,
which
partly
to
represse
rebellion
in
the
subdued
Prouinces
,
partly
to
resist
forrain
inuasions
,
partly
to
reward
the
ancient
soldiers
,
partly
to
abate
the
redundance
of
the
City
,
&
relieue
the
poorer
sort
,
were
sent
foorth
to
inhabite
in
all
the
Prouinces
of
the
Empire
:
Another
,
was
the
donation
of
Roman
freedome
,
or
Communication
of
the
right
and
benefit
of
Romane
Citizens
,
to
very
many
of
the
Prouinciall
,
both
Cities
,
and
Regions
.
For
first
,
all
Italie
obtained
that
freedome
in
the
time
of
Sylla
and
Marius
,
Appian
.
l.
1.
Ciuil
longe
ante
med.
at
the
compounding
of
the
Italian
war
,
as
Appian
hath
recorded
:
All
Italie
I
say
,
as
then
it
was
called
,
and
bounded
,
with
the
Riuers
of
Rubicon
and
Arnus
,
that
is
,
the
narrower
part
of
Italie
,
lying
betwixt
the
Adriatique
and
the
Tyrrhene
seas
.
Secondly
Iulius
Caesar
in
like
sort
infranchized
the
rest
of
Italie
,
that
is
the
broder
part
,
named
then
Gallia
Cisalpina
,
as
is
remembred
by
Dion
.
Dion
.
l.
41.
But
not
long
after
,
the
forraine
Prouinces
also
,
began
to
be
infranchized
,
Fraunce
being
indued
with
the
libertie
of
Roman
Citizens
by
Galba
,
as
I
find
in
Tacitus
;
Ta
cit
.
l.
1.
Historia●
.
Plin.
l.
3.
ca.
3.
Spaigne
by
Vespasian
,
as
it
is
in
Plinie
.
And
at
last
,
by
Antonius
Pius
,
all
without
exception
,
that
were
subiect
to
the
Empire
of
Rome
,
as
appeareth
by
the
testimonie
of
Vlpian
in
the
Digests
.
Digest
.
l.
1.
Tit
de
Statu
hominum
Leg.
In
Orbe
Romano
.
The
benefite
of
which
Romane
freedome
,
they
that
would
vse
,
could
not
with
honestie
doe
it
,
remaining
ignorant
of
the
Romane
tongue
.
These
two
as
I
haue
said
,
were
the
principall
causes
of
inlarging
that
language
:
yet
other
there
were
also
,
of
great
importance
,
to
further
it
.
For
first
,
concerning
Ambassages
,
suites
,
appeals
,
or
whatsoeuer
other
businesse
of
the
Prouincials
,
or
forraines
,
nothing
was
allowed
to
be
handled
,
or
spoken
in
the
Senate
at
Rome
,
but
in
the
Latine
tongue
.
Secondly
,
the
Lawes
whereby
the
prouinces
were
gouerned
,
were
all
written
in
that
language
,
as
being
in
all
of
them
,
excepting
onely
municipall
Cities
,
the
ordinarie
Roman
law
.
Thirdly
,
the
[
](A16718-e8060-b)*
*
Digest
.
l.
42
Tit.
de
re
iudicata
.
Leg.
Decret.
Praetors
of
the
Prouinces
,
were
not
allowed
to
deliuer
their
Iudgements
saue
in
that
language
:
and
we
read
in
Dion
Cassius
,
of
a
principall
man
of
Greece
,
that
by
Claudius
was
put
from
the
order
of
Iudges
,
Dion
.
l.
57.
Val.
Maxim.
l.
2
c.
2.
for
being
ignorant
of
the
Latine
tongue
:
and
to
the
same
effect
in
Valerius
Maximus
,
that
the
Romane
Magistrates
would
not
giue
audience
to
the
Grecians
,
(
lesse
therefore
I
take
it
to
the
Barbarous
nations
)
saue
in
the
Latine
tongue
.
Fourthly
the
generall
schooles
,
erected
in
sundry
Cities
of
the
Prouinces
,
wherof
we
finde
mention
in
Tacitus
,
Tacit.
l.
3.
Annal.
Heron.
in
●p
st.
ad
Rusticum
.
Tom.
1.
Hierome
,
and
others
(
in
which
the
Roman
tongue
was
the
ordinary
and
allowed
speech
,
as
is
vsuall
in
vniuersities
till
this
day
)
was
no
small
furtherance
to
that
language
.
And
,
to
conclude
that
the
Romans
had
generally
(
at
least
in
the
after
times
,
when
Rome
was
become
a
Monarchy
,
and
in
the
flourish
of
the
Empire
)
great
care
to
inlarge
their
tongue
,
together
with
their
dominion
,
is
by
Augustine
in
his
bookes
de
Ciuitate
Dei
,
August
.
de
Ciuit.
De●
.
lib.
19.
c.
7.
specially
remembred
.
I
said
it
was
so
in
the
after
times
,
for
certainly
,
that
the
Romanes
were
not
very
anciently
,
possessed
with
that
humour
of
spreading
their
language
,
appeareth
by
Liuie
,
in
whom
we
finde
recorded
,
that
it
was
granted
the
Cumanes
,
Liu.
Histor.
Rom.
l.
4●
for
a
fauour
,
and
at
their
suite
,
that
they
might
publiquely
vse
the
Romane
tongue
,
not
fully
140
yeares
before
the
beginning
of
the
Emperours
:
And
yet
was
Cuma
but
about
100
miles
distant
from
Rome
,
and
at
that
time
the
Romanes
had
conquered
all
Italie
,
Sicilie
,
Sardinia
,
and
a
great
part
of
Spaine
.
But
yet
in
all
the
Prouinces
of
the
Empire
,
the
Romane
tongue
found
not
alike
acceptance
,
and
successe
,
but
most
inlarged
and
spread
it selfe
toward
the
North
,
and
West
,
and
South
bounds
,
for
first
,
that
in
al
the
regions
of
Pannonia
it
was
known
Velleius
is
mine
Author
:
Vellei
.
lib.
2.
Strab.
lib.
3.
&
4.
Secondly
,
that
it
was
spoken
in
Fraunce
and
Spaine
,
Strabo
:
Thirdly
,
that
in
Afrique
,
Apulei
in
Floridis
.
Apuleius
▪
And
it
seemeth
the
sermons
of
Cyprian
,
and
Augustine
,
yet
extant
,
(
of
Augustine
it
is
manifest
)
that
they
preached
to
the
people
in
latin
.
But
in
the
East
parts
of
the
Empire
,
as
in
Greece
,
and
Asia
,
and
so
likewise
in
Afrique
,
from
the
greater
Syrtis
Eastward
,
I
cannot
in
my
reading
finde
that
the
Roman
tongue
euer
grew
into
any
common
vse
.
And
the
reason
of
it
seemes
to
be
,
for
that
in
those
parts
of
the
Empire
it
became
most
frequent
,
where
the
most
,
and
greatest
Roman
Colonies
,
were
planted
.
And
therefore
ouer
all
Italy
,
it
became
in
a
maner
vulgar
,
wherin
I
haue
obserued
in
Histories
,
and
in
registers
of
ancient
inscriptions
,
to
haue
beene
planted
by
the
Romanes
at
seuerall
times
aboue
150
Colonies
:
as
in
Afrique
also
nere
60
,
(
namely
57
)
in
Spaine
29.
in
Fraunce
,
as
it
stretched
to
Rhene
26
,
and
so
in
Illyricum
,
and
other
North
parts
of
the
Empire
,
betweene
the
Adriatique
sea
,
and
Danubius
verie
manie
.
And
yet
I
doubt
not
,
but
in
all
these
parts
,
more
there
were
,
then
any
historie
or
ancient
inscription
that
now
remaines
hath
remembred
.
And
contrariewise
in
those
Countries
,
where
fewest
Colonies
were
planted
,
the
Latine
tongue
grew
nothing
so
common
:
as
for
example
heere
in
Britaine
,
there
were
but
foure
:
those
were
[
](A16718-e8620-b)1
1
Eboracum
Yorke
,
[
](A16718-e8640-b)2
2
Debuna
.
Chester
,
[
](A16718-e8660-b)3
3
Is●a
.
Ca●rusk
in
Monmouth-shire
,
and
[
](A16718-e8690-b)4
4
Camalodunum
.
Maldon
in
Essex
(
for
London
,
although
recorded
for
one
by
Onuphrius
,
Onuphr
.
in
Imper.
Rom.
was
none
,
as
is
manifest
by
his
owne
[
](A16718-e8750-b)*
*
Tacit.
l.
14.
Annal.
Author
,
in
the
place
that
himselfe
alleageth
)
and
therefore
we
finde
in
the
British
tongue
which
yet
remaineth
in
Wales
,
but
little
rellish
(
to
account
of
)
or
reliques
of
the
Latine
.
And
,
for
this
cause
also
partly
,
the
East
prouinces
of
the
Empire
,
sauoured
little
or
nothing
of
the
Roman
tongue
.
For
first
in
Afrique
beyond
the
greater
Syrtis
,
I
find
neuer
a
Roman
Colonie
:
for
Onuphrius
,
Onuphr
.
lib.
iam
citato
.
that
hath
recorded
[
](A16718-e8840-b)*
*
Vide
Digest
.
l.
50.
Tit.
de
Censibus
Leg.
s●●endum
.
Indicia
Cyrenensium
for
one
,
alleaging
Vlpian
for
Author
,
was
deceiued
by
some
faultie
Copie
of
the
Digests
.
For
the
corrected
copies
haue
Zernensium
,
and
for
Indicia
,
is
to
be
read
in
Dacia
,
as
is
rightly
obserued
(
for
in
it
the
Citie
of
Zerne
was
)
by
Pancirellus
.
Secondly
in
Aegypt
,
there
were
but
two
:
Pancirell
.
id
Comment.
Notit
.
Imper
Orien●alis
Cap.
138
.
and
to
be
briefe
,
Syria
,
onely
excepted
,
which
had
about
20
Romane
Colonies
,
but
most
of
them
late
planted
,
especially
by
Septimius
Seuerus
,
and
his
sonne
Bassianus
,
to
strengthen
that
side
of
the
Empire
against
the
Parthians
(
and
yet
I
find
not
that
in
Syria
,
the
Romane
tongue
,
euer
obtained
any
vulgar
vse
)
the
rest
,
had
but
verie
few
,
in
proportion
to
the
largenesse
of
those
regions
.
Of
which
little
estimation
,
and
vse
of
the
Roman
tongue
,
in
the
East
parts
,
beside
the
want
of
Colonies
forementioned
,
and
to
omit
their
loue
to
their
owne
languages
,
which
they
held
to
be
more
ciuill
then
the
Roman
,
another
great
cause
was
the
Greek
,
which
they
had
in
farre
greater
account
,
both
,
for
learning
sake
(
insomuch
that
Cicero
confesseth
,
Graeca
(
saith
he
)
leguntur
in
omnibus
fere
gentibus
,
Cicer.
in
〈◊〉
pro
Archi●
poeta
.
Latina
suis
finibus
,
exiguis
sane
,
continentur
)
and
for
traffique
,
to
both
which
,
the
Graecians
,
aboue
all
nations
of
the
world
were
anciently
giuen
:
to
omit
,
both
the
excellency
of
the
tongue
it self
,
for
sound
&
copiousnes
,
&
that
it
had
forestalled
the
Roman
in
those
parts
.
And
certainly
,
in
how
little
regard
,
the
Roman
tong
was
had
in
respect
of
the
Greeke
,
in
the
Easterne
Countries
,
may
appeare
by
this
,
that
all
the
learned
men
of
those
parts
,
whereof
most
liued
in
the
flourish
of
the
Romane
Empire
,
haue
written
in
Greeke
,
and
not
in
Latine
:
as
Philo
,
Iosephus
,
Ignatius
,
Iustine
Martyr
,
Clemens
Alexandrinus
,
Origen
,
Eusebius
,
Athanasius
,
Basil
,
Gregorie
Nyssene
,
and
Nazianzene
,
Cirill
of
Alexandria
,
and
of
Ierusalem
,
Epiphanius
,
Synetius
,
Ptolemie
Strabo
,
Porphyrie
,
&
verie
many
others
,
so
that
of
all
the
writers
that
liued
in
Asia
,
or
in
Afrique
,
beyond
the
greater
Syrtis
,
I
thinke
wee
haue
not
one
Author
in
the
Latine
tongue
:
and
yet
more
euidently
,
may
it
appeare
by
another
instance
,
that
I
finde
in
the
third
generall
Counsell
held
at
Ephesus
,
Consil.
Ephesi●
.
Tom.
2
Cap
13.
Edit.
Bin.
where
the
letters
of
the
Bishop
of
Rome
,
hauing
beene
read
by
his
Legates
,
in
the
Latine
tongue
,
it
was
requested
by
all
the
Bishops
,
that
they
might
bee
translated
into
Greeke
,
to
the
end
they
might
be
vnderstood
.
It
is
manifest
therefore
,
that
the
Romane
tongue
was
neither
vulgar
,
nor
familiar
in
the
East
,
when
the
learned
men
gathered
out
of
all
parts
of
the
East
vnderstood
it
not
.
That
the
Romane
tongue
abolished
not
the
vulgar
languages
,
in
the
foraine
prouinces
of
the
Romane
Empire
.
CHAP.
IIII.
OF
the
weake
impression
therefore
of
the
Romane
language
in
the
East
,
and
large
intertainement
of
it
in
the
West
,
and
other
parts
of
the
Empire
,
and
of
the
causes
of
both
,
I
haue
said
enough
.
But
in
what
sort
,
Galat.
de
Situ
〈◊〉
98.
and
how
farre
it
preuailed
,
namely
,
whether
so
farre
,
as
to
extinguish
the
ancient
vulgar
languages
of
those
parts
,
and
it selfe
,
in
stead
of
them
,
to
become
the
natiue
and
vulgar
tongue
,
as
Galateus
hath
pronounced
touching
the
Punique
,
V●r
L.
3
de
Trad●n●
discipl●n
&
ad
August
de
Cauit
.
Deid
.
19.
●
.
●
.
and
Viues
with
many
others
of
the
Gallique
,
and
Spanish
,
I
am
next
to
consider
.
First
therefore
,
it
is
certainely
obserued
,
that
there
are
at
this
day
,
foureteene
mother
tongues
in
Europe
(
beside
the
Latine
)
which
remaine
,
not
onely
not
abolished
,
but
little
or
nothing
altered
,
or
impaired
by
the
Romanes
.
And
those
are
the
1
Irish
,
spoken
in
Ireland
,
and
a
good
part
of
Scotland
:
the
2
Brittish
,
in
Wales
,
Cornewaile
,
and
Brittaine
of
Fraunce
:
the
3
Cantabrian
neere
the
Ocean
,
[
](A16718-e9510-b)3
3
Scaligan
Diatrib
de
ling
Europ●●
.
about
the
Pyrene
,
hils
,
both
in
Fraunce
&
Spaine
:
the
4
Arabique
,
[
](A16718-e9560-b)4
4
Merul.
Cosm
part
.
2.
L
,
2.
C.
8.
in
the
steepie
mountaines
of
Granata
,
named
Alpuxarras
:
the
5
Finnique
,
[
](A16718-e9600-b)5
5
Scalig.
loco
.
citato
.
in
Finland
,
and
Lapland
:
the
6
Dutch
,
in
Germanie
,
Belgia
,
Denmarke
,
Norwey
,
and
Suedia
:
the
old
7
Cauchian
,
(
I
take
it
to
be
that
,
for
in
that
part
the
Cauchi
inhabited
)
in
East
Frisland
,
for
[
](A16718-e9690-b)*
*
Ortel
.
in
Tab.
Fris.
Oriental
.
although
to
straungers
they
speake
Dutch
,
yet
among
themselues
they
vse
a
peculiar
language
of
their
owne
:
the
8
Slauonish
,
in
Polonia
,
Bohemia
,
Moscouia
,
Russia
,
and
many
other
regions
,
(
wherof
I
will
after
intreate
in
due
place
)
although
with
notable
difference
of
dialect
,
as
also
the
Brittish
,
and
Dutch
,
in
the
countries
mentioned
haue
:
the
old
9
Illyrian
,
in
the
Isle
of
Veggia
,
on
the
East
side
of
Istria
in
the
day
of
Liburnia
:
the
10
Greeke
,
in
Greece
,
and
the
Islands
about
it
,
and
part
of
Macedon
,
and
of
Thrace
:
the
old
11
Epirotique
[
](A16718-e9840-b)*
*
Scalig.
loco
citato
.
in
the
mountaine
of
Epirus
:
the
12
Hungarian
in
the
greatest
part
of
that
kingdome
:
the
13
Iazygian
,
[
](A16718-e9880-b)13
13
Bert.
in
Descript.
Hungar
.
in
the
North
side
of
Hungaria
betwixt
Danubius
&
Tibiscus
,
vtterly
differing
from
the
Hungarian
language
:
And
lastly
,
the
14
Tarturian
,
of
the
Precopenses
,
betweene
the
Riuers
of
Tanais
and
Borysthenes
,
neere
Maeotis
and
the
Euxine
sea
,
for
,
of
the
English
,
Italian
,
Spanish
,
and
French
,
as
being
deriuations
,
or
rather
degenerations
,
the
first
of
the
Dutch
,
and
the
other
three
of
the
Latine
,
seeing
I
now
speake
onely
of
originall
or
mother
languages
,
I
must
bee
silent
:
And
of
all
these
foureteene
it
is
certaine
,
except
the
Arabique
,
which
is
known
to
haue
entred
since
,
and
perhaps
the
Hungarian
,
about
which
there
is
difference
among
Antiquaries
,
that
they
were
in
Europe
in
time
of
the
Romane
Empire
,
and
sixe
or
seuen
of
them
,
within
the
Limites
of
the
Empire
.
And
indeede
,
how
hard
a
matter
it
is
,
vtterly
to
abolish
a
vulgar
language
,
in
a
populous
country
,
where
the
Conquerers
are
in
number
farre
inferiour
to
the
natiue
inhabitants
,
whatsoeuer
art
bee
practized
to
bring
it
about
,
may
well
appeare
by
the
vaine
attempt
of
our
Norman
Conquerour
:
who
although
he
compelled
the
English
,
to
teach
their
young
children
in
the
Schooles
nothing
but
French
,
and
set
downe
all
the
Lawes
of
the
Land
in
French
,
and
inforced
all
pleadings
at
the
Law
to
be
performed
in
that
language
(
which
custome
continued
till
King
Edward
the
third
his
daies
,
who
disanulled
it
)
purposing
thereby
to
haue
conquered
the
language
together
with
the
land
,
and
to
haue
made
all
French
:
yet
,
the
number
of
English
farre
exceeding
the
Normans
,
all
was
but
labour
lost
,
and
obtained
no
further
effect
,
then
the
mingling
of
a
few
French
words
with
the
English
.
And
euen
such
also
was
the
successe
of
the
Franks
among
the
Gaules
,
of
the
Gothes
among
the
Italians
and
Spanyards
,
and
may
be
obserued
,
to
be
short
in
all
such
conquests
,
where
the
Conquerors
(
being
yet
in
number
farre
inferiour
)
mingle
themselues
with
the
natiue
inhabitants
.
So
that
,
in
those
Countries
onely
the
mutation
of
languages
hath
ensued
vpon
conquests
,
where
either
the
ancient
inhabitants
haue
beene
destroyed
or
driuen
forth
,
as
wee
see
in
our
Country
to
haue
followed
of
the
Saxons
victories
,
against
the
Brittains
,
or
else
at
least
in
such
sort
diminished
,
that
in
number
they
remained
inferior
,
or
but
little
superior
to
the
Conquerors
,
whose
reputation
and
authority
might
preuaile
more
then
a
small
excesse
of
multitude
.
But
(
that
I
digresse
no
further
)
because
certaine
Countries
are
specially
alleaged
,
in
which
the
Romaine
tongue
is
supposed
most
to
haue
preuailed
,
I
will
restraine
my
discourse
to
them
alone
.
And
First
,
that
both
the
Punique
and
Gallique
tongues
,
remained
in
the
time
of
Alexander
Seuerus
the
Emperour
(
about
230
yeares
after
our
Sauiours
birth
)
appeareth
by
Vlpian
,
who
liued
at
that
time
,
and
was
with
the
Emperour
of
principall
reputation
,
teaching
,
that
[
](A16718-e10320-b)*
*
Digest
.
l.
32.
lege
.
Fidei
commissa
.
Fidei
commissa
might
be
left
,
not
onely
in
Latine
,
or
Greeke
,
but
in
the
Punique
or
Gallique
,
or
any
other
vulgar
language
.
Till
that
time
therefore
,
it
seemeth
euident
,
that
the
Romane
tongue
had
not
swallowed
vp
these
vulgar
languages
,
and
it selfe
become
vulgar
in
stead
of
them
.
But
to
insist
a
little
in
either
seuerally
.
First
,
touching
the
Punique
,
Aurelius
,
Victor
hath
recorded
of
Septimius
Seuerus
,
Aur.
Victor
in
Epitom
.
Sep
●m
.
Seuer
.
that
he
was
,
Latinis
literis
sufficienter
instructus
,
but
Punica
eloquentia
promptior
,
quippe
genitus
apud
Leptim
prouintiae
Africae
.
Of
which
Emperors
sister
also
,
dwelling
at
Leptis
(
it
is
the
Cittie
we
now
call
Tripolie
in
Barbarie
)
and
comming
to
see
him
,
Spartian
▪
in
Seuero
.
post
m●d
.
Spartianus
hath
left
written
,
that
she
so
badly
spake
the
Latine
tongue
,
(
yet
was
[
](A16718-e10480-b)*
*
Antonin
in
Itinerario
.
Hieron
.
in
Proem
.
l.
2.
Com.
Epist.
ad
Galat●n
fine
.
Leptis
a
Roman
Colonie
)
that
the
Emperour
blushed
at
it
.
Secondly
long
after
that
,
Hierome
hath
recorded
of
his
time
,
that
the
Africans
had
somewhat
altered
their
lanuage
,
from
the
Phaenicians
:
the
language
therefore
then
remained
,
for
else
how
could
he
pronounce
of
the
present
difference
?
Thirdly
,
Augustine
(
somewhat
yonger
then
Hierom
,
though
liuing
at
the
same
time
)
writeth
,
not
onely
,
that
[
](A16718-e10560-b)*
*
August
.
de
C●u
.
Dei
.
L.
16.
C.
6.
hee
knew
diuerse
nations
in
Afrique
,
that
spake
the
Punique
tongue
,
but
also
more
particularly
in
[
](A16718-e10590-b)*
*
Id.
Serm.
25.
de
verb.
Apost
another
place
,
mentioning
a
knowne
Punique
prouerb
,
he
would
speake
it
(
he
said
)
in
the
Latine
,
because
all
his
auditors
(
for
Hippo
where
he
preached
was
a
Roman
Colonie
)
vnderstood
not
the
Punique
tongue
:
And
some
[
](A16718-e10640-b)*
*
Id.
Expos.
in
Chrat
.
epist
ad
Roman
.
other
passages
could
I
alleage
out
of
Augustine
,
for
the
direct
confirmation
of
this
point
,
if
these
were
not
euident
and
effectuall
enough
.
Lastly
,
Leo
Africanus
,
Leo
1.
Africa
,
Lt.
descript.
Africae
.
cap.
de
Ling.
Africanis
.
a
man
of
late
time
,
and
good
reputation
,
affirmeth
that
there
remaine
yet
in
Barbarie
,
very
many
,
descended
of
the
old
inhabitants
,
that
speake
the
African
tongue
,
whereby
it
is
apparent
,
that
it
was
neuer
extinguished
by
the
Romanes
.
Secondly
,
touching
the
ancient
Gallique
tongue
,
that
it
also
remained
,
and
was
not
abolished
by
the
Romane
in
the
time
of
Strabo
,
who
flourished
vnder
Tiberius
Caesars
gouernment
,
it
appeareth
in
the
fourth
booke
of
his
Geographie
,
S●rab
.
l
4.
●●
princip.
writing
that
the
Aquitani
differed
altogether
in
language
from
the
other
Gaules
,
and
they
somewhat
among
themselues
.
Nor
after
that
in
Tacitus
his
time
,
Tacit.
in
〈◊〉
Agricola
.
noting
that
the
language
of
Fraunce
,
differed
little
from
that
of
Brittaine
.
No
,
nor
long
after
that
,
in
Alexander
Seuerus
his
time
,
for
beside
the
authority
of
Vlpian
before
alleaged
out
of
the
Digestes
,
it
is
manifest
by
Lampridius
also
,
Lamprid.
in
Alexand.
Seuero
,
longe
post
med.
who
in
the
life
of
the
said
Alexander
,
remembreth
of
a
Druide
woman
,
that
when
hee
was
passing
along
,
in
his
expedition
against
the
Germaines
,
through
Fraunce
,
cried
out
after
him
in
the
Gallique
tong
(
what
needed
that
obseruation
of
the
Gallique
tongue
,
if
it
were
the
Romane
?
)
goe
thy
way
(
quoth
she
)
and
looke
not
for
the
victory
,
Strab.
l.
4.
l●●●ante
med.
&
trust
not
thy
souldiers
.
And
though
Strabo
he
alleadged
by
some
,
to
prooue
the
vulgarnesse
of
the
Latine
tongue
in
Fraunce
,
yet
is
it
manifest
,
that
he
speaketh
nof
of
all
the
Gaules
,
but
of
certaine
onely
,
in
the
prouince
of
Narbona
,
about
Rhodanus
,
for
which
part
of
Fraunce
,
there
was
speciall
reason
,
both
for
the
more
auncient
and
ordinarie
conuersing
of
the
Romanes
,
in
that
region
aboue
all
the
rest
:
for
of
all
the
seuenteene
prouinces
of
Fraunce
,
that
of
Narbona
was
first
reduced
into
the
forme
of
a
Prouince
:
And
the
Cittie
of
Narbona
it selfe
,
being
a
Mart
town
of
exceeding
traffique
in
those
daies
,
was
the
[
](A16718-e11070-b)*
*
Vel.
Pa●●●cul
l.
●
.
first
foraine
Colonie
,
that
the
Romanes
planted
out
of
Italie
,
Carthage
onely
excepted
:
And
yet
furthermore
,
as
Plinie
hath
recorded
,
many
townes
there
were
in
that
prouince
,
Plin.
l.
3.
c.
4.
infranchized
,
and
indued
with
the
libertie
and
right
of
the
Latins
.
And
yet
for
all
this
,
Strabo
saith
not
,
that
the
Romane
tongue
was
the
n●●iue
or
vulgar
language
in
that
part
,
but
that
for
the
more
part
they
spake
it
.
Thirdly
,
concerning
the
Spanish
tongue
:
Howsoeuer
Viues
writ
,
that
the
languages
of
Fraunce
and
Spaine
were
vtterly
extinguished
by
the
Romanes
,
and
that
the
Latine
was
become
[
](A16718-e11210-b)*
*
Vid.
Annot.
ad
August
.
de
.
●●●
De●
.
l.
19.
c.
7.
Vernacula
Hispani●
,
as
also
Galliae
&
Italiae
;
and
[
](A16718-e11240-b)*
*
●d
l.
3.
de
tradend
.
Dis●●p
.
some
others
,
of
the
same
nation
vaunt
,
that
had
not
the
barbarous
nations
corrupted
it
,
the
Latine
tongue
would
haue
beene
at
this
day
,
as
pure
in
Spaine
,
as
it
was
in
Rome
it selfe
in
Tullies
time
:
yet
neuerthelesse
,
manifest
it
is
,
that
the
Spanish
tongue
was
neuer
vtterly
suppressed
by
the
Latine
.
For
to
omit
that
of
Strabo
,
[
](A16718-e11300-b)*
*
Marm.
S●●●l
.
de
Reb.
Hispaniaed
.
5.
c.
4.
that
there
were
diuerse
languages
in
the
parts
of
Spaine
,
as
also
in
[
](A16718-e11320-b)*
*
Strab.
l.
3.
paul
.
a
principio
.
Id
l.
4.
in
princip.
another
place
,
that
the
speech
of
Aquitaine
was
liker
the
language
of
the
Spaniards
,
then
of
the
other
Gaules
:
It
is
a
common
consent
of
the
best
Historians
,
and
Antiquaries
of
Spaine
,
[
](A16718-e11370-b)*
*
Marian
de
Reb.
Hispan
.
l.
1.
c.
5.
Marm●punc
;
S●cul
.
de
reb.
Hispan
l
4
c●l●m
.
&
Al●b
.
that
the
Cantabrian
tongue
,
which
yet
remaineth
in
the
North
part
of
Spaine
(
and
hath
no
rellish
in
a
manner
at
all
of
the
Roman
)
was
either
the
ancient
,
or
at
least
one
of
the
ancient
languages
,
of
Spaine
.
And
although
[
](A16718-e11420-b)*
*
Strab.
l.
3.
c.
1
Strabo
hath
recorded
,
that
the
Romane
tongue
was
spoken
in
Spaine
,
yet
he
speaketh
not
indefinitely
,
but
addeth
a
limitation
,
namely
,
about
Baetis
.
And
that
in
that
part
of
Spaine
,
the
Romane
tongue
so
preuailed
,
the
reason
is
easie
to
be
assigned
,
by
that
we
finde
in
Plinie
.
Plin.
3.
c.
●
.
Ve●●
〈◊〉
l.
2.
Namely
,
that
in
Baetica
,
were
eight
Roman
Colonies
,
eight
Municipall
Citties
,
and
29
others
indued
with
the
right
and
libertie
of
the
Latines
.
Lastly
,
to
speake
of
the
Pannonian
tongue
,
(
Pannonia
contained
Hungarie
,
Austria
,
Stiria
,
and
Carinthia
)
it
is
certaine
,
that
the
Romane
did
not
extinguish
it
:
For
first
,
Patercu●us
(
who
is
the
onely
author
that
I
know
alleadged
for
that
purpose
)
saith
not
,
that
it
was
become
the
language
of
the
Country
,
for
how
could
it
,
being
but
euen
then
newly
conquered
by
Tiberius
Caesar
?
but
onely
,
that
in
the
time
of
Augustus
,
by
Tiberius
his
meanes
the
knowledge
of
the
Roman
tongue
was
spred
in
all
Pannonia
.
And
Secondly
,
Tacitus
after
Tiberius
his
time
,
Ta●●
d●●●o●i●
,
Germ.
prope
fin
.
hath
recorded
,
that
the
Osi
in
Germanie
,
might
be
knowne
to
be
no
Germanes
,
by
the
Pannonian
tongue
,
which
[
](A16718-e11720-b)*
*
Lib.
cod
.
●●ruma
med.
a
little
before
in
the
same
booke
,
he
plainely
acknowledged
to
be
spoken
euen
then
in
Pannonia
.
And
as
for
these
reasons
it
may
well
seeme
that
the
Roman
tongue
became
not
the
vulgar
language
in
any
of
these
parts
of
the
Empire
,
which
yet
are
specially
instanced
,
for
the
large
vulgarity
of
it
So
haue
I
other
reasons
to
perswade
mee
,
that
it
was
not
in
those
parts
,
nor
in
any
other
forraine
Countries
subiect
to
the
Empire
,
either
generally
or
perfectly
spoken
.
Not
generally
(
I
say
)
because
it
is
hard
to
conceaue
,
that
any
whole
Countries
,
specially
because
so
large
as
the
mentioned
are
,
should
generally
speake
two
languages
,
their
owne
natiue
and
the
Romane
.
Secondly
,
there
was
not
anie
law
at
all
of
the
Romanes
,
to
inforce
the
subdued
nations
,
either
to
vse
vulgarly
the
Roman
tongue
,
or
not
to
vse
their
owne
natiue
languages
(
and
very
extreame
and
vnreasonable
,
had
such
Lords
bene
,
as
should
compell
men
by
lawes
,
both
to
do
,
and
to
speak
,
only
what
pleased
them
.
)
Neither
doe
I
see
any
other
necessitie
,
or
any
prouocation
,
to
bring
them
to
it
,
except
for
some
speciall
sorts
of
men
,
as
Merchants
,
and
Cittizens
,
for
their
better
traffique
and
trade
,
Lawyers
for
the
knowledge
and
practise
of
the
Roman
Lawes
,
which
carried
force
throughout
the
Empire
(
except
priuiledged
places
)
scholers
for
learning
,
souldiers
,
for
their
better
conuersing
with
the
Romane
Legions
,
and
with
the
Latines
,
Trauailers
,
Gentlemen
,
Officers
,
or
such
other
,
as
might
haue
occasion
of
affaires
and
dealing
with
the
Romans
.
But
it
soundeth
altogether
vnlike
a
truth
,
that
the
poore
scattered
people
,
abroade
in
the
Country
,
dwelling
either
in
solitarie
places
,
or
in
the
small
townes
,
and
villages
,
either
generally
spake
it
,
or
could
possibly
attaine
vnto
it
.
An
example
wherof
,
for
the
better
euidence
,
may
at
this
day
be
noted
;
in
those
parts
of
Greece
,
which
are
subiect
to
the
dominions
of
the
Turks
and
Venetians
:
for
as
Bellonius
hath
obserued
,
the
people
that
dwell
in
the
principall
townes
,
Bellon
.
Obs●runt
.
l.
1.
c.
4.
and
Cities
,
subiect
to
the
Turke
,
by
reason
of
their
trade
,
speake
both
the
Greeke
and
Turkish
tongues
,
as
they
also
that
are
vnder
the
Venetians
,
both
the
Greeke
and
Italian
,
but
the
Country
people
vnder
both
gouernments
,
speake
onely
Greeke
.
So
likewise
in
Sardinia
,
as
is
recorded
by
[
](A16718-e11960-b)*
*
G●sner
.
in
Mithrid●ts
.
in
Lingua
Sardi●
&
Rocca
de
Dialect
in
L●ng
.
Sard●●
.
others
,
the
good
townes
by
reason
of
the
Spanish
gouernment
and
trade
,
speake
also
the
Spanish
tongue
,
but
the
Country
people
the
naturall
Sardinian
language
onely
:
And
,
the
like
by
our
owne
experience
,
we
know
to
be
true
,
in
the
Prouinces
subiect
to
our
King
,
namelie
both
in
Wales
and
Ireland
.
It
seemeth
therefore
that
the
Roman
tongue
was
neuer
generally
spoken
in
any
of
the
Roman
Prouinces
forth
of
Italie
.
And
certainely
much
lesse
can
I
perswade
my selfe
,
Porcac●●
.
l.
dello
Isole●●●d
described
Sardigna
.
that
it
was
spoken
abroad
in
the
Prouinces
perfectly
.
First
,
because
it
seemes
vnpossible
for
forraine
nations
,
speciallie
for
the
rude
&
common
people
,
to
attaine
the
right
pronouncing
of
it
,
who
as
we
know
doe
ordinarily
much
mistake
the
true
pronouncing
of
their
natiue
language
:
for
which
very
cause
,
we
see
the
Chaldee
tongue
,
to
haue
degenerated
into
the
Syriaque
among
the
Iewes
,
although
they
had
conuersed
70
yeares
together
among
the
Chaldeans
.
And
moreouer
,
by
daily
experience
we
see
in
many
,
with
what
labour
and
difficultie
,
euen
in
the
very
schooles
,
and
in
the
most
docible
part
of
their
age
,
Vide
August
.
in
Enarrat
.
Psalm.
123.
&
138.
&
l.
●
.
de
doctrin
.
Chris.
c.
13.
&
Tract.
7.
in
Ioan.
the
right
speaking
of
the
Latine
tongue
is
attained
.
And
to
conclude
,
it
appeareth
by
Augustine
in
sundry
places
,
that
the
Roman
tongue
was
vnperfect
among
the
Africans
,
(
euen
in
the
Colonies
)
as
pronouncing
ossum
for
os
,
floriet
for
florebit
,
dolus
for
dolor
,
and
such
like
,
insomuch
that
he
confesseth
,
he
was
faine
sometimes
to
vse
words
that
were
no
Latine
,
to
the
end
they
might
vnderstand
him
.
Of
the
beginnig
of
the
Italian
,
French
and
Spanish
languages
.
CHAP.
V.
THe
common
opinion
,
which
supposeth
that
these
Nations
in
the
flourish
of
the
Romane
Empire
,
spake
vulgarly
and
rightly
the
Latine
tongue
,
is
,
that
the
mixture
of
the
Northerne
barbarous
nations
among
the
ancient
Inhabitants
,
was
the
cause
of
changing
the
Latine
tongue
,
into
the
languages
which
now
they
speak
,
the
languages
becomming
mingled
,
as
the
nations
themselues
were
.
Who
,
while
they
were
inforced
to
attemper
and
frame
their
speech
,
one
to
the
vnderstanding
of
another
,
for
else
they
could
not
mutually
expresse
their
mindes
(
which
is
the
end
for
which
nature
hath
giuen
speech
to
men
)
they
degenerated
both
,
and
so
came
to
this
medly
wherein
now
we
finde
them
.
Which
opinion
if
it
were
true
,
the
Italian
tongue
must
of
necessitie
haue
it
beginning
about
the
480
yeare
of
our
Sauiour
:
Because
,
at
that
time
,
the
Barbarous
nations
began
first
to
inhabite
Italie
,
vnder
Odoacer
,
for
although
they
had
entred
and
wasted
Italie
long
before
,
as
first
,
the
Gothes
vnder
Alaricus
,
about
the
yeare
414
:
Then
the
Hunnes
together
with
the
Gothes
,
and
the
Herula
,
and
the
Gepidi
,
and
other
Northerne
people
vnder
Attila
,
about
An.
450
,
Then
,
the
Wandales
vnder
Gensericus
,
crossing
the
sea
out
of
Afrique
about
An.
456.
(
to
omit
some
other
inuations
of
those
barbarous
nations
,
because
they
prospered
not
)
yet
none
of
these
,
setled
themselues
to
stay
and
inhabite
Italie
,
till
the
Heruli
as
I
sayd
vnder
Odoacer
,
about
An.
480
on
a
little
before
,
entred
and
possessed
it
neere
hand
20
yeares
,
He
being
(
proclaymed
by
the
Romans
themselues
)
King
of
Italie
,
about
16
yeares
,
and
his
people
becomming
inhabiters
of
the
Country
.
But
,
they
also
,
within
20
yeares
after
their
entrance
,
were
in
a
maner
rooted
out
of
Italie
,
by
Theodoricus
King
of
Gothes
,
who
allotted
them
onely
a
part
of
Piemont
aboue
Turin
to
inhabite
:
for
Theodoricus
being
by
Zeno
then
Emperour
,
inuested
with
the
title
of
King
of
Italie
,
and
hauing
ouercome
Odoacer
,
somewhat
afore
the
yeare
500
,
ruled
peaceably
a
long
time
,
as
King
of
Italie
,
and
certaine
others
of
the
Gothes
nation
succeeded
after
him
in
the
same
gouernement
,
the
Gothes
in
the
meane
space
,
growing
into
one
with
the
Italians
,
for
the
space
neere
hand
of
60.
yeares
togither
.
And
although
after
that
,
the
dominion
of
Italie
,
was
by
Narses
againe
recouered
to
the
Empire
,
in
the
time
of
Iustinian
,
and
many
of
the
Gothes
expelled
Italie
,
yet
farre
more
of
them
remained
,
Italie
in
that
long
time
,
being
growen
well
with
their
seed
and
posteritie
.
The
Heruli
therefore
,
with
their
associats
were
the
first
,
and
the
Gothes
the
second
,
of
the
barbarous
nations
,
that
inhabited
Italie
.
The
third
and
the
last
,
were
the
Langbards
,
who
comming
into
Italie
about
the
yeare
570
,
and
long
time
obtaining
the
dominion
,
and
possession
,
in
a
maner
of
all
Italie
,
namely
about
200
yeares
,
and
during
the
succession
of
20
Kings
or
more
,
were
neuer
expelled
forth
of
Italie
,
although
at
last
their
dominion
was
sore
broken
by
Pipin
King
of
Fraunce
,
and
after
,
more
defaced
,
by
his
sonne
Charles
the
great
,
who
first
restrained
and
confined
it
,
to
that
part
,
which
to
this
day
,
of
them
retayneth
the
name
of
Lombardie
,
and
shortly
after
vtterly
extinguished
it
,
carrying
away
their
last
King
captiue
into
Fraunce
.
Now
although
diuers
[
](A16718-e12790-b)*
*
Blond
in
Ital.
Illustrata
in
Marchia
Triuisana
.
antiquaries
of
Italie
there
be
,
which
referre
the
beginning
of
the
Italian
tongue
,
and
the
change
of
the
Latine
into
it
,
to
these
third
inhabitants
of
Italie
the
Langbards
,
Tinto
della
Nobilta
.
diuerona
.
l.
2.
ca.
2.
&
alij
.
by
reason
of
their
long
and
perfect
coalition
into
one
with
the
Italian
people
:
yet
certainly
,
the
Italian
tongue
was
more
ancient
then
so
,
for
besides
that
there
remains
yet
to
be
seen
(
as
men
[
](A16718-e12860-b)*
*
Lips.
de
Pronuntiat
Ling.
lat.
cap.
3.
&
Merul.
par.
2.
Cosmogr
.
l.
4.
c.
18.
worthie
of
credit
report
)
in
the
K.
of
Fraunce
his
Librarie
at
Paris
,
an
Instrument
written
in
the
Italian
tongue
,
in
the
time
of
Iustinian
the
first
,
which
was
before
the
comming
of
the
Langbards
into
Italie
:
another
euidence
more
vulgar
,
to
this
effect
,
is
to
be
found
in
Paulus
Diaconus
his
miscellane
history
:
Paul
Diacon
.
hist.
Miscel.
l.
17.
longe
ante
med.
where
we
read
,
that
in
the
Emperour
Mauritius
his
time
,
about
the
yeare
590
,
when
the
Langbards
had
indeed
entred
,
and
wasted
Gallia
Cisalpina
,
but
had
not
inuaded
the
Roman
dition
in
Italie
,
that
by
the
acclamation
of
the
word
Torna
,
Torna
,
(
plaine
Italian
)
which
a
Roman
souldier
spake
to
one
of
his
fellowes
afore
,
whose
beast
had
ouerturned
his
burthen
)
the
whole
armie
(
marching
in
the
darke
)
began
to
crie
out
,
torna
,
torna
,
and
so
fell
to
flying
away
.
But
the
French
tongue
,
if
that
afore
mentioned
were
the
cause
of
it
,
began
a
little
before
,
in
the
time
of
Valentinian
the
3
,
when
in
a
maner
,
all
the
West
part
of
the
Empire
fell
away
,
(
and
among
the
rest
,
our
Country
of
England
,
being
first
forsaken
of
the
Romans
themselues
,
by
reason
of
grieuous
warres
at
their
owne
doores
,
and
not
long
after
,
conquered
and
possessed
by
the
Saxons
,
whose
posteritie
for
the
most
part
we
are
)
namely
,
about
the
yeare
450
:
Fraunce
being
then
subdued
,
and
peaceably
possessed
,
by
the
Franks
and
Burgundions
nations
of
Germanie
:
the
Burgundions
occupying
the
Eastward
and
outward
parts
of
it
,
toward
the
riuer
of
Rhene
,
and
the
Franks
all
the
inner
region
.
For
although
Fraunce
before
that
had
beene
inuaded
by
the
Wandali
,
Sueui
,
and
Alani
,
and
after
by
the
Gothes
,
who
hauing
obtained
Aquitayn
for
their
seate
and
habitation
,
by
the
grant
of
the
Emperor
Honorius
,
expelled
the
former
into
Spaine
about
An.
410
:
yet
notwithstanding
,
till
the
Conquest
made
by
the
Franks
and
Burgundions
,
it
was
not
generally
,
nor
for
any
long
time
mingled
with
strangers
,
which
after
that
Conquest
beganne
to
spread
ouer
Fraunce
,
and
to
become
natiue
Inhabitants
of
the
Country
.
But
of
all
,
the
Spanish
tongue
for
this
cause
,
must
necessarilie
be
most
ancient
:
for
the
Wandali
&
Alani
,
being
expelled
Fraunce
,
about
the
yeare
410
,
began
then
to
inuade
and
to
inhabite
Spaine
which
they
held
&
possessed
many
yeares
,
till
the
Gothes
being
expelled
by
the
Franks
and
Burgundians
,
out
of
France
into
Spaine
,
expelled
them
out
of
Spaine
into
Afrique
(
the
Barbarous
nations
thus
like
nailes
driuing
out
one
another
)
and
not
onely
them
,
but
with
them
all
the
remnants
of
the
Roman
garrisons
,
and
gouernment
,
and
so
becomming
the
entier
Lords
and
quiet
possessours
of
all
the
Country
,
from
whom
also
the
Kings
of
Spaine
that
now
are
,
be
descended
.
Notwithstanding
,
euen
they
also
,
within
lesse
then
300
yeares
after
,
were
driuen
by
the
Saracens
of
Afrique
into
the
northerne
and
mountainous
parts
of
Spaine
,
namely
Asturia
,
Biscay
,
and
Guipuscoa
,
till
after
a
long
course
of
time
,
by
little
and
little
they
recouered
it
,
out
of
their
hands
againe
,
which
was
at
last
fully
accomplished
by
Ferdinand
not
past
120
yeares
ago
,
there
hauing
passed
in
the
meane
time
,
from
the
Mores
first
entrance
of
Spaine
at
Gibraltar
,
till
their
last
possession
in
Granada
,
about
770
yeares
.
Whereby
you
may
see
also
,
when
the
Romane
tongue
began
to
degenerate
in
Afrique
,
(
if
that
also
,
as
is
supposed
spake
vulgarly
the
Latine
tongue
and
if
the
mixture
of
barbarous
people
were
cause
of
the
decay
,
&
corruption
of
it
)
namely
,
about
the
yeare
430
,
for
about
that
time
,
the
Wandali
and
Alani
,
partly
wearied
with
the
Gottish
warre
in
Spaine
,
and
partly
inuited
by
the
Gouernour
Bonifacius
,
entred
Afrique
,
vnder
the
leading
of
Gensericus
,
a
part
whereof
for
a
time
,
they
held
quietly
,
for
the
Emperour
Valentinianus
guift
:
But
shortly
after
,
in
the
same
Emperours
time
,
when
all
the
West
Prouinces
in
a
maner
fell
vtterly
away
from
the
Empire
,
they
also
tooke
Carthage
;
and
all
the
Pronince
about
it
,
from
the
Romanes
.
And
although
the
dominion
of
Afrique
was
regained
by
Bellisarius
to
the
Empire
almost
100
yeares
after
,
in
Iustinians
time
,
yet
in
the
time
of
the
Emperour
Leontius
,
(
almost
700
yeares
after
our
Sauiours
birth
)
it
was
lost
againe
,
being
anew
conquered
,
and
possessed
by
the
Sarracens
of
Arabia
(
and
to
this
day
remaineth
in
their
hands
)
bringing
together
with
their
victories
,
the
language
also
,
and
religion
,
(
Mahumetanisme
)
into
all
that
coast
of
Afrique
,
euen
from
Aegypt
to
the
Strait
of
Gibraltar
,
aboue
2000
miles
in
length
.
About
which
time
also
,
namely
during
the
gouernment
of
Valentinian
the
3.
Bulgaria
,
Seruia
,
Boscina
,
Hungarie
,
Austria
,
Stiria
,
Carinthia
,
Bauaria
and
Sueuia
(
that
is
,
all
the
North-border
of
the
Empire
,
along
the
riuer
Danubius
)
and
some
part
of
Thrace
,
was
spoiled
and
possessed
by
the
Hunnes
,
who
yet
principally
planted
themselues
in
the
Lower
Pannonia
,
whence
it
obtained
the
name
of
Hungarie
.
Out
of
which
discourse
you
may
obserue
these
two
points
.
First
,
what
the
Countries
were
,
in
which
those
wandring
and
warring
nations
after
many
transmigrations
from
place
to
place
,
fixed
at
last
their
finall
residence
and
habitation
.
Namely
the
Hunnes
in
Pannonia
,
the
Wandales
in
Afrique
,
the
East
Gothes
and
Langbards
in
Italie
the
West
Gothes
in
Aquitaine
and
Spaine
,
which
being
both
originally
but
one
Nation
,
gained
these
names
of
East
and
West
Gothes
,
from
the
position
of
these
Countries
which
they
conquered
and
inhabited
,
the
other
barbarous
nations
of
obscurer
names
,
being
partly
consumed
with
the
warre
,
and
partly
passing
into
the
more
famous
appellations
.
And
Secondly
,
you
may
obserue
,
that
the
maine
dissolution
of
the
Empire
,
especially
in
Europe
and
Afrique
,
fell
in
the
time
of
Valentinian
the
third
about
the
yeare
450.
being
caused
by
the
barbarous
nations
of
the
North
(
as
after
did
the
like
dissolution
of
the
same
Empire
in
Asia
,
by
the
Arabians
in
the
time
of
Heraclius
about
the
yeare
640
)
and
together
with
the
ruine
of
the
Empire
in
the
West
by
the
inundation
of
the
foresaid
barbarous
Natitions
,
the
Latine
tongue
in
all
the
Countries
where
it
was
vulgarly
spoken
(
if
it
were
rightly
spoken
any
where
in
the
West
)
became
corrupted
.
Wherefore
if
the
Spanish
,
French
and
Italian
tongues
,
proceeded
from
this
cause
,
as
a
great
number
of
learned
men
,
suppose
they
did
,
you
see
what
the
antiquity
of
them
is
;
But
to
deliuer
plainly
my
opinion
,
hauing
searched
as
farre
as
I
could
,
into
the
originals
of
those
languages
,
and
hauing
pondered
what
in
my
reading
,
and
in
my
reason
I
found
touching
them
,
I
am
of
another
minde
(
as
some
learned
men
also
are
)
namely
,
that
all
those
tongues
are
more
auncient
,
and
haue
not
sprung
from
the
corruption
of
the
Latine
tongue
,
by
the
inundation
and
mixture
of
barbarous
people
in
these
prouinces
,
but
from
the
first
vnperfect
impression
and
receauing
of
it
,
in
those
forraine
Countries
.
Which
vnperfectnesse
notwithstanding
of
the
Roman
tongue
in
those
parts
,
although
it
had
,
as
I
take
it
beginning
from
this
euill
framing
of
forraine
tongues
,
to
the
right
pronouncing
of
the
Latine
,
yet
I
withall
easily
beleeue
,
and
acknowledge
,
that
it
was
greatly
increased
,
by
the
mixture
and
coalition
of
the
barbarous
Nations
.
So
that
me
thinkes
,
I
haue
obserued
three
degrees
of
corruption
in
the
Roman
tongue
,
by
the
degenerating
whereof
,
these
languages
are
supposed
to
haue
receaued
their
beginning
.
The
first
of
them
,
was
in
Rome
it selfe
,
where
,
towards
the
latter
end
of
the
Common
wealth
,
and
after
,
in
the
time
of
the
Empire
,
the
infinite
multitude
of
seruants
(
which
exceedingly
exceeded
the
number
of
free
borne
Citizens
)
together
with
the
vnspeakeable
confluence
of
straungers
,
from
all
prouinces
,
did
much
impaire
the
purenesse
of
their
language
,
and
as
Isidore
hath
obserued
brought
manie
barbarismes
and
solaecismes
into
it
.
Insomuch
,
that
Tertullian
in
his
time
,
Isidor
.
Origin
.
l.
9.
c.
1.
Tertul.
in
Apologet
.
adu
.
Gentes
cap.
6.
when
as
yet
none
of
the
barbarous
nations
had
by
inuasion
touched
Italie
(
for
he
liued
vnder
Septimius
Seuerus
gouernment
)
chargeth
the
Romanes
to
haue
renounced
the
language
of
their
fathers
.
The
Second
steppe
,
was
the
vnperfect
impression
(
that
I
touched
before
)
made
of
the
Romane
tongue
abroad
in
the
forraine
prouinces
among
straungers
,
whose
tongues
could
not
perfectly
frame
to
speake
it
aright
.
And
certainely
,
if
the
Italians
themselues
,
as
is
remembred
by
Cicero
failed
of
the
right
and
perfect
Romane
pronounciation
,
Cicer.
l.
3
de
Oratore
.
I
see
not
how
the
tongues
of
strange
Nations
,
such
as
the
Gaules
and
Spanyards
were
,
should
exactly
vtter
it
.
And
the
Third
,
was
that
mixture
of
manie
barbarous
people
(
to
which
others
attribute
the
beginning
of
the
languages
in
question
)
which
made
the
Latine
,
that
was
before
vnperfect
,
yet
more
corrupt
then
they
found
it
,
both
for
words
and
for
pronouncing
:
So
that
,
I
rather
thinke
the
barbarous
people
to
haue
beene
a
cause
of
increasing
the
corruption
,
and
of
further
alteration
and
departure
of
those
languages
from
the
Romane
,
then
of
beginning
them
.
And
me
thinkes
I
haue
very
good
reasons
so
to
bee
perswaded
beeside
all
the
arguments
abou●
mentioned
,
which
I
produced
,
both
for
the
remaining
of
the
vulgar
languages
and
for
the
vnperfect
speaking
of
the
Romane
tongue
in
the
prouinces
.
First
,
because
the
Gothes
Wandales
,
Langbards
,
as
also
the
Franks
and
Bargundions
language
was
,
by
the
consent
of
[
](A16718-e14270-b)*
*
Irenic
.
Exeg
.
German
.
l.
1.
ca.
31.
Lacing
.
l.
10.
de
Migration
.
Gent.
Gorop
.
Origin
.
Antwerp
.
l.
7.
Gesner
.
in
Mithridate
.
Rhenan
.
l.
2.
Rer.
German
.
Leunclau
.
in
Pandect.
Tur●e
.
§.
71.
et
Al●
multi
.
learned
men
,
the
Germane
tongue
,
which
hath
but
small
affinitie
or
agreement
,
with
either
the
Italian
,
French
or
Spanish
tongues
.
Secondly
,
because
among
all
the
auncient
writers
(
and
they
are
many
)
which
haue
written
of
the
miserable
changes
,
made
in
these
West
parts
of
the
world
,
by
those
infinite
swarmes
of
barbarous
people
,
I
finde
not
one
,
that
mentioneth
the
change
of
any
of
these
languages
to
haue
beene
caused
by
them
:
which
me
thinkes
some
auncient
writers
among
so
many
learned
,
as
those
times
,
and
those
very
Countries
,
abounded
withall
,
and
whose
writings
yet
remaine
,
would
certainely
haue
recorded
.
But
though
wee
finde
mention
in
soundrie
auncient
writers
,
of
changing
these
languages
into
the
Romane
(
whom
yet
I
vnderstand
of
that
vnperfect
change
before
touched
)
yet
nothing
is
found
of
any
rechanging
of
those
languages
from
the
Romane
,
into
the
state
wherein
now
they
are
.
But
it
is
become
a
question
onely
of
some
late
searchers
of
Antiquitie
,
but
of
such
,
as
determine
in
this
point
,
without
either
sound
reason
or
good
countenance
of
Antiquitie
.
Obiections
touching
the
extent
of
the
Latine
tongue
and
the
beginning
of
the
mentioned
Languages
with
their
solutions
.
CHAP.
VI.
THese
reasons
perhaps
(
ioyned
with
the
other
aboue
alleaged
whereby
I
endeauoured
to
prooue
that
the
latine
tongue
perfectly
spoken
,
was
neuer
the
vulgar
language
of
the
Romane
prouinces
)
may
perswade
you
as
they
haue
done
mee
,
that
the
barbarous
nations
of
the
north
,
were
not
the
first
corrupters
of
the
latine
tongue
,
in
the
prouinces
subiect
to
Rome
,
nor
the
beginners
of
the
Italian
,
French
and
Spanish
tongues
:
yet
some
difficulties
I
finde
(
I
confesse
)
in
writers
touching
these
points
,
which
when
I
haue
resolued
my
opinion
will
appeare
the
more
credible
.
One
is
out
of
Plutarch
in
his
Platonique
questions
,
Plutarch
.
in
quest.
platonic
.
quaest.
9.
affirming
that
in
his
time
all
men
in
a
manner
spake
the
latin
tongue
.
Another
before
touched
that
Strabo
recordeth
the
Romane
tongue
to
haue
bene
spoken
in
Spaine
and
France
,
Strab.
l.
3.
&
4.
Apul
in
Floridis
.
and
Apuleius
in
Africke
,
which
also
may
appeare
by
sundry
places
in
Augustine
,
whose
sermons
seeme
(
as
Cyprians
also
)
to
haue
bin
made
to
the
people
in
that
language
.
A
third
,
how
it
falleth
if
these
vulgar
tongues
of
adulterate
latin
be
so
ancient
,
that
nothing
is
found
written
in
any
of
them
of
any
great
antiquity
?
A
fourth
,
how
in
Rome
and
Latium
,
where
the
Latine
tongue
was
out
of
question
,
natiue
,
the
latin
could
so
degenerate
,
as
at
this
day
is
found
in
the
Italian
tongue
,
except
by
some
forraine
corruption
?
To
the
first
of
these
I
answere
,
either
that
as
Diuines
are
wont
to
interpret
many
generall
propositions
,
Plutarch
is
to
be
vnderstood
de
generibus
singulorum
,
not
de
singulis
generum
:
So
that
the
latine
tongue
was
spoken
almost
in
euery
nation
,
but
not
of
euery
one
in
any
forraine
nation
:
Or
else
,
that
they
spake
the
latine
indeed
,
but
yet
vnperfectly
and
corruptly
,
as
their
tongues
would
frame
to
vtter
it
.
To
the
second
I
answere
:
first
,
that
Strabo
speaketh
not
generally
of
France
or
Spaine
,
but
with
limitation
to
certaine
parts
of
both
,
the
Prouince
of
Narbon
in
France
,
and
the
tract
about
Boetis
in
Spaine
.
Secondly
,
that
although
they
speake
it
,
yet
it
followeth
not
,
that
they
speake
it
perfectly
and
aright
,
(
except
perhaps
in
the
Colonies
)
so
that
I
wil
not
deny
but
it
might
be
spoken
abroad
in
the
Prouinces
,
yet
I
say
it
was
spoken
corruptly
,
according
as
the
peoples
tongues
would
fashion
to
it
,
namely
in
such
sort
,
that
although
the
matter
and
body
of
the
words
,
were
for
the
most
part
latine
,
yet
the
forme
and
sound
of
them
varied
from
the
right
pronouncing
:
which
speech
notwithstanding
was
named
Latin
,
partly
for
the
reason
now
touched
,
and
partly
,
because
they
learned
it
from
the
Romanes
or
Latines
,
as
the
Spaniards
call
their
language
Romance
till
this
day
,
which
yet
we
know
to
differ
much
from
the
right
Romane
tongue
:
Nithard
.
d●
dissens
filio●
Ludon
.
P●
l.
and
as
Nithardus
(
nephew
to
Charles
the
great
)
in
his
history
of
the
dissension
of
the
sonnes
of
Ludouicus
Pius
,
calleth
the
French
then
vsuall
(
whereof
he
setteth
downe
examples
,
)
the
Roman
tongue
,
which
yet
hath
no
more
agreement
with
the
latin
then
the
French
hath
that
is
now
in
vse
.
Thirdly
,
to
the
obiection
of
Cyprians
and
Augustines
preaching
in
latine
,
Antonin
.
in
Itinerario
,
Plin.
Iun.
in
Epist.
l.
8.
ad
Ca●●●●
I
answere
that
both
[
](A16718-e14780-b)*
*
Plin.
Sec.
Histor.
nat.
l.
5.
c.
4.
Hippo
,
wherof
Augustine
was
Bishop
,
and
Velleius
.
l.
1.
Appian
.
l.
de
Bel.
Punicis
is
fine
.
Carthage
,
wherof
Cyprian
was
Archbishop
,
were
Romane
Colonies
,
consisting
for
the
most
part
of
the
progenie
of
Romanes
,
for
which
sort
of
Citties
,
there
was
speciall
reason
.
Although
neither
in
the
Colonies
themselues
(
as
it
seemeth
)
the
Romane
tong
was
altogether
vncorrupt
,
both
for
that
which
I
alleadged
before
out
of
Spartianus
of
Seuerus
his
sister
dwelling
at
Leptis
,
and
for
that
which
I
remembred
out
of
Augustine
for
Hippo
,
where
they
spake
[
](A16718-e14890-b)*
*
Enar●
.
Psal.
138.
Ossum
&
[
](A16718-e14910-b)*
*
●
.
2.
de
doc.
Christ
c.
13.
Floriet
,
and
[
](A16718-e14930-b)*
*
Tract
.
7.
●●
Ioannem
.
Dolus
,
for
Os
and
Florehit
and
dolor
,
(
&
yet
were
both
Leptis
&
Hippo
Romane
Colonies
)
:
And
yet
it
appeareth
further
by
Augustine
,
that
in
their
translations
of
the
Scriptures
,
and
in
the
Psalms
sung
in
their
Churches
,
they
had
these
corruptions
,
where
yet
(
as
it
is
like
)
their
most
corrupt
and
vulgar
latine
had
not
place
.
To
the
third
I
answere
,
that
two
reasons
of
it
may
be
assigned
:
One
,
that
learned
men
would
rather
write
,
in
the
learned
and
grammaticall
,
then
in
the
vulgar
and
prouinciall
latine
.
Another
,
that
the
workes
of
vnlearned
men
would
hardly
continue
till
our
times
,
seeing
euen
of
the
learned
ancient
writings
,
but
few
of
infinite
,
haue
remained
.
Furthermore
it
is
obserued
of
the
Germane
tongue
,
by
Tschudas
and
of
the
French
by
Genebrard
,
Tschud
.
Des.
●●pt
Alpinae
cap.
36.
Genebr
.
l.
4.
Chron.
Secul
.
11.
that
it
is
very
little
aboue
400.
yeares
,
since
bookes
began
to
be
written
in
both
those
languages
,
and
yet
it
is
out
of
all
doubt
,
that
the
tongues
are
much
ancienter
.
To
the
fourth
I
say
,
that
there
is
no
language
,
which
of
ordinary
course
is
not
subiect
to
change
,
although
there
were
no
forraine
occasion
at
all
:
which
the
very
fancies
of
men
,
weary
of
old
words
(
as
of
old
things
)
is
able
enough
to
worke
,
which
may
be
wel
proued
by
obseruations
and
instances
of
former
changes
,
in
this
very
tongue
(
the
latine
)
whereof
I
now
dispute
.
Quint●●
.
Iust
Orator
.
l.
1.
ca.
6.
For
Quintilian
recordeth
,
that
the
verses
of
the
Salij
which
were
saide
to
bee
composed
by
Numa
could
hardly
bee
vnderstood
of
their
Priests
,
in
the
latter
time
of
the
common
wealth
,
Fest.
in
Diction
.
Latine
loqui
.
for
the
absolutenesse
of
the
speech
And
Festus
in
his
booke
de
verborum
significatione
,
who
liued
in
Augustus
Caesars
time
,
hath
left
in
obseruation
,
that
the
Latine
speech
,
which
(
saith
he
)
is
so
named
of
Latium
,
was
then
in
such
manner
changed
,
that
scarslie
any
part
of
it
remained
in
knowledge
.
The
lawes
also
of
the
Romane
Kings
and
of
the
Decemuiri
,
Fulu
.
Visin
not
.
ad
Anton.
August
.
de
L●g●h
.
et
Sen●tusconsult
(
called
the
Lawes
of
the
twelue
Tables
)
collected
and
published
in
their
owne
wordes
by
Fuluius
Vrsinus
are
no
lesse
euident
testimonies
,
if
they
be
compared
with
the
later
latin
,
of
the
great
alteration
of
that
language
.
Furthermore
,
Polyb.
l.
3.
Polybius
hath
also
recorded
,
that
the
articles
of
league
,
betwixt
the
people
of
Rome
&
of
Carthage
,
made
presently
after
the
expulsion
of
the
Kings
from
Rome
,
could
very
hardly
in
his
time
be
vnderstood
,
by
reason
of
the
old
forsaken
words
,
by
any
of
the
best
skilled
antiquaries
in
Rome
.
In
which
time
notwithstanding
,
they
receiued
very
few
strangers
into
their
Cittie
,
which
mixture
might
cause
such
alteration
,
and
the
difference
of
time
was
but
about
350.
yeares
.
And
yet
to
adde
one
instance
more
,
of
a
shorter
reuolution
of
time
,
and
a
cleerer
euidence
of
the
change
,
that
the
Roman
tongue
was
subiect
to
,
and
that
,
when
no
forraine
cause
thereof
can
bee
alleadged
:
There
remaineth
at
this
day
(
as
it
is
certainly
[
](A16718-e15240-b)*
*
Vid.
Paul
.
Merul.
Cosin
.
par.
2.
l.
●
.
c.
18
et
.
Celsu
.
C●●tad
.
in
Tract●
de
Orig.
ling.
Vulgaris
.
Ital
Cap.
7.
&c.
recorded
)
in
the
Capitoll
at
Rome
,
though
much
defaced
by
the
iniury
of
time
,
a
piller
(
they
call
it
Columnam
rostratam
,
that
is
,
decked
with
beakes
of
ships
)
dedicated
to
the
memory
of
Duillius
a
Roman
Consull
,
vpon
a
nauale
victory
obtained
againg
the
Carthaginians
,
in
the
first
punicke
war
,
not
past
150.
yeares
before
Ciceroes
time
,
when
the
Roman
tongue
ascended
to
the
highest
flourish
of
Elegancie
,
that
euer
it
obtained
:
And
thus
the
words
of
the
Pillar
are
,
(
those
that
may
be
read
)
as
I
find
them
obserued
,
with
the
later
latine
vnder
them
.
Exemet
.
Leciones
.
Macistratos
.
Castreis
.
Exfociont
.
Exemit
.
Legiones
.
Magistratus
.
Castris
.
Effugiunt
.
Pucnandod
.
Cepet
.
Enque
.
Nauebos
.
Marid
.
Consol.
Pugnando
.
Cepit
.
Inque
.
Nauibus
.
Mari.
Consul
.
Primos
.
Ornauet
.
Nauebous
.
Claseis
.
Paenicas
.
Sumas
.
Primus
.
Ornauit
.
Nauibus
.
Classes
.
Punicas
.
Summas
.
Cartaciniensis
.
Dictatored
.
Altod.
Socieis
.
Triresmos
.
Carthaginiensis
.
Dictatore
.
Alto.
Socijs
.
Triremes
.
Naueis
.
Captom
.
Numei
.
Naualed
.
Praedad
.
Poplo
,
&c.
Naues
.
Captum
.
Nummi
.
Nauali
.
Praeda.
Populo
,
&c.
Where
you
see
in
many
words
,
e
for
i
,
c.
for
g
,
o
for
u
,
and
somtime
for
e
,
and
d
,
superfluously
added
to
the
end
of
many
words
.
But
(
to
let
forrain
toungs
passe
)
of
the
great
alteration
that
time
is
wont
to
worke
in
languages
,
our
owne
tongue
may
afford
vs
examples
euident
enough
:
wherein
since
the
times
neere
after
,
and
about
the
Conquest
,
the
change
hath
beene
so
great
,
as
I
my selfe
haue
seen
some
euidences
made
in
the
time
of
King
Henrie
the
first
,
whereof
I
was
able
to
vnderstand
but
few
words
.
To
which
purpose
also
,
a
certaine
remembrance
is
to
bee
found
in
Holinsheds
Chronicle
,
in
the
end
of
the
Conquerours
raigne
,
in
a
Charter
giuen
by
him
to
the
Citie
of
London
.
Of
the
ancient
Languages
of
Italie
,
Spaine
Fraunce
and
Afrique
.
CHAP.
VII
.
BVt
if
the
discourse
of
these
points
of
Antiquitie
,
in
handling
whereof
I
haue
declared
,
that
while
the
Roman
Empire
flourished
,
it
neuer
abolished
the
vulgar
languages
,
in
Fraunce
,
or
Spaine
or
Afrique
,
howsoeuer
in
Italie
.
If
that
discourse
I
say
,
mooue
in
you
perhaps
a
desire
,
to
know
what
the
ancient
vulgar
languages
of
these
parts
were
:
I
will
also
in
that
point
,
out
of
my
reading
and
search
into
Antiquitie
,
giue
you
the
best
satisfaction
that
I
can
.
And
first
for
Italie
:
Certaine
it
is
,
that
many
were
the
ancient
tongues
in
the
seuerall
Prouinces
of
it
,
tongues
I
say
,
not
dialects
,
for
they
were
many
more
.
In
Apulia
,
the
Mesapian
tongue
:
In
Tuscanie
and
Vmbria
,
the
Hetruscan
,
both
of
them
vtterly
perished
:
Inscript
.
ver.
pag.
143.144.145.146
.
Yet
in
the
booke
of
ancient
Inscriptions
,
set
forth
by
Gruter
,
and
Scaliger
,
there
be
some
few
monuments
registred
of
these
languages
,
but
not
vnderstood
now
of
any
man
.
In
Calabria
both
the
higher
and
lower
,
and
farre
along
the
maritime
coast
of
the
Tyrrhene
sea
,
the
Greeke
.
In
Latium
(
now
Campagna
di
Roma
)
The
Latine
.
In
Lombardie
,
and
Liguria
,
the
old
tongue
of
Fraunce
whatsoeuer
it
was
.
Of
which
last
three
,
the
two
former
are
vtterly
ceased
to
be
vulgar
:
and
the
third
,
no
where
to
be
found
in
Italie
,
but
to
be
sought
for
in
some
other
Countrey
,
And
although
,
beside
these
fiue
,
we
find
mention
,
in
ancient
writings
of
the
Sabine
,
the
Oscan
,
the
Tusculan
,
and
some
other
tongues
in
Italie
,
yet
were
they
no
other
then
differing
dialects
of
some
of
the
former
languages
,
as
by
good
obseruations
,
out
of
Varro
,
Festus
,
Seruius
,
Paul
.
Diaconus
,
and
others
,
might
be
easily
prooued
.
Secondly
,
of
France
what
the
ancient
tong
was
,
hath
bin
much
disputed
,
and
yet
remaineth
somewhat
vncertain
;
Some
thinking
it
to
haue
been
the
Germane
others
the
Greeke
,
and
some
the
Walsh
tong
.
But
,
●●lard
.
1.
de
Bello
Gallic
.
in
principio
.
Strab.
l.
4.
in
princip.
if
the
meaning
of
these
resoluers
bee
,
that
one
language
,
whatsoeuer
it
were
,
was
vulgar
in
all
Fraunce
,
they
are
very
farre
wide
,
Caesar
and
Strabo
hauing
both
recorded
,
that
there
were
diuerse
languages
spoken
in
the
diuers
parts
.
But
,
to
omit
the
speech
of
Aquitaine
,
which
Strabo
writeth
to
haue
had
much
affinitie
with
the
Spanish
:
And
,
of
that
part
,
(
in
Caesar
called
Belgia
)
that
at
the
riuer
of
Rhene
confined
with
Germanie
,
which
for
that
neighbourhood
,
might
partake
much
of
the
German
tongue
:
To
omit
those
I
say
,
the
maine
question
is
,
about
the
language
of
the
Celtae
,
which
as
inhabiting
the
middle
part
of
Fraunce
,
were
least
of
all
infected
with
any
forraine
mixture
.
And
certainly
,
that
it
was
not
the
Greeke
,
appeareth
out
of
Caesar
,
Caes.
l.
5.
de
Bello
Gallic
.
long
post
.
med.
writing
to
Q.
Cicero
,
then
besieged
by
the
Gaules
)
in
Greeke
,
lest
the
Gaules
should
intercept
his
letters
:
And
secondly
,
no
lesse
euidently
by
Varro
,
Varro
ap.
Hieron
.
in
praefat.
l.
2.
Comment.
epist.
ad
Galat.
&
apud
Isidorum
l.
1●
Orig.
cap.
1.
writing
of
the
Massilians
that
they
spake
three
languages
,
the
Roman
,
the
Greeke
,
and
the
Gallique
tongue
:
And
thirdly
,
the
remnants
of
that
tongue
,
may
serue
for
Instance
,
whereof
many
old
words
,
are
found
dispersed
in
ancient
writers
,
that
haue
no
affinitie
at
all
with
the
Greeke
.
The
Greeke
therfore
,
was
not
the
ancient
natiue
language
of
the
Gaules
;
Neither
was
it
the
Germane
:
for
else
it
had
beene
but
an
odde
relation
and
reason
of
Caesars
,
Caes.
l
de
Bello
Gallico
.
Tacit
l
de
Mor.
Germanor
.
prope
finem
.
Sueton.
in
Caligula
c.
47.
that
Ariouistus
a
German
Prince
,
had
liued
so
long
in
Gallia
,
that
hee
spake
the
Gallique
tongue
:
And
that
of
Tacitus
,
that
the
Gallique
tongue
proued
the
Gothines
to
be
no
Germanes
:
and
that
of
Suetonius
,
that
Caligula
compelled
many
of
the
Gaules
to
learn
the
Germane
tongue
.
Hottom
.
in
Fran.
cogall
.
c.
2.
But
Hottoman
(
of
all
that
I
haue
read
)
speaking
most
distinctly
,
touching
the
originall
and
composition
of
the
French
tongue
,
diuideth
it
as
now
it
is
spoken
,
equally
into
two
parts
,
of
which
he
supposeth
the
one
(
and
I
thinke
it
is
rather
the
greater
part
)
to
haue
originall
from
the
Latine
tongue
:
and
the
other
halfe
,
to
be
made
vp
,
Perion
.
l
de
Cognat
.
Ling.
Gal.
&
Graecae
Postell
.
l.
de
12.
Ling.
by
the
German
and
Greeke
,
and
Brittish
or
Walsh
words
,
each
almost
in
equall
measure
.
Of
the
deduction
of
the
French
words
from
the
Greeke
,
you
may
read
Perionius
,
Postell
,
and
others
:
Of
those
from
the
Germane
,
Tschudus
,
Goropius
,
Isacius
&c.
Of
the
Walsh
Lhuid
,
Tschud
.
in
Descr.
Rhet.
Alp.
c
38.
Gorop
.
in
Francicis
.
Camden
&c.
Which
last
indeed
for
good
reason
,
seemeth
to
haue
beene
the
natiue
language
of
the
ancient
Celtae
,
rather
then
either
the
Greeke
or
Dutch
tongues
:
for
of
the
Greeke
words
found
in
that
language
,
the
neighbourhood
of
the
Massilians
,
Isac
.
in
Glossa●rio
,
Prisco-gal
Lhuid
in
Descript.
Britan.
Camden
in
Britannia
.
Strab.
l.
4.
and
their
Colonies
,
inhabiting
the
maritime
coast
of
Prouince
,
together
with
the
ready
acceptance
of
that
language
in
Fraunce
,
(
mentioned
by
Strabo
)
may
bee
the
cause
:
As
likewise
of
the
Germane
words
,
the
Franks
and
Burgundions
conquest
,
and
possession
of
Fraunce
,
may
bee
assigned
for
a
good
reason
:
But
of
the
Brittish
words
none
at
all
can
be
iustly
giuen
,
saue
,
that
they
are
the
remnants
of
the
ancient
language
.
Secondly
,
it
seemeth
to
be
so
by
Tacitus
,
Tacit.
in
Iulio
Agricola
.
writing
,
that
the
speech
of
the
Gaules
,
little
differed
from
that
of
the
Brittaines
.
And
thirdly
,
by
Caesar
,
Caes
l
6.
de
Bel.
Gallico
.
recording
,
that
it
was
the
custome
of
the
Gaules
that
were
studious
of
the
Druides
discipline
,
often
to
passe
ouer
into
Brittaine
to
bee
there
instructed
:
wherefore
seeing
there
was
no
vse
of
bookes
among
them
,
as
is
in
the
same
place
affirmed
by
Caesar
,
it
is
apparent
that
they
spake
the
same
language
.
Thirdly
,
the
Spanish
tongue
as
now
it
is
,
consisteth
of
the
old
Spanish
,
Latine
,
Gottish
,
and
Arabique
(
as
there
is
goood
reason
it
should
,
Spaine
hauing
beene
so
long
,
in
the
possessions
of
the
Romanes
,
Gothes
,
and
Mores
)
of
which
,
the
latine
is
the
greatest
part
,
(
next
it
the
Arabique
)
and
therefore
they
themselues
call
their
language
Romance
.
And
certainely
I
haue
seene
an
epistle
written
by
a
Spaniard
,
whereof
euery
word
was
both
good
Latine
&
good
Spanish
,
&
an
example
of
the
like
is
to
be
seene
in
Merula
.
Merul.
Cosmogr
.
part.
2.
l.
2.
c.
8.
But
the
language
of
Valentia
and
Catalonia
,
and
part
of
Portugall
,
is
much
tempered
with
the
French
also
.
Now
the
ancient
and
most
generall
language
of
Spaine
,
spoken
ouer
the
Country
before
the
Romanes
conquest
,
seemeth
to
mee
out
of
question
,
to
haue
beene
,
the
Cantabrian
tong
,
that
namely
which
yet
they
speak
in
Biscay
,
Guipuscoa
,
Nauarre
,
and
Asturia
,
that
is
to
say
,
in
the
northerne
and
mountainous
parts
of
Spaine
,
neare
the
Ocean
,
with
which
the
Vasconian
tongue
also
in
Aquitaine
,
neere
the
Pyrene
hilles
,
hath
as
there
is
good
reason
(
for
out
of
those
parts
of
Spaine
the
inhabitants
of
Gascoigne
came
)
much
affinitie
and
agreement
.
And
my
reason
for
this
opinion
is
,
that
in
that
part
of
Spaine
,
the
people
haue
euer
continued
without
mixture
of
any
forraine
nation
as
being
neuer
subdued
by
the
Carthaginians
,
nor
by
the
Mores
,
no
,
nor
by
the
Romans
,
(
for
all
their
long
warring
in
Spaine
)
before
Augustus
Caesars
time
,
and
for
the
hillinesse
,
and
barenesse
,
and
vnpleasantnesse
of
the
Countrey
,
hauing
nothing
in
it
,
to
inuite
strangers
to
dwell
among
them
.
For
which
cause
,
the
most
ancient
Nations
and
languages
are
for
the
most
part
preserued
in
such
Countryes
:
as
by
Thucydides
is
specially
obserued
,
Thucyd.
l.
1.
paul
.
a
princip.
of
the
Attiques
,
and
Arcadians
,
in
Greece
,
dwelling
in
barren
soiles
:
Of
which
nations
the
first
,
for
their
Antiquitie
,
vaunted
of
themselues
that
they
were
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
,
and
the
second
,
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
,
as
if
they
had
beene
bred
immediately
of
the
Earth
,
or
borne
before
the
Moone
.
Another
example
whereof
wee
may
see
in
Spaine
it selfe
,
for
in
the
steepy
mountaines
of
Granata
,
named
Alpuxarras
,
the
progeny
of
the
Mores
yet
retaine
the
Arabique
tongue
(
for
the
Spaniards
call
it
Arauiga
)
which
all
the
other
remnants
of
the
Mores
in
the
plainer
region
had
vtterly
forgotten
,
and
receiued
the
Castilian
(
till
their
late
expulsion
out
of
Spaine
)
for
their
vulgar
language
.
The
like
whereof
,
is
also
to
be
seene
in
the
old
Epirotique
speech
and
nation
,
which
yet
continueth
in
the
mountainous
part
of
Epirus
,
being
(
for
the
tongue
)
vtterly
extinguished
in
all
the
Country
beside
.
And
(
to
let
forraine
instances
goe
)
in
the
Brittaines
or
Welsh-men
in
the
hillie
part
of
our
owne
Country
.
What
the
reason
thereof
may
be
,
I
will
not
stand
now
curiously
to
enquire
:
whether
that
being
inured
to
labour
,
to
watching
,
to
sundry
distemperatures
of
the
aire
,
and
much
other
hardnesse
(
for
otherwise
their
liuing
will
not
be
gotten
of
such
barren
ground
)
they
prooue
vpon
occcasion
good
and
able
souldiers
?
Or
,
that
the
craggie
rockes
and
hilles
(
like
fortresses
of
natures
owne
erecting
)
are
easily
defended
from
forraine
inuaders
?
Or
that
their
vnpleasant
and
fruitlesse
?
soile
,
hath
nothing
to
inuite
strangers
to
desire
it
?
Or
,
that
wanting
richesse
,
they
want
also
the
ordinary
companions
of
richesse
,
that
is
proud
and
audacious
hearts
,
to
prouoke
with
their
iniuries
other
nations
to
be
reuenged
on
them
,
either
by
the
conquest
or
desolation
of
their
Countries
?
But
whatsoeuer
the
cause
may
be
,
certainely
in
effect
so
it
is
,
that
the
most
ancient
Nations
and
Languages
,
are
for
the
most
part
to
be
found
in
such
vnpleasant
and
fruitlesse
regions
:
Insomuch
that
the
Biscaynes
who
gaue
me
occasion
of
this
digression
,
vaunt
of
themselues
among
the
Spanyards
,
that
they
are
the
right
Hidalgos
,
(
that
is
gentlemen
)
as
some
also
report
of
the
Welsh-men
heere
in
Brittaine
to
say
of
themselues
,
which
yet
I
that
am
their
neighbour
,
(
to
confesse
a
truth
)
neuer
heard
them
say
.
Now
lastly
touching
the
Punique
tongue
,
as
I
am
not
of
Galateus
his
opinion
,
Galat.
de
〈…〉
that
it
was
vtterly
extinguished
by
the
Romanes
:
So
neither
can
I
bee
of
the
phantasie
(
for
it
is
no
better
)
that
[
](A16718-e17270-b)*
*
G●sner
in
Mithridate
i●
Ling.
Afric
.
&
Arab.
Roccha
de
dialect
.
in
Ling.
Arabica
Postell
.
de
Ling.
12
in
ling.
Arab.
Mas.
in
Gram
Syriaca
.
prop.
Init.
Bibliand
.
de
ration
.
Linguar
.
Schidler
.
in
Lex
.
Pontaglotto
in
voce
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
Mart.
Galeott
.
de
doctr.
promiscua
.
cap.
6.
&
alij
multi
.
manie
other
learned
men
are
:
namely
,
that
it
was
the
Arabique
,
that
is
to
say
the
same
language
,
that
is
vulgar
in
Afrique
at
this
day
.
For
it
is
well
knowen
to
the
skilfull
in
histories
,
that
the
Puniques
were
of
another
off-spring
(
not
of
Arabian
race
)
and
that
it
is
not
yet
a
thousand
yeares
,
since
that
tongue
was
by
the
Arabians
together
with
their
victories
brought
into
Afrique
.
And
as
certaine
also
it
is
,
that
the
remnants
of
the
Africans
progenie
,
as
[
](A16718-e17360-b)*
*
Leo
Afric
.
l.
1.
Descrip.
Afr.
cap.
de
Ling.
Africae
.
Flo.
in
Epitom
Liu
l.
51.
Strab.
l.
17.
Leo
Africanus
hath
recorded
,
haue
a
different
language
from
the
Arabique
.
But
the
Punique
tongue
seemeth
to
me
out
of
question
,
to
haue
beene
the
Chananitish
or
old
Hebrew
language
,
though
I
doubt
not
somwhat
altered
from
the
original
pronuntiation
,
as
is
wont
in
tract
of
time
,
to
befall
Colonies
,
planted
among
strangers
farre
from
home
.
For
first
,
Carthage
it selfe
,
the
Queene
of
the
Cities
of
Afrique
(
and
well
might
she
be
termed
so
,
that
contained
in
circuit
24
miles
,
as
Florus
in
his
abridgement
of
Liuie
hath
recorded
,
and
by
the
vtter
wall
360
furlongs
(
that
is
45
miles
)
as
it
is
in
Strabo
:
And
held
out
in
emulation
with
Rome
as
is
noted
by
Plinie
,
120
yeare
,
and
to
conclude
(
before
the
second
Punique
warre
)
had
in
subiection
all
the
coast
of
the
mediterrane
sea
,
Plin.
l.
15.
c.
18.
from
the
bottome
of
the
greater
Syrtis
in
Afrique
,
to
the
riuer
Ebro
(
Iberus
)
in
Spain
,
which
is
about
2000.
miles
of
length
)
that
the
same
Carthage
I
say
,
and
diuers
other
Cities
of
Afrique
(
of
which
Plinie
nameth
Vtica
and
Leptis
,
as
being
the
printipall
)
were
Colonies
of
the
Phoenicians
,
and
namely
of
the
Tyrians
,
is
not
onely
by
Strabo
,
Strab.
lib.
citato
.
Mela.
l.
1.
c.
●
Liu.
lib.
33.
Plin.
l.
5.
c.
19.
Appian
.
l.
de
Bel.
Pun●cis
in
principio
Curtius
.
l.
4.
et
A●●
plures
.
Mela
,
Liuie
,
Plinie
,
Appian
,
and
many
other
certaine
Authors
,
acknowledged
,
and
by
none
denied
,
but
also
the
very
names
of
Poeni
and
Punici
,
beeing
but
variations
or
mutilations
of
the
name
Phoenicij
import
so
much
,
and
lastly
their
language
assureth
it
.
For
Hierome
writing
,
that
their
language
was
growne
somewhat
different
from
the
Phoenician
tongue
,
doth
manifestly
in
those
words
imply
,
it
had
bene
the
same
.
And
what
were
the
Phoenicians
but
Chanaanites
?
The
Phoenicians
I
say
,
of
whose
exceeding
merchandizing
we
reade
so
much
in
ancient
histories
,
what
were
they
but
Chanaanites
,
whose
very
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
name
signifieth
merchants
?
for
,
the
very
same
nation
,
that
the
Graecians
called
Phoenicians
(
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
)
and
the
Romanes
in
imitation
of
that
name
Poenos
&
Punicos
,
for
the
exceeding
store
of
good
Palmes
,
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
,
in
the
Greeke
,
signifieth
the
Palme
,
for
as
touching
the
deduction
of
the
name
Phoenicia
,
either
from
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
by
Montanus
,
or
from
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
by
Postellus
,
signifying
the
delicacy
of
the
inhabitants
by
the
first
,
and
their
obseruation
or
adoration
of
the
fire
,
by
the
second
,
they
are
but
late
sprung
fantasies
,
and
haue
not
any
ground
of
reason
at
all
:
for
as
much
,
as
in
al
the
Hebrew
writings
of
the
Bible
,
that
country
is
neuer
termed
by
any
name
sounding
toward
Phoenicia
,
but
in
the
Greeke
onely
.
But
in
many
olde
coynes
that
I
haue
seen
,
I
haue
noted
the
Palme
tree
as
the
speciall
cognisance
of
Phoenicia
,
(
as
I
haue
also
the
Oliue
branch
and
Conies
to
be
of
Spain
:
the
Horse
of
Mauritania
:
the
Elephant
,
or
the
spoile
of
the
Elephant
of
Afrique
:
the
Camell
,
of
Arabia
:
the
Crocodile
,
or
the
bird
Ibis
,
of
Aegypt
:
and
diuers
other
specialties
for
other
countries
:
)
And
namely
I
haue
seene
,
sundrie
olde
coynes
of
the
Emperour
Vespatian
,
of
seuerall
deuises
and
imagerie
,
stamped
for
a
memoriall
of
his
conquest
of
Iudaea
,
and
taking
of
Ierusalem
(
for
the
inscription
is
in
euery
of
them
,
Iudaea
capta
)
and
in
each
of
them
I
specially
obserued
a
woman
sitting
in
a
sad
and
mournefull
fashion
,
with
her
back
to
a
Palme
tree
:
wherein
,
I
make
no
doubt
,
but
the
desolate
woman
signifieth
Iudaea
,
and
the
Palme
Phoenicia
,
euen
as
Phoenicia
is
immediately
toward
the
north
,
at
the
backe
of
Iudaea
.
wherwith
that
country
abounded
:
Arias
Mont.
lib.
Chanaan
.
●a
.
3.
Postel
.
in
deserio
.
Syriae
.
c.
de
Syriae
No●inib
.
Insomuch
that
in
monuments
of
antiquitie
,
the
Palme
tree
is
obserued
for
the
Ensigne
of
Phoenicia
:
the
same
nation
I
say
,
called
themselues
,
&
by
the
Israelites
,
their
next
neighbours
,
were
called
,
Chanaanites
.
And
that
they
were
indeed
no
other
,
I
am
able
easily
to
prooue
.
For
first
,
the
same
woman
that
in
Mathew
is
named
a
Canaanite
,
Math.
15.22
.
is
in
Marke
called
a
Syrophoenician
.
Marc.
7.26
.
2.
Where
mention
is
made
in
Iosua
,
Ios.
5.1
.
of
the
Kings
of
Canaan
,
they
are
in
the
Septuagints
translation
named
,
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
.
3.
To
put
it
out
of
question
.
All
that
coast
,
from
Sidon
to
Azzah
,
(
that
was
Gaza
)
neere
to
Gerar
,
is
registred
by
[
](A16718-e18230-b)*
*
Gen.
10.19
.
Moses
,
to
haue
beene
possessed
by
the
posterity
of
Chanaan
:
Of
which
coast
the
more
northren
part
aboue
the
promontory
of
Carmell
,
or
rather
from
the
riuer
Chorseus
,
(
Kison
the
Iewes
called
it
)
that
nere
the
promontory
of
Carmel
,
Strab.
l.
16.
non
long
.
ante
med.
Plin.
l.
5.
c.
12.
Pt●lem
.
Tab.
4.
A●ae
.
Dionys
Alex.
in
Periegesi
.
entreth
the
sea
,
to
the
city
of
Orthosia
,
aboue
Sidon
northward
,
is
by
Strabo
,
Plinie
,
Ptolomy
and
others
,
referred
to
Phoenicia
,
(
although
Strabo
extend
that
name
,
along
all
the
maritime
coast
of
Palestina
also
,
to
the
confines
of
Aegypt
,
as
Dionysius
Periegetes
also
doth
,
placing
Ioppa
and
Gaza
,
and
Elath
in
Phoenicia
)
which
very
tract
,
to
haue
bin
the
seuerall
possessions
of
Zidon
,
and
Cheth
,
&
Girgashi
,
and
Harki
,
and
Aruadi
,
and
Chamathi
,
sixe
of
the
eleuen
sonnes
of
Canaan
,
(
the
other
fiue
inhabiting
more
to
the
south
in
Palestina
)
they
that
are
skilful
in
the
ancient
Chorography
of
the
Holy
land
,
cannot
be
ignorant
.
Seeing
therefore
out
of
this
part
of
the
land
of
Canaan
(
for
in
this
part
Tyrus
was
)
the
Carthaginians
,
and
other
colonies
of
the
Phaenicians
in
Afrique
came
,
it
is
out
of
all
doubt
,
that
they
were
of
the
Chananites
progenie
:
August
expos:
●●●hoat
.
epist.
ad
Roman
.
in
med.
and
for
such
in
very
deede
,
and
no
other
,
they
reputed
and
professed
themselues
to
be
:
for
as
Austine
hath
left
recorded
,
who
was
borne
&
liued
among
them
,
the
country
people
of
the
Puniques
,
when
they
were
asked
touching
themselues
what
they
were
,
they
would
make
answere
that
they
were
Channai
,
meaning
,
as
Austine
himselfe
doth
interprete
them
,
Canaanites
.
Certaine
therefore
it
is
that
the
natiue
Punique
langauge
was
not
the
Chanaanitish
tongue
:
but
that
I
added
for
explication
this
clause
,
(
or
the
olde
Hebrew
,
meaning
by
the
olde
Hebrew
that
which
was
vulgarly
spoken
among
the
Iewes
before
the
captiuity
)
you
will
perhaps
suspect
my
credite
,
and
bee
offended
,
for
I
am
not
ignorant
,
how
superstitiously
Diuines
for
the
most
part
are
affected
toward
the
Hebrew
tongue
:
yet
when
I
had
set
downe
the
Africans
language
to
haue
beene
the
Canaanitish
tongue
,
I
thought
good
to
adde
for
plainesse
sake
(
or
the
old
Hebrew
)
because
J
take
them
indeede
to
be
the
very
same
language
,
and
that
Abraham
and
his
posterity
,
brought
it
not
out
of
Chaldaea
,
but
learned
it
in
the
land
of
Chanaan
.
Neither
is
this
opinion
of
mine
,
a
meere
paradox
and
fantasie
,
but
I
haue
[
](A16718-e18670-b)*
*
Postel
.
lib.
de
Phoenic
.
lit
.
c.
2.
§.
5.
Arias
Monta.
L.
Chanaan
.
ca.
9.
G●●ebrard
.
l.
1.
Chron.
an
.
D●lunij
131
Scal●●
.
●d
se●
.
in
di●t
.
●●rte
.
&
in
ep
●d
V.
●ert●e
ad
Tomson
.
three
or
foure
of
the
best
skilled
in
the
language
and
antiquities
of
that
nation
,
that
the
later
times
could
afford
,
of
the
same
minde
:
And
certainly
,
by
[
](A16718-e18680-b)*
*
Isa.
19.18
.
Isaiah
it
is
called
in
direct
termes
,
the
language
of
Chanaan
:
And
it
is
moreouer
manifest
,
that
the
names
of
the
places
,
and
cities
of
Chanaan
,
(
the
olde
names
I
meane
by
which
they
were
called
before
the
Israelites
dwelt
in
them
,
as
is
to
be
seene
in
the
whole
course
of
the
books
of
Moses
and
of
Ioshuah
)
were
Hebrew
names
:
touching
which
point
,
although
I
could
produce
other
forceable
reasons
,
such
as
might
,
(
except
my
fantasie
delude
me
)
vex
the
best
wit
in
the
world
to
giue
them
iust
solution
,
yet
I
will
adde
no
more
,
both
to
auoide
prolixity
,
and
because
I
shall
haue
in
another
place
fitter
occasion
.
But
to
speake
particularly
of
the
Punique
tongue
which
hath
brought
vs
into
this
discourse
,
and
which
I
proued
before
to
be
the
Canaanitish
language
:
it
is
not
only
[
](A16718-e18760-b)*
*
Augu.
in
ser.
35.
de
verb.
Dom.
in
Euangel.
sec.
Lucan
.
in
one
place
pronounced
by
Augustine
(
who
knew
it
well
,
no
man
better
)
to
haue
neer
affinitie
with
the
Hebrew
tong
,
which
also
the
[
](A16718-e18780-b)*
*
As
in
the
Punique
tongue
Salus
three
,
Augustin
.
in
expos.
inchoat
.
epist.
ad
Roman
.
Heb.
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
.
Edom
,
bloud
.
Enar.
Psalm
.
136.
Heb.
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
.
Mamon
,
lucre
,
De
Sermon
.
Dom.
in
Mont.
l.
2.
c.
14.
Heb.
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
.
Bal.
the
Lord.
Quaest.
in
Iudie
.
cap.
16.
Hebr.
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
.
Samen
,
Heauen
.
Ibid.
Heb.
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
.
Messe
,
to
annoint
.
Tract.
15.
in
Ioan.
Heb.
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
.
Alma
,
a
Virgine
.
Hieron
.
in
c.
7.
Isai.
Heb.
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
.
Gadir
.
a
fence
or
wall
.
Plinie
.
l.
4.
c.
22.
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
.
and
some
other
that
diligence
might
obserue
.
Punick
words
dispearsed
in
the
writings
of
Augustine
,
and
of
others
,
(
as
many
as
come
to
my
remembrance
)
proue
to
be
true
.
But
more
effectually
in
[
](A16718-e19050-b)*
*
Aug
l.
2
▪
cont
.
litter
Petiliani
●ap.
104.
an
other
place
,
to
agree
with
it
in
very
many
,
yea
almost
in
euerie
worde
.
Which
speech
seeing
they
could
in
no
sort
haue
from
the
Israelites
,
being
not
of
Abrahams
posterity
(
both
because
no
such
transmigration
of
them
is
remembred
in
the
holy
histories
,
and
for
that
the
Punique
colonies
,
are
specially
mentioned
to
haue
beene
deduced
from
Tyre
,
which
neuer
came
into
the
possession
of
the
Israelites
)
but
from
the
Canaanites
whose
of-spring
they
were
:
It
followeth
therupon
that
the
language
of
the
Canaanites
,
was
either
the
very
same
or
exceeding
neere
the
Hebrew
.
And
certainely
touching
the
difference
that
was
betweene
the
Hebrew
and
the
Punique
,
I
make
no
doubt
,
but
the
great
distance
from
their
primitiue
habitation
,
and
their
conuersation
with
strangers
among
whom
they
were
planted
,
and
together
with
both
,
the
length
of
time
,
which
is
wont
to
bring
alteration
to
all
the
languages
in
the
world
,
were
the
causes
of
it
.
And
although
that
Punique
speech
in
Plautus
,
which
is
the
onely
continued
speech
of
that
language
,
Plau●
.
i●
P●e
nulo
.
Act.
6.
that
to
my
knowledge
remaineth
extant
in
any
Author
,
haue
no
such
great
conuenience
with
the
Hebrew
tongue
,
yet
I
assure
my selfe
the
faults
,
&
corruptions
that
haue
crept
into
it
by
many
transcriptions
,
to
haue
beene
the
cause
of
so
great
difference
,
by
reason
whereof
,
it
is
much
changed
,
from
what
at
the
first
it
was
,
when
Plautus
writ
it
,
about
1800.
yeares
agoe
:
And
specially
because
in
transcribing
thereof
there
would
be
so
much
the
lesse
care
taken
,
as
the
language
was
lesse
vnderstood
,
by
the
writers
,
and
by
the
readers
,
and
so
the
escapes
lesse
subiect
to
obseruation
and
controlement
.
Of
the
largenesse
of
the
Slauonish
,
Turkish
,
and
Arabique
languages
.
CHAP.
VIII
.
MAny
are
the
nations
that
haue
for
their
vulgar
language
the
Slauonish
tongue
in
Europe
,
&
some
in
Asia
.
Among
which
the
principall
in
Europe
,
are
the
Slauonians
themselues
,
inhabiting
Dalmatia
&
Liburnia
,
the
West
Macedonians
,
the
Epirotes
,
the
Bosinates
,
Seruians
,
Russians
,
Bulgarians
,
Moldauians
,
Podolians
,
Russians
,
Muscouites
,
Bohemians
,
Polonians
,
Silesians
.
And
in
Asia
the
Circassians
,
Mangrellians
,
and
Gazarites
.
Gesner
.
in
Mithrid
.
in
Ling.
Illyrica
.
Boccha
in
Append
.
de
dia●●ct
in
Illyrica
.
These
I
say
are
the
principall
but
they
are
not
all
:
for
Gesner
and
Roccha
reckken
vp
the
names
of
60.
nations
,
that
haue
the
Slauonian
tongue
for
their
vulgar
language
.
So
,
that
it
is
knowne
to
bee
vulgarly
spoken
ouer
all
the
East
parts
of
Europe
(
in
more
then
a
third
part
of
the
whole
)
euen
to
the
vtmost
bonds
of
it
the
riuers
of
Droyna
and
Tanais
;
Greece
and
Hungary
,
and
Wala●hia
onely
excepted
.
Indeed
the
regions
of
Seruia
,
Bosina
,
Bulgaria
,
Rascia
,
Moldauia
,
Russia
and
Moscouia
,
namely
all
the
nations
of
the
Easterne
parts
,
which
celebrate
their
diuine
seruice
after
the
Greek
ceremony
,
and
professe
ecclesiasticall
obedience
to
the
Patriarch
of
Constantinople
write
in
a
diuerse
●o●●
of
Character
,
from
that
of
the
Dalmatians
,
Croatians
,
Istrians
,
Polonians
,
Bohemians
,
Silesians
&
other
nations
toward
the
west
(
both
which
sorts
of
characters
are
to
bee
seene
in
Postels
booke
of
the
Orientall
languages
)
of
which
,
this
last
is
called
the
Dalmatian
or
Illyrian
character
,
&
was
of
[
](A16718-e19430-b)*
*
Posteli
.
●●
ling.
Dalma●
Rocch
.
in
●iblioth
.
Vatican
pagin.
16
&
alij
.
Hieromes
deuising
,
that
other
bering
for
the
most
part
much
resemblance
with
the
Greek
,
is
termed
the
Seruian
character
,
and
was
of
[
](A16718-e19460-b)*
*
Roccha
.
lib.
citato
pag.
168.
Cyrils
inuention
:
for
which
cause
,
as
Roccha
hath
remembred
,
they
terme
the
language
written
in
that
character
[
](A16718-e19490-b)*
*
Id.
pag.
17●
.
Chiurilizza
.
But
yet
notwithstanding
the
difference
of
characters
in
the
writing
of
these
nations
,
they
speake
all
of
them
(
the
difference
of
dialect
excepted
)
the
same
language
.
But
yet
is
not
the
Slauonique
tongue
(
to
answere
your
question
)
for
all
this
large
extent
,
the
vulgar
language
of
the
Turkish
Empire
.
For
of
the
Turks
dominion
onely
Epirus
,
the
west
part
of
Macedon
,
Bosina
,
Seruia
,
Bulgaria
,
Rascia
,
and
part
of
Thrace
,
&
that
hee
hath
in
Dalmatia
and
Croacia
,
(
beside
the
Mengrelli
in
Asia
)
speake
vulgarly
the
Slauonian
tongue
.
But
no
where
for
the
more
precise
limitation
,
neither
in
Asia
nor
in
Europe
,
is
that
language
spoken
more
southward
,
then
the
north
Parallel
of
40.
degrees
:
some
part
of
Epirus
onely
excepted
:
I
meane
it
is
not
spoken
as
the
vulgar
language
of
any
nation
more
southward
.
For
else
,
being
acceptable
and
vsuall
,
as
it
is
,
in
the
Great
Turkes
Serrail
at
Constantinople
,
and
familiar
with
most
of
the
Turkish
souldiers
,
by
reason
of
their
garrisons
and
other
great
imployment
in
those
parts
toward
the
confines
of
Christian
Princes
,
all
which
parts
as
before
I
said
(
Hungarie
and
Walachia
excepted
)
speake
that
language
:
for
these
reasons
I
say
,
it
is
spoken
by
diuerse
particular
men
,
in
many
places
of
the
Turkish
dominion
,
and
the
Ianizares
and
officers
for
the
most
part
can
speake
it
,
and
many
others
also
of
the
better
sort
,
but
yet
the
generall
and
vulgar
language
of
his
dominion
(
excepting
those
places
afore
mentioned
)
it
is
not
.
But
in
Anatolia
,
although
the
old
languages
still
remaine
,
being
for
the
most
part
corrupt
Greeke
,
as
also
in
Armenia
,
they
haue
their
peculiar
language
,
yet
is
the
Turkish
tongue
very
frequent
and
preuaileth
in
them
both
:
which
being
originally
none
other
then
the
Tartarian
tongue
,
as
Michouius
,
Michou
.
l.
1.
de
Sarmatia
.
cap.
15.
Rocch
de
dialect
.
in
Ling.
Tur●ica
.
and
others
haue
obserued
,
yet
partaketh
much
,
both
of
the
Armenian
and
Persian
,
by
reason
of
the
Turkes
long
continuance
in
both
those
regions
,
before
they
setled
the
seate
of
their
Dominion
,
and
themselues
among
the
Grecians
,
for
which
cause
it
is
not
without
mixture
of
Greeke
also
,
but
chiefely
and
aboue
all
other
of
the
Arabique
,
both
by
reason
of
their
religion
written
in
that
language
,
and
their
training
vp
in
schooles
vnto
it
,
as
their
learned
tongue
.
And
yet
although
the
Turkish
be
well
vnderstood
both
in
Natolia
and
Armenia
,
yet
hath
it
neither
extinguished
the
vulgar
languages
of
those
parts
neither
obtained
to
it selfe
(
for
ought
I
can
by
my
reading
finde
)
any
peculiar
prouince
at
all
,
wherein
it
is
become
the
sole
natiue
and
vulgar
language
,
but
is
only
a
common
scattered
tongue
,
which
appeareth
to
be
so
much
the
more
euidently
true
,
because
the
very
Citties
that
haue
beene
successiuely
the
seates
of
the
Ottaman
Sultans
;
namely
Iconium
(
now
Cogna
)
in
Lycaonia
,
then
Prusa
in
Bithynia
;
thirdly
,
Adrianople
in
Thrace
;
and
lastly
,
Constantinople
,
are
yet
knowne
to
retaine
their
old
natiue
language
,
the
Greeke
tongue
:
Although
the
Turkish
tongue
also
bee
common
in
them
all
,
as
it
is
likewise
in
all
other
Greeke
Citties
both
of
Greece
and
Asia
.
But
in
the
East
part
of
Cilicia
beyond
the
riuer
Pyramus
,
as
in
all
Syria
also
,
and
Mesopotamia
and
Palestina
,
and
Arabia
and
Aegypt
,
and
thence
Westward
in
all
that
long
tract
of
Afrique
,
that
extendeth
from
Aegypt
to
the
Strait
of
Gibralter
,
I
say
,
in
all
that
lieth
betwixt
the
Mountaine
Atlas
,
and
the
mediterrane
sea
(
now
termed
Barbarie
)
excepting
Marocco
,
and
here
and
there
some
scattered
remnants
of
the
old
Africans
in
the
Inland
parts
,
the
Aribique
tongue
is
become
the
vulgar
language
,
although
somewhat
corrupted
and
varied
in
dialect
,
as
among
so
many
seuerall
nations
it
is
vnpossible
but
it
should
bee
.
And
although
I
bee
farre
from
[
](A16718-e20160-b)*
*
Postell
.
in
praefat.
Grammat
.
Arabic
.
Ludouic
.
Reg.
l.
8.
de
Vicissitud
.
Rer.
ad
finem
.
their
opinion
,
which
write
(
too
ouerlashingly
)
that
the
Arabian
tongue
is
in
vse
in
two
third
partes
of
the
inhabited
world
,
or
in
more
,
yet
I
finde
that
it
extendeth
verie
farre
,
and
specially
where
the
religion
of
Mahumed
is
professed
.
For
which
cause
(
ouer
and
besides
the
partes
aboue
mentioned
,
in
which
it
is
(
as
I
said
)
become
the
natiue
language
)
in
all
the
Northerne
part
of
the
Turkish
Empire
also
,
I
meane
that
part
that
lieth
on
the
North
side
of
the
Mediterrane
sea
,
as
likewise
among
the
Mahumetane
Tartars
,
it
is
thought
not
the
vulgar
tongue
,
yet
familiar
with
verie
many
,
both
because
all
their
religion
is
written
in
that
language
,
and
for
that
[
](A16718-e20210-b)*
*
Bellon
.
Obseruard
.
3.
c.
12
euery
boy
that
goeth
to
schoole
,
is
taught
it
,
as
in
our
schooles
they
are
taught
Latin
and
Greeke
:
Insomuch
,
that
all
the
Turkes
write
their
owne
language
in
Arabique
characters
.
So
that
you
see
the
common
languages
of
the
Turkish
Empire
,
to
be
the
Slauonish
,
the
Greeke
,
the
Turkish
and
Arabique
tongues
,
seruing
seuerally
for
the
parts
that
I
mentioned
before
.
Of
the
Syriaque
and
Hebrew
tongues
.
CHAP.
IX
.
THE
Syriaque
tongue
is
certainly
[
](A16718-e20340-b)*
*
Masius
in
prae●at
.
Grammat
.
Syric
.
Sixt
Senen
.
Biblioth.
Sanctae
.
l.
4
in
voce
.
Thargum
.
Canin
.
in
praef●t
.
Institat
.
Syr●c
.
Ar.
Montan.
de
ratione
Mazzoreth
in
Apparat.
ad
Bibl.
Reg.
Fabrit
.
in
praefat
ad
Lexic.
Syrochalda●cum
.
Genebrard
.
l.
2
Chronog
.
ad
An.
3690.
Bellarmin
.
l.
2.
de
verbo
Dei
ca.
14
&
15.
&c.
Posseum
.
Apporat
sacr.
in
Dictione
.
Bi
〈◊〉
thought
to
haue
had
beginning
,
in
the
time
of
the
Captiuitie
of
the
Iewes
in
Babilon
,
while
they
were
mingled
among
the
Chaldeans
.
In
which
long
reuolution
of
seuenty
yeares
,
the
vulgar
sort
of
the
Iewes
,
forgot
their
owne
language
,
and
began
to
speake
the
Caldee
:
But
yet
,
pronouncing
it
a
misse
,
and
framing
it
somewhat
to
their
owne
Country
fashion
,
in
notation
of
poincts
,
affixes
,
Coniugarions
,
and
some
other
properties
of
their
antient
speech
,
it
became
a
mixt
language
of
Hebrew
and
Chaldee
:
a
great
part
Chaldee
for
the
substance
of
the
words
,
but
more
Hebrew
for
the
fashion
,
and
so
degenerating
much
from
both
:
The
old
and
right
Hebrew
,
remaining
after
that
time
,
onely
among
the
learned
men
,
and
being
taught
in
schooles
,
as
among
vs
the
learned
tongues
are
accustomed
to
be
.
And
yet
,
after
the
time
of
our
Sauiour
,
this
language
began
much
more
to
alter
,
and
to
depart
further
,
both
from
the
Chaldee
and
Hebrew
,
as
receauing
much
mixture
of
Greeke
,
some
also
of
Romane
and
Arabique
words
,
as
in
the
Talmud
(
named
of
Ierusalem
)
gathered
by
R.
Iochanan
,
about
300
yeares
after
Christ
,
is
apparent
being
farre
fuller
of
them
,
then
those
parts
of
the
Chaldee
paraphrase
on
the
holy
Scriptures
,
which
were
made
by
R.
Ionathan
,
a
little
before
Christ
,
and
by
R.
Aquila
,
whom
they
call
Onkelos
,
not
long
after
.
But
yet
certaine
it
is
,
both
for
the
great
difference
of
the
words
themselues
,
which
are
in
the
Syriaque
tongue
for
the
most
part
Chaldee
,
and
for
the
diuersitie
of
those
adherents
of
words
,
which
they
call
praefixa
,
and
suffixa
,
as
also
,
for
the
differing
sound
of
some
vowels
,
and
sundrie
other
considerations
:
Certaine
it
is
I
say
,
that
the
vnlearned
Iewes
,
whose
vulgar
speech
the
Syriaque
then
was
,
could
not
vnderstand
their
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
&
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
,
that
their
lectures
of
Moses
and
the
Prophets
,
vsed
in
their
synagogues
in
the
Hebrew
tongue
.
And
that
seemeth
to
haue
beene
the
originall
reason
,
both
of
the
publique
speeches
and
declarations
of
learned
men
to
the
people
,
vsual
in
their
synagogues
on
the
Sabboaths
,
after
the
readings
of
the
Law
and
of
the
Prophets
,
whereof
in
the
[
](A16718-e20660-b)*
*
Act.
13.15
.
new
Testament
we
finde
some
mention
,
and
also
,
of
the
translations
of
Ionathan
,
and
Onkelos
,
and
others
,
made
into
their
vulgar
language
,
for
that
the
difference
betwixt
the
Hebrew
and
the
Chaldee
was
so
great
,
that
the
tongue
of
the
one
nation
could
not
be
vnderstood
by
the
other
.
First
,
the
tongues
themselues
,
which
yet
remaine
with
vs
,
may
bee
euident
demonstrations
,
of
which
wee
see
that
one
may
bee
skilfull
in
the
Hebrew
,
and
yet
not
vnderstand
the
Chaldee
,
and
therefore
neither
could
they
,
whose
speech
the
Chaldee
then
was
(
although
much
degenerated
)
vnderstand
the
Hebrew
.
Secondly
,
wee
finde
,
that
when
[
](A16718-e20750-b)*
*
Nehem.
ca
8
v.
7.8.9
.
Ezra
at
the
returne
from
the
Captiuitie
,
read
the
booke
of
the
law
before
the
people
,
others
were
faine
to
interprete
that
which
was
read
vnto
them
.
And
Thirdly
,
the
answer
made
to
Rabshakeh
,
by
the
officers
of
K.
Hezekiah
,
may
put
it
out
of
question
,
willing
him
[
](A16718-e20790-b)*
*
Reg.
l.
2.
ca.
18.
v.
26.
to
speake
vnto
them
in
the
Chaldee
tongue
,
that
the
common
people
of
Ierusalem
(
in
whose
hearing
it
was
)
might
not
vnderstand
what
was
spoken
.
But
yet
it
might
be
,
that
as
at
this
day
the
Iewes
vse
to
doe
,
so
also
in
Christs
time
of
conuersing
on
the
Earth
,
they
might
also
reade
the
Chaldee
Targ●min
(
and
certainely
some
[
](A16718-e20840-b)*
*
Iunius
in
Bellarm.
Cont.
1.
l.
2.
c.
15.
§.
11
learned
men
affirme
they
did
so
)
together
with
the
Hebrew
lectures
of
Moses
and
the
Prophets
,
for
certaine
it
is
,
that
Ionathan
Ben
Vziel
,
had
before
the
birth
of
our
Sauiour
translated
,
not
the
Prophets
onely
into
Chaldee
,
for
it
is
his
Paraphrase
that
wee
haue
at
this
day
on
the
Prophets
(
and
the
language
which
wee
now
call
the
Syriaque
,
was
but
the
Iewish
Chaldee
,
although
in
the
after
times
,
by
the
mixture
of
Greeke
,
and
manie
other
forraine
words
it
beecame
somewhat
changed
,
from
what
in
the
times
afore
and
about
our
Sauiours
incarnation
it
had
beene
)
but
the
Pentateuch
also
:
at
least
,
if
that
bee
true
,
which
Sixtus
Senensis
hath
recorded
,
Sixt.
Senens
.
Biblioth.
Sanct.
l.
4.
indiction
.
Syr●
editio
.
Galatin
.
de
Arcan
.
Catholicae
Ve●●
l.
1.
c.
3.
namely
,
that
such
is
the
tradition
among
the
Iewes
,
and
which
Galatine
writeth
,
that
himselfe
hath
seene
that
translation
of
Ionathans
,
beside
that
of
Onkelos
,
for
of
that
part
of
the
Chaldee
Paraphrase
,
which
wee
haue
in
the
Complutense
,
and
K.
Philips
Bibles
,
on
the
Bookes
of
Moses
,
Onkelos
is
the
Author
:
of
that
on
Iosuah
,
the
Iudges
,
the
booke
of
the
Kings
and
of
the
Prophets
,
Ionathan
.
Of
that
on
Ruth
,
Hester
,
Iob
,
the
Psalmes
and
the
bookes
of
Salomon
,
R.
Ioseph
Caecus
.
the
beginning
of
both
which
hee
setteth
downe
,
differing
one
from
another
,
in
the
first
wordes
.
Which
(
namely
touching
the
publique
reading
of
the
Chaldee
Targamin
,
either
together
with
the
Hebrew
text
or
instead
of
it
)
I
may
as
well
conceiue
to
bee
true
,
as
that
the
forraine
[
](A16718-e21120-b)*
*
Vid.
Salmeron
.
De
Canonica
.
scriptura
.
Prolegom.
3.
in
Tomo
.
1.
&
de
interpretat
.
Septuagint
.
Prol.
5.
Iewes
,
Tertull.
in
Apologetico
.
ca.
19.
dwelling
in
Alexandria
,
and
other
parts
of
Aegypt
,
in
Asia
also
,
and
other
Greeke
prouinces
abroad
,
vsed
publiquely
in
stead
of
the
Hebrew
,
which
now
they
vnderstood
not
,
the
Septuagints
Greek
translation
,
as
is
euident
in
Tertullian
:
And
of
some
others
of
them
in
the
Constitutions
of
[
](A16718-e21220-b)*
*
Nouell
146.
Iustinian
.
Which
Iewes
for
that
very
cause
:
are
sundry
times
in
the
[
](A16718-e21250-b)*
*
Act.
6.1
.
&
9.29
.
&
11.20
.
Scalig.
in
Chron.
Euseb.
ad
An●um
.
MDCCXXXIV
.
&
Iu●
.
contra
.
Bellarm
Controu.
1.
l.
2.
c.
15.
§.
●1.
&
Drus.
Praetoritor
.
l.
5.
Annot.
ad
.
Act.
Ap.
6.1
.
Acts
of
the
Apostles
,
termed
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
.
For
by
that
name
,
in
the
iudgement
of
learned
men
the
naturall
Grecians
are
not
meant
,
which
are
alwaies
named
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
,
not
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
,
But
,
the
Iewes
dispersed
among
the
Gentiles
,
that
vsed
to
read
the
Greeke
Scriptures
in
their
Synagogues
.
And
heere
shall
bee
the
period
of
my
first
Enquiry
,
touching
Languages
,
and
beginning
of
the
second
,
concerning
the
sorts
of
Religions
,
abroad
in
the
World
.
In
discoursing
whereof
you
must
be
content
,
to
accept
of
moderne
Authors
,
because
I
am
to
intreate
of
moderne
matters
:
And
,
if
I
happe
to
steppe
awry
,
where
I
see
no
path
,
and
can
discerne
but
few
steppes
afore
mee
,
you
must
pardon
it
.
And
yet
this
one
thing
I
will
promise
you
,
that
if
either
they
that
should
direct
mee
,
mislead
me
not
,
or
(
where
my
reason
suspects
,
that
my
guides
wander
,
and
I
am
mislead
)
if
my
circumspect
obseruing
,
or
diligent
inquiring
,
may
preserue
me
from
errour
,
I
will
not
depart
a
haire
from
the
way
of
Truth
.
Of
the
sundry
parts
of
the
World
inhabited
by
Christians
.
CHAP.
X.
ALL
Europe
is
possessed
by
Christians
,
except
the
vtmost
corners
of
it
,
toward
the
East
,
and
the
North
,
for
the
small
companie
of
Mahumetanes
,
inhabiting
their
Michou
.
de
Sarmatia
.
l
2.
c
3.
peculiar
villages
about
Wilna
in
Litunia
,
or
the
scattered
Boem
de
Morib
.
gent
l
3.
c.
7.
Boter
Relat.
Par.
3.
l.
1.
Ziegl
tr
.
in
Schondia
▪
c
de
Lapponia
.
Damian
.
a
Goas
Tract
.
de
Lappijs
.
Michou
.
l.
2.
de
Sarmatia
.
c.
5.
Munster
.
Cosmog.
l.
4
c.
37.
Boter
.
Relation
pa
1.
l.
c.
de
Bothnia
.
remnants
of
Idolaters
,
in
the
same
prouince
,
and
in
Samogitia
,
are
not
woorthy
mentioning
.
But
toward
the
North
,
Lappia
,
Scricfinia
,
Biarmia
,
Corelia
,
and
the
North
part
of
Finmarke
(
all
which
together
passe
commonly
vnder
the
name
of
Lapland
,
and
make
a
region
about
900
miles
in
circuit
)
are
inhabited
by
Idolaters
:
and
toward
the
East
,
all
the
Region
betwixt
Tanais
and
Borysthenes
,
along
Maeotis
and
the
Euxine
sea
(
the
true
natiue
Country
of
the
ancient
Gothes
)
being
more
then
twise
as
large
as
the
former
,
and
withall
much
better
peopled
,
is
inhabited
by
the
Tartars
called
Crimaei
or
Precopitae
,
who
are
all
Mahumetans
,
excepting
onely
a
small
remainder
of
Christians
,
in
some
parts
of
Taurica
.
But
,
in
all
the
Turks
dominion
that
he
hath
in
Europe
,
inclosed
after
a
peninsular
figure
,
betweene
Danubius
and
the
Sea
,
and
containing
in
circuit
about
2300
miles
(
for
Moldauia
,
Walachia
and
Transiluania
,
I
rekon
not
for
parts
of
his
dominion
)
namely
,
from
aboue
Buda
,
on
Danubius
side
,
and
from
Ragusa
,
on
the
sea
side
Eastward
,
to
the
vtmost
bounds
of
Europe
,
as
also
in
the
Iles
of
the
Aegaean
sea
,
Christians
are
mingled
with
Mahumetans
.
All
which
dominion
yet
of
the
Turks
in
Europe
,
though
so
much
in
circuit
as
I
said
,
is
neuerthelesse
(
measured
by
squares
)
no
greater
then
Spaine
,
the
continent
of
it
,
being
no
way
answearable
to
the
circumference
:
both
,
because
it
runneth
far
out
in
sharpe
angles
,
toward
the
West
and
South
,
namely
in
Hungarie
and
Moraea
,
and
is
beside
,
in
Greece
in
many
places
,
extraordinarily
indented
with
the
sea
.
And
in
this
dominion
of
the
Turks
in
Europe
,
such
is
notwithstanding
the
mixture
of
Mahumetans
with
Christians
,
that
the
Christians
[
](A16718-e21790-b)*
*
Boter
.
Relat.
pa.
2.
l.
4.
nel
Relation
.
del
gran
.
Turco
.
Georgeuitz
.
de
Affliction
.
Christian.
sub
Turca
l.
1.
ca.
de
Tributis
.
make
two
third
parts
at
least
,
of
the
Inhabitants
:
for
the
Turke
,
so
that
Christians
pay
him
his
yearely
tribute
(
which
is
one
fourth
part
of
their
increase
,
and
a
Sultanie
for
euery
poll
)
and
speake
nothing
against
the
religion
and
sect
of
Mahumet
,
permitteth
them
the
libertie
of
their
religion
,
And
euen
in
Greece
it selfe
,
although
more
dissolute
then
any
region
of
Europe
subiect
to
the
Turke
,
(
as
hauing
beene
anciently
more
wasted
with
intestine
discord
,
and
longest
groaned
vnder
the
Turks
oppression
)
there
remain
yet
neuerthelesse
in
[
](A16718-e21870-b)⸫
⸫
Chitrae
de
●tatu
Ecclesi●r
non
longé
ab
initio
.
Constantinople
,
the
very
seate
of
the
Turkish
Empire
,
aboue
20
Churches
of
Christians
,
and
in
the
Citie
of
Salonichi
(
Thessalonica
)
aboue
30
,
(
wheras
in
this
later
the
Mahumetans
haue
but
3
)
beside
very
many
Churches
abroad
in
the
Prouince
vnder
suffragan
Bishops
,
Gerlach
in
epist.
ad
Crus
.
Turcograeciae
.
l.
pag.
of
whom
the
Metropolitan
of
Salonichi
,
hath
no
lesse
then
10
,
belonging
to
his
Iurisdiction
,
as
there
are
also
recorded
yet
to
remaine
vnder
the
Metropolitans
of
Philippi
,
150
Churches
:
of
Athens
,
as
many
:
of
Corinth
,
100
,
together
with
sundry
suffragan
Bishops
vnder
each
of
them
.
But
in
Afrique
,
all
the
Regions
in
a
maner
,
that
Christian
religion
had
gained
from
Idolatry
,
Mahumetanisme
hath
regained
from
Christianitie
:
Insomuch
,
that
not
onely
the
North
part
of
Afrique
,
lying
along
the
Mediterrane
sea
,
Concil
Carthag
.
4.
&
Concil.
African
.
seu
Carthag.
6.
namely
,
betwixt
it
and
the
Mountaine
Atlas
,
euen
from
Spaine
to
Aegypt
,
where
Christianitie
sometime
exceedingly
flourished
,
as
the
we
reade
Synodes
of
aboue
200
Bishops
to
haue
beene
gathered
,
and
[
](A16718-e22070-b)*
*
Martin
.
Polon
.
Supput
.
An.
475.
300
Catholique
Bishops
to
haue
beene
there
expelled
,
by
Gensericus
K.
of
the
Wandales
:
And
in
some
one
Prouince
alone
,
[
](A16718-e22100-b)*
*
Victor
.
l
1.
de
Persecut
.
Vandalec
.
Zengitana
by
name
,
(
it
is
that
wherein
Carthage
stood
)
to
haue
beene
164
Bishops
vnder
one
Metropolitan
:
)
Not
onely
that
North
part
of
Afrique
I
say
,
is
at
this
present
vtterly
voide
of
Christians
,
excepting
a
few
Townes
belonging
to
the
King
of
Spaine
,
(
of
which
onely
Septa
and
Tanger
are
Episcopall
Cities
:
)
but
euen
in
all
the
vast
continent
of
Aphrique
,
being
about
thrice
as
large
as
Europe
,
there
is
not
any
Region
entierly
possessed
by
Christians
,
but
the
kingdome
of
Habassia
,
no
,
nor
yet
,
(
which
is
more
lamentable
)
any
other
,
where
Christians
are
mingled
,
either
with
Mahumetans
,
but
onely
Aegypt
:
or
where
with
Idolaters
,
but
the
kingdomes
of
[
](A16718-e22230-b)*
*
Pigafet
.
hist.
Regni
Congens
.
l.
2.
c.
2.
Congo
and
Angola
:
which
two
about
120
yeares
agoe
(
An.
1491
)
beganne
first
to
receiue
Christianity
:
All
the
rest
of
Afrique
,
being
entirly
gouerned
,
and
possessed
by
Pagans
,
or
Mahumetans
.
To
which
,
if
I
should
adde
,
those
few
places
in
Afrique
,
afore
mentioned
,
near
the
Strait
of
Gibraltar
,
which
the
KK
.
of
Portugall
and
Castile
,
haue
conquered
from
the
Mores
,
with
the
other
few
dispersed
fortresses
,
which
the
Portugalles
hold
in
other
places
on
the
coast
of
Afrique
(
altogether
euen
betwixt
Spaine
and
India
are
but
11
or
12
)
I
know
not
where
to
finde
,
euen
among
all
the
natiue
Inhabitants
of
Aphrique
,
any
Christians
more
.
For
,
as
for
the
large
region
of
Nubia
,
which
had
from
the
Apostles
time
,
(
as
is
thought
)
professed
the
Christian
faith
,
it
hath
againe
aboue
100
yeares
since
,
forsaken
it
,
and
embraced
in
steade
of
it
,
partly
Mahumetanisme
,
and
partly
Idolatrie
,
and
that
by
the
most
miserable
occasion
that
might
befall
,
namely
famine
of
the
word
of
God
through
lacke
of
Ministers
:
for
as
Albarez
hath
recorded
,
Aluarez
.
Hist.
Aethiopic
.
ca.
137.
at
his
being
in
the
K.
of
Habassia
his
Court
,
there
were
Embassadours
out
of
Nubia
,
to
intreat
him
for
a
supply
of
Ministers
,
to
instruct
their
nation
,
and
repaire
Christianity
gone
to
ruine
among
them
:
but
were
reiected
.
And
yet
are
the
Christians
of
Aegypt
,
namely
those
of
the
natiue
Inhabitants
,
but
very
few
in
respect
of
that
infinitenesse
of
people
,
wherwith
Aegypt
doth
,
and
euer
did
abound
,
as
being
esteemed
,
not
to
passe
[
](A16718-e22490-b)*
*
Boter
.
Relat.
pa.
1.
l.
3.
cap.
de
1
popoli
del
Egitto
.
Thom.
a
Ies.
de
Conuers
.
gent.
l.
7.
par.
1.
c.
5.
50000.
And
,
as
touching
the
Kingdome
of
Habassia
,
neither
is
it
all
Christians
,
but
a
great
part
of
Gentiles
,
namely
toward
the
West
,
and
South
bounds
of
it
,
and
some
part
Mahumetans
,
toward
the
East
border
:
neither
so
large
and
spatio●s
,
as
many
mens
relations
haue
made
it
thought
to
be
.
For
although
I
cannot
assent
to
them
,
who
assigne
to
that
great
Kingdome
,
but
about
Boter
.
Relat.
pa.
1.
l.
3.
c.
de
Abassia
.
662
leagues
of
compasse
,
by
which
reckoning
(
suppose
they
were
Spanish
leagues
)
it
should
be
little
larger
then
Germany
,
(
for
I
know
full
well
,
by
infallible
obseruations
,
that
sparing
limitation
of
theirs
,
to
be
vntrue
)
yet
,
neither
can
I
yeeld
to
them
,
who
esteem
it
[
](A16718-e22550-b)*
*
Horat.
Malaguz
.
nel
discorso
de
●
.
cinque
massimi
Signo●i
.
greater
,
then
the
vast
dominions
of
the
Emperours
of
Turkie
or
of
Tartarie
&c:
Or
,
to
them
,
that
extend
it
from
the
one
Tropique
,
to
the
other
,
and
from
the
red
sea
,
almost
to
the
west
Ocean
.
For
first
,
certaine
it
is
(
that
I
may
speake
a
little
of
the
limits
of
this
kingdome
)
that
it
attaineth
not
to
the
redde
sea
(
Eastward
)
neither
within
the
straits
of
Babel
mandel
,
nor
without
:
for
within
those
straits
,
Boter
.
〈◊〉
pro●im
.
cita●o
.
along
the
Bay
of
Arabia
,
there
is
a
continuall
ledge
of
mountaines
,
knowne
to
bee
inhabited
with
Moores
,
betwixt
that
Bay
,
and
the
dominion
of
Habassia
:
So
that
,
only
one
Port
there
is
,
along
all
that
coast
,
Somman
.
dei
regni
Oriental
.
apud
Ramos
vol
1.
pag
,
324
.
(
Ercoco
by
name
)
where
those
mountaines
open
to
the
Sea
,
that
at
this
present
belongeth
to
it
.
Neither
without
those
Straits
doth
it
any
where
approach
to
the
Ocean
.
All
that
coast
,
as
farre
as
Mozambique
,
being
well
knowne
to
be
inhabited
with
Arabians
.
And
as
touching
the
west
limits
of
Habassia
,
I
can
not
finde
by
any
certaine
history
or
relation
(
vnskilfull
men
may
rumour
what
they
will
,
and
I
know
also
that
the
common
Charts
represent
it
otherwise
)
I
cannot
find
I
say
,
that
it
stretcheth
beyond
the
riuer
Nilus
,
so
far
commeth
it
short
of
the
West
Ocean
.
For
it
is
knowne
,
that
all
the
west
bank
of
Nilus
,
from
the
riuer
of
Zaire
to
the
confines
of
Nubia
,
Boter
.
Rel●●
.
p
1
lib.
3.
ca.
Loango
.
A●●zichi
.
is
possessed
by
the
Anzichi
,
being
an
idolatrous
and
man-eating
nation
,
&
subiect
to
a
great
Prince
of
their
own
,
thus
then
it
is
with
the
bredth
of
the
Empire
of
Habassia
,
betwixt
East
and
West
:
And
now
to
speake
of
the
length
of
it
,
lying
north
and
South
,
neither
doth
it
approach
northward
on
Nilus
side
,
further
then
the
south
end
of
the
Isle
of
Meroe
,
(
Meroe
it selfe
is
inhabited
by
Mahumetans
,
and
the
deadly
enemies
of
the
king
of
Habassia
)
nor
on
the
Sea
side
farther
then
about
the
port
of
Suachem
.
And
toward
the
south
,
although
the
bounds
of
that
kingdom
,
be
not
perfectly
known
,
yet
that
it
approacheth
nothing
neere
the
circle
of
Capricorne
,
as
hath
bin
supposed
,
is
most
manifest
,
because
the
great
kingdomes
of
Moenhemage
,
and
Benomotapa
,
and
some
others
,
are
situate
betwixt
Habassia
and
that
circle
.
But
,
as
neere
as
I
am
able
to
coniecture
,
hauing
made
the
best
search
that
I
can
,
in
the
itineraries
and
relations
,
that
are
extant
of
those
parts
,
the
south
limit
of
that
Empire
,
passeth
not
the
south
parallel
of
six
or
seuen
degrees
at
the
most
,
where
it
confineth
with
Moenhemage
.
So
that
to
make
a
respectiue
estimate
of
the
largenesse
of
that
dominion
,
by
comparing
it
with
our
knowne
regions
of
Europe
,
It
seemeth
equall
to
Germany
and
France
,
and
Spaine
,
and
Italie
laid
together
:
Equall
I
say
in
dimension
of
ground
,
but
nothing
neere
equall
in
habitation
or
multitude
of
people
,
which
the
distemperature
of
that
climate
,
and
the
drye
barrennes
of
the
ground
,
in
many
regions
of
it
,
wil
not
allow
.
For
which
cause
the
torride
parts
of
Afrique
,
are
by
Piso
in
Strabo
resembled
to
a
Libbards
skinne
,
Strab.
l.
2.
the
distance
of
whose
spots
,
represent
the
dispersednesse
of
habitations
or
townes
in
Afrique
.
But
if
I
should
absolutely
set
downe
the
circuit
of
that
whole
dominion
,
I
esteeme
the
limitation
of
Pigafetta
,
Pigafett
.
de
Regn.
Cong
.
l.
1.
c.
10.
nere
about
the
truth
,
namely
,
that
it
hath
in
circumference
4000.
miles
(
about
1500.
in
length
,
and
about
600.
in
breadth
:
)
beeing
inclosed
with
Mahumetans
on
the
north
,
and
east
,
and
with
Idolaters
,
on
the
West
and
South
.
Such
then
as
I
haue
declared
,
is
the
condition
of
Christians
in
the
continent
of
Afrique
:
but
the
Inhabitants
of
the
Isles
along
the
west
coast
of
Africk
,
as
namely
Madera
;
the
Canaries
,
the
Isles
of
Cabo
verde
,
and
of
S.
Thomas
,
and
some
other
of
lesse
importance
,
are
by
the
Portugals
and
Castilians
instruction
,
become
Christian
:
but
on
the
East
side
of
Afrique
,
excepting
only
[
](A16718-e23080-b)*
*
Paul
.
Venet.
l.
3.
c.
38.
Zocotora
,
there
is
no
Christian
Isle
.
Euen
such
is
the
state
of
Christians
in
the
firme
land
,
and
the
adiacent
Isles
of
Afrique
.
And
it
is
not
much
better
in
Asia
,
for
excepting
first
the
Empire
of
Russia
,
(
and
yet
of
it
,
a
great
part
is
Idolatrous
,
namely
the
region
betweene
the
riuers
of
Pechora
and
Ob
,
and
some
part
of
Permia
)
secondly
,
the
regions
of
Circassia
,
and
Mengrelia
,
lying
along
Moe●tis
and
the
Euxine
sea
,
from
Tanais
Eastward
as
farre
as
the
riuer
Phasis
.
Thirdly
,
the
prouince
of
Georgia
,
and
fourthly
the
mountaine
Libanus
in
Syria
,
(
and
yet
the
last
of
these
is
of
the
Turkes
dominion
)
excepting
these
few
I
say
,
there
is
not
any
region
in
all
Asia
,
where
Christians
liue
seueral
,
without
mixture
,
either
of
Mahumetans
,
or
of
Pagans
,
for
although
Vitriacus
a
man
well
experienced
in
some
parts
of
the
orient
,
Iacob
.
a
Vitriaco
.
Histor.
Orient
.
c.
77.
(
as
being
Bishop
of
Acon
and
the
Popes
Legate
in
the
East
,
at
what
time
Palestina
and
Syria
were
in
the
hands
of
Christians
)
hath
left
registred
,
that
the
Christians
of
the
Easterlie
parts
of
Asia
,
exceeded
in
multitude
the
Christians
of
the
Greek
and
Latine
Churches
:
yet
in
his
time
(
for
he
writ
almost
400.
yeares
agoe
)
Christianity
began
to
decline
,
and
since
his
time
,
it
hath
proceeded
infinitely
to
decay
,
in
all
those
parts
of
Asia
:
first
,
by
the
inundation
of
the
idolatrous
Tartars
,
who
subdued
all
those
regions
,
and
after
by
the
intertaining
of
Mahumetanisme
in
many
of
them
.
The
time
was
indeed
,
(
and
but
about
400.
yeares
agoe
)
when
the
King
of
Tenduc
,
whom
the
histories
of
those
times
name
Presbyter
Iohannes
,
a
Christian
,
but
a
Nestorian
Prince
,
ruled
farre
and
wide
,
in
the
Northeast
part
of
Asia
:
as
hauing
vnder
his
dominion
,
beside
Tenduc
,
(
which
was
his
owne
natiue
and
peculiar
kingdome
)
all
the
neighbouring
prouinces
,
which
were
at
that
time
for
a
great
part
,
Christian
:
but
after
that
his
Empire
was
brought
to
ruine
,
and
he
subdued
by
Chingis
a
rebell
of
his
owne
dominion
(
and
the
first
founder
of
the
Tartarian
Empire
)
which
happened
about
the
yeare
1190.
the
state
of
Christian
Religion
became
in
short
time
strangely
altered
in
those
parts
,
Paul
Venet.
l.
●
.
cap.
8.
for
I
find
in
Marcus
Paulus
,
who
liued
within
50.
yeares
after
Vitriacus
,
and
was
a
man
of
more
experience
in
those
parts
then
hee
,
as
hauing
spent
seuenteene
yeares
together
in
Tartarie
,
partly
in
the
Emperours
Court
,
and
partly
in
trauailing
ouer
those
Regions
,
about
the
Emperours
affaires
,
that
except
the
Prouince
of
Tenduc
,
which
as
I
saide
was
the
kingdome
of
Presbyter
Iohns
residence
(
for
it
was
the
Prince
of
that
kingdome
,
Scaliger
.
de
En●●●ndat
.
tempor
.
l
7.
Annot.
in
comput
Aethiop
.
which
is
rightly
&
vsually
,
For
Scaligers
imagination
,
that
it
was
the
King
of
the
Habassines
,
that
inlarged
his
dominion
so
far
in
the
northe
east
of
Asia
,
till
hee
was
driuen
into
Afrique
by
the
Tartars
,
hath
neither
any
foundation
at
all
in
historie
,
nor
probability
in
reason
.
Namely
that
a
King
in
Afrique
should
subdue
the
most
distant
parts
of
all
Asia
from
him
,
and
there
hould
residence
,
al
the
regions
betwixt
belonging
to
other
Princes
.
Moreouer
it
is
certainly
known
of
Presbyter
Iohn
of
Asia
,
that
hee
was
a
Nestorian
,
whereas
hee
of
Habassia
was
,
and
still
is
,
a
Iacobite
.
Besides
,
it
hath
bene
recorded
from
time
to
time
,
of
the
Christians
of
Habassia
,
that
they
were
circumcised
,
which
of
those
of
the
East
,
was
neuer
reported
by
any
,
&c.
by
the
ancienter
historians
named
Presbyter
Iohn
,
howsoeuer
the
mistaking
fantasies
of
many
,
haue
transported
it
out
of
Asia
into
Africk
and
by
errour
bestowed
it
on
the
K.
of
Habassia
,
)
except
that
Prouince
of
Tenduc
I
say
,
whereof
[
](A16718-e23490-b)*
*
Paul
,
Ven●t
.
l.
1.
ca.
64.
Marcus
Paulus
confesseth
the
greater
part
,
to
haue
professed
the
Christian
religion
at
his
being
in
Tartary
,
the
rest
of
the
inhabitants
,
being
partly
Mahumetans
,
[
](A16718-e23520-b)*
*
Vtriae
.
Histor.
Orient
c.
78.
Otho
Phrisingen
s.
l.
7.
c.
33.
&
Alij
.
and
partly
Idolaters
:
in
all
the
other
prouinces
of
those
parts
beside
,
that
,
hee
obserueth
the
Christians
to
bee
but
few
,
as
namely
in
the
kingdomes
of
[
](A16718-e23530-b)*
*
L.
1.
c.
45.
Tanguth
,
of
[
](A16718-e23550-b)*
*
L.
1.
c.
47.
Chinchintales
,
of
[
](A16718-e23570-b)*
*
L.
1.
c.
48.
Succhuir
,
of
[
](A16718-e23590-b)*
*
L.
2.
c.
39.
Caraiam
,
of
[
](A16718-e23610-b)*
*
L.
1.
c.
38.
Cassar
,
of
[
](A16718-e23630-b)*
*
L.
1.
c.
40.
Carcham
,
of
[
](A16718-e23650-b)*
*
L.
1.
c.
62.
Ergimuli
,
of
[
](A16718-e23670-b)*
*
L.
1.
c.
63.
Cerguth
,
of
Egrigaia
,
and
in
the
other
regions
of
Tartary
mentioning
no
Christians
at
al.
Two
cities
onely
I
finde
in
him
excepted
,
the
one
was
[
](A16718-e23700-b)*
*
L.
2.
c.
61.
Cingiangifu
in
Mangi
,
(
that
is
China
)
where
he
noteth
,
that
many
Christians
dwelt
,
and
the
other
[
](A16718-e23740-b)*
*
L.
2.
c.
64.
Quinsay
,
in
which
later
yet
,
(
although
the
greatest
city
in
the
world
)
he
hath
recorded
to
be
found
but
one
Church
of
Christians
.
But
,
these
places
excepted
before
mentioned
.
I
can
finde
no
certaine
relation
,
neither
in
Paul
Venetus
,
nor
anie
other
,
of
any
Christians
of
the
natiue
inhabitants
,
in
all
the
East
of
Asia
,
but
Idolatrie
keepeth
still
her
ould
possession
,
and
ouerspreadethall
.
But
yet
indeede
,
in
the
more
Southerly
partes
of
Asia
(
especially
in
those
where
Christianity
was
first
planted
,
and
had
taken
deepest
roote
)
as
Natolia
,
Syria
,
Palestine
,
Chaldaea
,
Assyria
,
Mesopotamia
,
Armenia
,
Media
,
Persia
,
the
North
part
of
Arabia
,
and
the
South
of
India
,
Christians
are
not
onely
to
be
found
,
but
in
certaine
of
those
regions
,
as
in
Natolia
,
Armenia
,
Syria
,
Mesopotamia
,
somewhat
thicke
mingled
with
Mahum●tans
:
as
they
are
also
in
the
South
of
India
not
farre
from
the
Promontorie
of
Comorijn
,
in
some
reasonable
number
,
in
the
kingdome
of
Contan
,
of
Cranganor
,
and
of
Choromandeb
,
but
mingled
with
Idolaters
.
But
yet
,
is
not
this
mixture
of
Christians
with
them
of
other
religions
,
in
any
part
of
Asia
,
after
the
proportion
of
their
mixture
in
Europe
(
where
I
obserued
the
Christians
to
make
the
preuailing
number
)
but
they
are
farre
inferiour
,
to
the
multitude
of
the
Mahumetans
,
and
of
the
Idolaters
,
among
whom
they
are
mingled
,
and
yet
touching
their
number
,
decrease
euerie
day
,
in
all
the
parts
aforesaid
,
India
onely
excepted
.
Where
since
the
Portugales
held
Goa
(
which
they
haue
erected
into
an
Archbishopricke
)
and
intertained
Malabar
,
and
some
other
parts
of
India
,
what
with
commerce
,
and
what
with
amitie
,
the
number
of
Christians
is
greatly
multiplied
,
in
sundrie
places
of
that
region
,
but
yet
not
so
,
as
to
compare
in
any
sort
,
with
the
Mahumetans
,
and
much
lesse
with
the
Idolaters
among
whom
they
liue
.
Thus
it
is
with
Christians
in
the
firme
Land
of
Asia
:
but
in
the
Islands
about
Asia
,
Christianitie
is
as
yet
but
a
tender
plant
:
for
although
it
hath
made
some
entrance
into
the
Isles
called
Philippinas
,
namely
into
30
of
them
,
for
so
manie
onely
of
11000
termed
by
that
name
,
are
subiect
to
the
King
of
Spaine
.
Th.
Ies.
de
Conu
.
gent.
l.
1.
c.
1.
by
the
industrie
of
the
Castilians
,
as
also
by
the
preaching
of
the
Portugales
,
into
Ormuz
in
the
Bay
of
Persia
,
and
into
C●ilan
in
the
Sea
of
India
,
and
some
few
other
of
the
infinite
multitude
of
Islands
,
dispersed
in
that
Easterne
sea
,
yet
hath
it
hetherto
found
in
all
those
places
,
rather
some
faire
beginning
,
then
any
great
proceeding
.
Onely
in
Iaponia
Christianity
hath
obtained
(
notwithstanding
many
hinderances
and
oppositions
)
more
prosperous
successe
.
Insomuch
that
many
yeares
since
,
there
were
recorded
to
haue
beene
by
estimation
,
about
[
](A16718-e24100-b)*
*
Plat.
de
Bono
Stat
Religiosi
.
l.
2.
c.
30.
200000
Christians
in
Iaponia
.
Lastly
,
in
America
,
there
be
foure
large
regions
,
and
those
of
the
most
fruitefull
and
populous
part
of
it
,
possessed
and
gouerned
by
the
Spaniards
,
that
is
,
Nu●ua
Espana
,
Castilla
del
Oro
(
otherwise
termed
Nu●bo
Reino
)
Peru
,
and
part
of
Brasile
,
the
first
three
,
by
the
Castilians
,
and
the
fourth
,
by
the
Portugales
,
all
which
together
,
may
by
estimation
,
make
a
region
as
large
as
Europe
.
In
which
,
as
also
in
the
Islands
,
specially
in
the
greater
Islands
of
Hispaniola
,
Cuba
,
Iamaica
,
and
Puerto
rico
,
the
Christian
religion
is
so
largely
spred
,
that
[
](A16718-e24230-b)*
*
Amand.
Ziriean
Chron.
circ.
An.
1519.
one
hath
presumed
,
to
equall
in
a
manner
,
the
Christians
of
America
,
to
those
of
the
Latine
Church
in
Europe
:
And
[
](A16718-e24250-b)*
*
Surius
.
in
Chron.
ad
.
An
Christ.
1558.
another
,
hath
left
recorded
,
that
within
a
few
yeares
after
the
entrance
of
the
Gospell
among
them
,
there
were
no
lesse
then
seuen
Millions
,
or
as
others
reported
fourteene
Millions
,
that
in
the
sacrament
of
baptisme
had
giuen
their
names
to
Christ
.
But
especially
in
the
kingdome
of
Mexico
(
or
Nueua
Espanna
)
Christian
Religion
obtained
that
plentifull
and
prosperous
successe
,
that
we
finde
recorded
of
sundrie
of
the
Preachers
,
employed
about
the
conuersion
of
that
people
,
that
they
baptised
ech
one
of
them
,
Vid.
epist.
Petri
Gaudens
.
in
Comment.
Sedulij
ad
vitam
.
S.
Francisci
.
pa.
229.
et
Epist.
Martin
.
2
Valentia
.
Ibid
.
pag.
232.
et
Epist.
Episcopi
Mexicani
.
pag.
235.
aboue
100000.
and
that
in
few
yeares
▪
Insomuch
that
(
as
is
storied
by
Surius
)
It
is
to
be
found
among
the
records
of
Charles
the
fift
,
that
some
old
Priest
hath
baptised
700000.
another
,
300000
,
and
certaine
others
verie
great
multitudes
.
But
yet
,
what
maner
of
Christians
manie
of
those
proselytes
were
,
I
am
loth
to
remember
,
or
report
(
and
it
may
be
by
this
time
,
they
are
better
affected
and
instructed
then
they
were
)
for
certainely
,
Ouiedo
,
and
Benzo
,
men
that
had
long
liued
,
and
were
well
experienced
in
those
parts
,
haue
left
recorded
,
the
first
of
[
](A16718-e24330-b)*
*
Ouied
Hiftor
.
Ind.
Occidental
.
l.
17.
c.
4.
Cuba
,
that
there
was
scare
any
one
,
or
but
very
few
,
that
willingly
became
Christians
,
Benzo
.
histor.
Nou.
Orbis
.
l.
2.
c.
19.
and
both
Ouiedo
of
them
,
and
Benzo
of
the
Christians
of
Nueua
Espanna
,
that
they
had
nothing
almost
belonging
to
Christianitie
,
but
onely
the
bare
name
of
Christians
,
being
so
vtterly
mindelesse
,
and
carelesse
of
Christian
religion
,
that
they
remembred
not
any
thing
of
the
couenant
and
profession
,
they
made
in
their
baptisme
:
Onely
,
they
kept
in
minde
,
the
name
they
receaued
then
,
which
very
name
also
,
they
forgot
soone
after
.
But
all
the
rest
of
America
except
the
regions
afore
mentioned
,
which
compared
to
the
parts
possessed
by
the
Castilians
and
Portugales
(
to
make
estimation
by
the
Mappes
that
wee
haue
of
those
regions
,
for
the
North
and
West
coasts
of
America
,
are
not
yet
perfectly
discouered
)
may
be
as
sixe
to
one
,
is
possessed
by
Idolaters
.
Of
the
parts
of
the
World
possessed
by
Mahumetans
.
CHAP.
XI
.
HAuing
declared
the
amplitude
of
Christianitie
,
I
will
proceede
to
shew
the
state
of
other
religions
in
the
world
,
&
with
all
,
what
parts
of
it
,
the
professours
of
those
religions
doe
seuerally
inhabite
;
and
lastly
,
what
proportion
they
may
haue
each
to
other
,
and
all
of
them
to
Christians
.
To
indeuour
therefore
your
satisfaction
in
this
behalfe
.
There
are
foure
sorts
or
sects
of
Religion
,
obserued
in
the
sundrie
regions
of
the
World
.
Namely
,
Idolatrie
,
Mahumetanisme
,
Iudaisme
,
and
Christianity
.
Of
Christians
I
haue
alreadie
spoken
:
now
therefore
will
I
relate
for
your
better
contentment
,
of
the
other
three
;
and
first
of
Mahumetans
.
Mahumetans
then
possesse
in
Europe
,
as
I
said
before
(
hauing
in
that
part
but
small
mixture
of
Christians
)
all
the
region
betwixt
Tanais
and
Boristhenes
(
Don
and
Nieper
they
are
now
called
)
being
about
a
twentith
part
of
Europe
:
beside
Mathi●a
Michou
.
de
Sarmat
.
l.
2.
c.
3.
some
villages
in
Lituania
about
Wilna
,
where
the
vse
of
their
religion
is
by
the
King
of
Poland
permitted
them
,
for
in
Greece
,
Macedon
,
Thrace
,
Bulgaria
,
Rascia
,
Seruia
,
Bosina
,
Epirus
,
the
greatest
part
of
Hungaria
,
and
some
part
of
Dalmatia
(
which
may
bee
together
about
one
foureteenth
part
of
Europe
)
although
the
gouernment
be
wholy
the
Turkes
,
yet
Mahumetans
scarcely
passe
one
third
part
of
the
Inhabitants
.
But
in
Afrique
Mahumetanisme
is
spred
exceeding
farre
,
for
,
first
to
consider
the
maritime
coast
:
It
possesseth
all
the
shoare
of
the
Atlantique
Ocean
,
from
Cape
Blanco
to
the
Strait
of
Gibralter
,
being
about
1100
miles
.
Secondly
,
on
the
shoare
of
the
mediterrane
,
all
from
that
Strait
to
Aegypt
,
about
2400
miles
,
excepting
onely
on
the
one
coast
,
and
on
the
other
,
some
seuen
townes
,
in
the
possession
of
the
Spaniards
.
Thirdly
,
on
the
East
side
of
Afrique
all
the
coast
of
the
Bay
of
Arabia
,
euen
from
Suez
to
C.
Gardafu
.
,
about
1600
miles
,
excepting
onely
one
port
(
Ercoco
)
being
of
the
dominion
of
the
King
of
Habassia
.
And
thence
(
doubling
that
Cape
)
Southward
,
all
the
shore
of
the
Aethiopique
sea
,
as
farre
as
Mozambique
(
that
is
ouer
against
the
middest
of
Madagascar
)
about
1800
miles
.
And
in
all
the
coasts
of
Afrique
hitherto
mentioned
,
being
altogether
about
7000
miles
(
that
is
,
by
some
excesse
more
then
halfe
the
circumference
of
Afrique
)
the
professors
of
Mahumeds
religion
,
haue
both
possession
and
dominion
,
together
with
the
[
](A16718-e24860-b)*
*
Paul
.
Venet.
l.
3.
c.
39.
Linschot
.
l.
●
.
c.
3.
maritime
parts
,
of
the
great
Isle
of
Madagascar
,
and
many
other
Islands
along
the
coast
of
Afrique
.
And
yet
,
euen
beyond
Mozambique
also
,
as
farre
as
to
the
Cape
das
Corrientes
(
it
is
vnder
the
circle
of
Capricorne
)
although
they
haue
there
no
rule
,
yet
they
are
found
mingled
with
Idolaters
.
But
yet
neuerthelesse
,
obserued
it
is
,
that
along
the
East
shoare
of
Afrique
,
namely
from
Suachem
to
Mozambique
(
being
towards
3000
miles
of
the
mentioned
coast
)
Mahumetans
possesse
onely
the
Margent
of
the
land
,
or
the
sea
shoare
,
and
haue
gotten
but
little
footing
in
the
inland
parts
,
except
in
the
kingdomes
of
Dangali
and
Adel
,
confining
together
,
the
first
within
and
the
second
without
the
straite
of
Babel
Mandel
,
which
yet
are
but
small
prouinces
.
And
this
also
(
to
extenuate
their
number
)
is
also
true
,
that
from
the
kingdome
of
Adel
,
and
Cape
Guardafu
,
to
Mozambique
,
there
is
found
among
the
Mahumetans
,
some
mixture
of
Idolaters
,
although
the
dominion
bee
onely
in
the
Mahumetans
hands
.
But
yet
on
the
North
and
West
parts
of
Afrique
,
it
is
farre
otherwise
,
and
farre
worse
:
Mahumetanisme
hauing
ouerspread
all
the
maine
land
of
Afrique
,
betweene
the
Mediterraine
sea
and
the
great
riuer
Neger
:
and
along
the
course
of
Nilus
,
as
farre
as
the
Isle
of
Meroe
,
which
lieth
also
about
the
same
parallel
with
the
riuer
Niger
,
and
is
possessed
by
Mahumetans
.
And
yet
,
[
](A16718-e25140-b)*
*
Leo.
Afri●
.
l.
1
cap.
de
Religion
.
Afror
.
beyond
Niger
also
,
it
hath
inuaded
and
obtained
,
all
the
kingdomes
of
the
Nigrites
that
border
on
that
riuer
.
So
that
all
Barbarie
and
Biled
elgerid
,
and
Libya
deserta
,
and
the
region
of
Negroes
,
are
become
of
that
religion
.
Excepting
first
some
maritime
parts
toward
the
Atlantique
sea
,
namely
from
C.
Blanco
southward
,
which
are
inhabited
by
Gentils
.
Secondly
,
the
kingdome
of
Borno
,
and
some
part
of
Nubia
:
And
thirdly
,
certaine
scattered
multitudes
of
the
old
African
progenie
,
that
still
retaine
their
ancient
gentilisme
,
and
are
found
in
diuers
places
heere
and
there
in
the
mountaines
&
wilder
parts
of
Barbary
,
of
Biled-elgerid
,
and
of
Libya
.
These
I
say
,
beeing
excepted
,
all
Afrique
beside
,
from
the
mediterrane
sea
,
som
what
more
southward
then
the
riuer
Niger
,
is
ouerspread
with
Mahumetans
:
which
(
adding
these
before
mentioned
,
along
the
east
coast
of
Aethiopia
)
may
by
estimation
,
take
vp
foure
nine
parts
of
Afrique
.
And
yet
in
Asia
,
Mahumetanism
is
farther
spred
,
beeing
imbraced
and
maintained
chiefly
,
by
foure
mighty
nations
,
namely
,
the
Arabians
,
Persians
,
Turkes
,
and
Tartars
.
Arabia
was
indeed
the
nest
,
that
bred
and
fostered
that
vncleane
bird
,
and
had
it
bene
the
cage
also
,
for
euer
to
enclose
it
,
it
had
bin
but
too
much
space
and
liberty
,
for
Arabia
is
in
circuit
aboue
4000.
miles
,
and
except
a
small
mixture
of
Christians
in
Eltor
,
a
port
towne
toward
the
inmost
angle
of
the
bay
of
Arabia
,
and
Petra
,
(
Krac
now
it
is
called
)
a
midland
towne
,
and
two
Monasteries
about
the
Hill
of
Sinai
,
all
is
possessed
with
Mahumetans
.
But
from
Arabia
that
poison
hath
in
such
sort
dispersed
it selfe
through
the
veynes
of
Asia
,
that
neere
the
one
halfe
,
is
at
this
day
corrupted
by
it
.
For
although
it
hath
not
hetherto
attained
to
the
north
coast
of
Asia
,
which
is
partly
inhabited
by
Christians
,
namely
,
from
the
riuer
of
Dwyna
to
Pechora
,
and
partly
by
idolaters
from
Pechora
to
the
East
Ocean
:
nor
yet
to
the
east
coast
,
which
from
the
most
northerly
part
of
Tartary
,
to
the
most
southerly
part
of
India
,
[
](A16718-e25370-b)*
*
Boter
.
Rel.
pa.
3.
l.
2.
cap.
de
Mahometan●
.
(
except
some
few
places
in
the
kingdome
of
Siam
)
Idolaters
in
l●ke
sort
generally
obtaine
:
yet
neuerthelesse
,
it
is
as
I
saide
,
namely
,
that
a
very
great
part
of
Asia
,
is
infected
with
that
pestilence
.
For
first
,
all
the
southerly
coast
of
Asia
,
from
the
Bay
of
Arabia
to
the
riuer
Indus
,
is
possessed
by
Mahumetans
:
and
if
wee
proceed
further
along
that
shore
,
euen
beyond
the
riuer
of
Indus
also
,
the
great
kingdomes
of
Cambaia
,
and
Bengala
,
for
a
great
part
of
them
,
and
about
one
fourth
part
of
the
inhabitants
of
Malabar
,
are
obserued
to
be
Mahumetans
.
And
secondly
,
to
consider
the
inland
parts
:
all
from
the
westerly
bounds
of
Asia
,
namely
the
riuer
Tanais
,
with
the
Euxine
,
Aegaean
,
and
Mediterane
seas
,
as
farre
Eastward
,
as
the
mountaine
Imaus
,
(
which
is
more
then
halfe
the
length
of
Asia
)
is
possessed
by
them
:
Except
,
first
the
[
](A16718-e25440-b)*
*
Guaguin
.
Descr.
Tartar
.
in
Kyrges●orum
Horda
.
Kirgessi
neere
Imaus
,
who
are
Idolaters
:
and
secondly
,
the
mixture
of
Christians
among
them
,
who
yet
haue
very
small
proportion
(
for
their
multitude
)
to
Mahumetans
,
in
any
prouince
,
of
all
the
mentioned
vast
circuit
,
for
howsoeuer
Burchardus
about
320.
yeares
agoe
,
hath
left
recorded
of
those
parts
of
Asia
,
that
there
were
to
be
found
in
them
30.
Christians
for
one
Mahumetan
.
Descr.
ter.
sanct.
pa.
2.
c.
2.
§.
9.
yet
certainely
,
that
in
these
present
times
the
excesse
of
multitude
is
growne
great
on
the
Mahumetans
side
in
respect
of
Christians
,
the
experience
of
many
putteth
out
of
question
.
And
,
if
wee
shall
proceed
yet
farther
eastward
,
in
the
inland
parts
of
Asia
,
and
passe
in
our
speculation
,
beyond
the
mountaine
Imaus
,
euen
there
also
sundry
prouinces
are
obserued
,
as
[
](A16718-e25510-b)*
*
Paul
.
Venet.
l.
1.
c.
41.42.43
.
Peim
,
Cotam
,
Lop
,
where
Mahumetans
are
the
maine
and
sole
inhabitants
,
and
many
more
,
as
[
](A16718-e25530-b)*
*
Id.
l.
1.
ca.
38.40.47.62.63.64
.
&c.
Cassar
,
Carcham
,
Chinchintilus
,
Tanguth
,
Ergimul
,
Cerguth
,
Tenduc
,
&c.
where
they
are
mingled
among
idolaters
,
which
may
for
a
great
part
,
counteruaile
those
regions
of
Asia
,
which
Christians
and
Idolaters
take
vp
on
this
side
that
mountaine
.
So
that
,
in
my
estimation
,
hauing
about
these
points
conferred
history
with
Geography
in
the
most
circumspect
&
considerate
manner
that
I
was
able
,
about
nine
parts
of
20.
of
Asia
,
are
possessed
by
Mahumetans
.
Thus
then
is
Mahumetanisme
spread
ouer
the
one
halfe
almost
of
the
firme
land
of
Asia
.
And
yet
moreouer
in
the
Ilands
also
that
are
about
Asia
,
that
religion
hath
found
large
intertainment
.
For
not
onely
a
good
part
of
the
small
[
](A16718-e25570-b)*
*
Nicol.
de
con●i
.
Viag
nelle
Indie
.
Ba●bos
.
●p.
Ramus
.
Vol.
1.
de
Viaggi
.
p
:
313
▪
318.319
.
Boter
.
Relat
p.
3.
l.
2
de
Mahometani
,
Isles
of
Maldiuia
,
namely
those
of
them
that
are
inhabited
,
(
for
they
are
aboue
7000.
in
all
,
and
most
without
habitation
)
are
possessed
with
Mahumetans
,
but
moreouer
,
all
the
ports
of
the
Isle
of
Ceilan
,
(
except
Colombo
which
the
Portugalls
haue
)
the
Sea
coasts
of
Sumatra
,
the
ports
of
Iaua
,
with
the
Isle
of
Sunda
,
the
ports
of
Banda
,
of
Bornéo
and
of
Gilolo
,
with
some
of
the
ilands
Malucos
,
are
in
the
hands
of
Mahumetans
.
Of
the
great
spreading
&
inlargement
of
which
religion
,
if
the
causes
were
demanded
of
mee
,
I
should
make
answere
,
that
beside
the
iustice
of
almighty
God
,
punishing
by
that
violent
and
wicked
sect
,
the
sinnes
of
Christians
(
for
we
see
that
by
the
conquests
of
the
Arabians
,
and
Turks
,
it
hath
cheefly
seased
on
those
regions
,
where
Christianity
in
ancient
time
most
flourished
,
both
in
Afrique
and
Asia
,
and
partly
in
Europe
)
one
cause
J
say
,
of
the
large
spreading
of
their
Religion
,
is
the
large
spreading
of
their
victories
.
For
it
hath
euer
beene
the
condition
of
the
conquered
,
to
follow
for
the
most
part
the
religion
of
the
conquerors
.
A
second
,
their
peremptory
restraint
,
(
euen
on
the
paine
of
death
)
of
all
disputation
touching
their
religion
,
and
calling
any
point
of
it
into
question
.
A
third
,
their
suppression
of
the
studie
of
Philosophy
,
by
the
light
whereof
,
the
grosnesse
and
vanity
of
many
parts
of
their
religion
might
bee
discouered
,
which
is
inhibited
to
bee
taught
in
their
vniuersities
,
and
so
hath
beene
,
about
these
400.
yeares
,
whereas
till
then
,
it
greatly
flourished
among
them
,
in
Cordoua
,
in
Fess
,
in
Maroccho
,
in
Bagded
,
and
other
cities
.
And
yet
,
as
Bellonius
and
[
](A16718-e25740-b)*
*
Bellon
.
Obser
.
l.
3.
c.
30.
Georgeuitz
.
l.
2.
de
Ritib
.
Turcar.
cap.
de
Scholis
.
others
write
,
the
Turkes
fall
now
againe
,
to
those
studies
afresh
.
A
fourth
cause
may
well
bee
assigned
,
the
sensuall
liberty
allowed
by
it
,
namely
,
to
haue
many
wiues
,
and
the
like
promise
of
sensual
pleasures
,
to
succeed
after
this
life
(
to
the
Religious
obseruers
of
it
,
)
in
Paradise
,
wherewith
men
for
the
greatest
part
,
as
being
of
things
wherewith
their
sense
is
affected
,
&
whereof
they
haue
had
certaine
experience
,
are
more
allured
and
perswaded
,
then
with
promises
of
spiritual
delights
,
presented
only
to
their
hopes
,
and
for
which
present
and
sensible
pleasures
must
in
the
meane
time
be
forsaken
.
Of
the
sundrie
regions
of
the
world
inhabited
by
Idolaters
.
CHAP.
XII
.
NOW
touching
Idolaters
,
they
possesse
in
Europe
,
a
region
as
I
before
obserued
,
about
900.
miles
in
circuit
,
(
although
the
ordinary
Geographical
charts
represent
it
,
(
but
falslie
)
more
then
twise
so
large
)
containing
Lappia
,
Corelia
,
Biarmia
,
Scricfinia
,
and
the
north
part
of
Finmarch
.
All
which
together
,
may
by
estimation
make
about
one
sixtieth
part
of
Europe
,
or
a
little
more
,
more
I
meane
in
magnitude
rather
then
in
multitude
,
for
it
is
indeed
a
little
greater
then
so
.
Beside
which
prouinces
,
there
are
also
to
bee
found
in
diuers
places
of
[
](A16718-e25810-b)*
*
Beem
.
de
Morib
.
gent.
l.
3.
c.
7.
Boter
.
Relat.
p.
●
l.
1.
c.
Litunia
Lituania
,
and
Samagotia
,
some
scattered
remnants
of
Idolaters
.
But
in
Afrique
their
multitude
is
very
great
,
for
from
C.
Blanco
on
the
coast
of
Libya
,
the
most
westerly
point
of
all
Afrique
(
being
about
the
north
latitude
of
twenty
degrees
)
euen
al
the
coast
of
Afrique
southward
,
to
the
cape
of
Buena
Esperanza
:
And
thence
turning
by
the
backe
of
Afrique
as
farre
as
the
cape
of
Mozambique
,
beeing
(
ouer
against
the
middest
of
Madagascar
)
in
the
south
latitude
of
fifteene
degrees
:
all
this
coast
I
say
,
beeing
not
much
lesse
,
then
halfe
the
circumference
of
Afrique
,
is
inhabited
by
Idolaters
.
Onely
,
on
the
East
side
,
from
Mozambique
to
Cape
de
Corrientes
(
which
is
the
south
latitude
of
24
degrees
)
they
are
mingled
with
Mahumetans
:
And
on
the
west
side
,
in
the
kingdome
of
Congo
,
and
the
north
part
of
Angola
,
with
Christians
:
But
yet
in
both
these
places
of
their
mixture
,
idolaters
are
the
greater
multitude
.
But
now
,
if
wee
consider
the
inland
Region
of
Afrique
,
all
betweene
the
riuer
Nilus
,
and
the
West
sea
of
Aethiopia
,
from
about
the
north
parallel
of
tenne
degrees
,
to
the
south
parallel
of
6.
or
7.
degrees
,
but
from
that
parallel
of
6.
or
7.
degrees
,
euen
all
Aethiopia
southward
,
on
both
the
sides
of
Nilus
,
from
the
east
sea
of
Aethiopia
,
to
the
West
,
euen
to
the
most
southerly
point
of
all
Afrique
,
the
cape
of
Buona
Speranza
,
is
possessed
by
idolaters
:
excepting
onely
some
part
of
Congo
and
Angola
afore
mentioned
,
toward
the
west
sea
,
inhabited
by
Christians
,
and
the
vtmost
shore
of
the
East
sea
,
from
Mozambique
northward
,
which
is
replenished
with
Mahumetans
:
And
yet
,
beside
all
the
regions
before
mentioned
,
euen
all
the
kingdome
of
[
](A16718-e26050-b)*
*
Leo
African
.
l.
7.
ca.
de
Borno
Regno
.
Borno
,
and
a
great
part
[
](A16718-e26070-b)*
*
Aluarez
.
hist.
Aethiop
.
c.
30.
of
Nubia
is
possessed
by
them
;
to
speake
nothing
of
the
infinite
multitudes
of
the
[
](A16718-e26090-b)*
*
Leo
Afric
.
l.
1.
c.
de
vitij●
Afror
.
ancient
Africans
,
dispersed
in
sundry
tracts
of
Barbary
,
of
Biled-elgerid
,
and
of
Libya
Deserta
,
which
still
continue
in
their
ancient
paganisme
.
So
that
(
ouer
and
beside
these
last
)
very
neere
abouth
halfe
Afrique
,
is
possessed
by
idolaters
.
And
yet
in
Asia
idolaters
abound
more
then
in
Afrique
,
euen
as
Asia
is
larger
then
Afrique
for
the
continent
,
and
for
the
people
,
beter
inhabited
,
for
of
Asia
also
,
very
neere
about
the
one
halfe
,
or
rather
a
little
more
is
possessed
by
idolaters
.
For
first
if
wee
consider
the
maritime
parts
,
all
from
the
riuer
of
Pechora
,
Eastward
to
the
Ocean
,
and
then
turning
downeward
,
to
the
most
southerly
point
of
India
,
(
and
of
all
Asia
)
the
cape
of
Cincapura
,
and
from
that
point
returning
westward
,
by
the
south
coast
,
to
the
outlets
of
the
riuer
Indus
,
al
that
maritime
tract
I
say
,
is
entirely
possessed
by
idolaters
.
Sauing
onely
,
that
in
the
neerer
part
of
India
,
betweene
Indus
and
Ganges
,
there
is
among
them
some
mixture
both
of
Mahumetans
and
Christians
:
and
in
the
further
part
,
the
city
and
territory
of
Malacca
,
is
held
by
Portugalls
,
and
some
part
of
the
sea
coast
of
the
kingdome
of
Siam
,
by
Moores
.
So
that
by
this
account
,
a
good
deale
more
then
halfe
the
circumference
of
Asia
,
is
possessed
by
Idolaters
.
And
,
although
in
the
inland
parts
their
proportion
bee
somewhat
lesse
,
then
in
the
Maritime
,
yet
if
we
consider
well
,
the
whole
dimension
of
Asia
,
we
shall
find
by
good
estimation
,
as
before
I
said
,
that
the
one
halfe
,
or
rather
a
little
more
,
is
replenished
with
Idolaters
:
for
the
better
declaring
of
which
point
,
you
may
vnderstand
,
that
as
Strabo
and
Ptolomie
,
haue
obserued
,
of
the
mountaine
Taurus
,
Strab.
l.
2.
Ptolem
in
Tab.
Orb.
general
.
that
beginning
in
the
west
parts
of
Asia
(
in
the
confines
of
Lycia
and
Pamphilia
ouer
against
the
Chelidonian
isles
)
it
runneth
Eastward
e●en
to
the
Ocean
,
keeping
between
the
parallels
of
30.
and
40.
degrees
,
and
so
deuiding
the
north
part
of
Asia
from
the
south
.
Euen
so
must
we
obserue
of
the
mountaine
[
](A16718-e26290-b)*
*
Vid.
Ptolem.
in
Tab.
o●bis
.
●niuer
.
et
Mercator
in
Tab.
general●
Asiae
.
Imaus
that
beginning
on
the
shoare
of
the
north
Ocean
,
it
runneth
along
through
the
middest
of
Asia
to
the
south
,
keeping
still
about
the
same
meridian
,
namely
about
the
longitude
of
30.
degrees
,
and
crossing
(
at
right
angles
in
a
manner
)
the
mountaine
Taurus
deuideth
the
east
part
of
Asia
from
the
west
.
Imaus
therfore
in
this
sort
diuiding
Asia
into
two
parts
,
not
much
vnequall
,
diuideth
also
in
a
manner
,
between
the
idolaters
&
Mahumetans
of
Asia
,
for
although
the
hether
part
of
Asia
,
west
of
Imaus
,
and
possessed
of
Mahumetans
,
take
vp
more
in
the
longitude
of
the
earth
,
namely
east
and
west
:
yet
the
further
part
east
of
Imaus
,
spreadeth
more
in
latitude
,
north
and
south
,
which
may
make
some
recompence
toward
that
excesse
.
But
,
if
withall
we
subtract
those
parts
of
the
hether
Asia
,
that
are
couered
with
the
Persian
,
and
Caspian
seas
,
beside
large
parts
of
the
Euxine
&
Mediterrane
,
the
further
Asia
(
I
thinke
)
will
fully
equall
it
.
Now
,
although
many
Mahumetans
bee
also
found
on
the
other
side
of
Imaus
toward
the
northeast
of
Asia
,
both
seuerall
in
sundry
prouinces
,
and
otherwise
mingled
with
idolaters
or
Christians
,
or
with
both
,
as
before
was
partly
obserued
:
Yet
many
more
whole
regions
of
Idolaters
,
(
to
counteruaile
those
Mahumetans
)
are
found
on
this
side
Imaus
,
both
,
toward
the
South
,
in
the
Kingdomes
of
the
nearer
India
,
and
toward
the
North
,
betwixt
Imaus
and
the
riuer
Pechora
,
all
which
coast
of
Asia
is
inhabited
by
Idolaters
,
And
lastly
,
in
the
middest
betwixt
both
,
the
Kirgessi
,
and
some
other
of
their
neighbour
Nations
.
And
not
onely
in
the
firme
land
of
Asia
,
is
idolatry
thus
spred
:
but
in
those
many
thousand
Ilands
that
lie
dispersed
in
the
vast
Ocean
,
on
the
East
and
Southeast
parts
of
Asia
:
[
](A16718-e26490-b)*
*
Paul
.
Ven.
l.
3.
c
8.
Id
,
l.
3.
cap.
42.
which
ouer
against
China
,
are
recorded
vpon
the
report
of
Mariners
,
long
practised
in
those
seas
,
to
be
7448
,
and
,
about
[
](A16718-e26510-b)*
*
Paul
.
Ven.
l.
3.
c
8.
Id
,
l.
3.
cap.
42.
India
,
to
be
127000
:
And
which
might
for
their
largenesse
,
if
they
were
all
layed
together
,
make
a
Continent
as
large
as
three
foure
parts
of
Europe
.
In
those
Islands
I
say
,
Idolatrie
ouerspreaddeth
all
,
excepting
onely
those
few
,
which
I
before
obserued
,
to
be
possessed
by
the
Spanyards
,
and
by
the
Arabians
.
Finally
,
of
all
other
parts
of
the
Earth
yet
discouered
,
Idolatry
spreadeth
farthest
in
America
,
which
being
but
little
lesse
,
then
the
Easterne
continent
,
(
that
we
terme
the
old
world
)
is
at
least
six
parts
of
seuen
,
inhabited
with
heathenish
and
idolatrous
people
.
For
,
except
the
regions
aboue
mentioned
,
possessed
namely
by
the
Portugalles
and
Castilians
,
(
and
yet
the
inner
,
and
wilder
tracts
euen
of
those
,
remaine
still
for
a
great
part
,
in
their
ancient
paganisme
)
and
many
notwithstanding
their
baptisme
,
Th●a
Ies
de
Con.
ge●t
.
l.
●
.
c.
1.
withal
worship
Idols
together
with
some
later
Conuerts
made
in
the
region
about
&
aboue
the
Bay
of
California
,
of
whom
as
yet
,
histories
make
so
little
report
,
that
of
their
number
I
can
make
no
estimate
:
And
lastly
2
,
or
3
fortresses
,
held
by
the
Spanyards
,
on
the
coast
of
Florida
,
with
the
English
colonies
in
Virginia
,
and
the
French
in
Canada
,
these
I
say
being
excepted
,
all
the
rest
of
America
,
being
as
I
sayd
about
six
seuenth
parts
remaineth
in
their
olde
Idolatry
.
And
thus
haue
I
declared
the
three
principall
sects
as
touching
Religion
,
that
are
at
this
present
found
in
the
seuerall
parts
of
the
world
,
with
their
particular
regions
.
But
beside
these
,
obserued
there
are
,
two
or
three
irregular
Nations
,
being
,
for
their
religion
mingled
as
it
were
,
of
some
of
the
former
sects
.
As
first
,
in
Asia
,
the
Cardi
,
inhabiting
in
the
Mountainous
Country
aboue
Mozal
,
betweene
Armenia
,
and
Mesopotamia
.
Secondly
the
Drusi
,
dwelling
in
Syria
,
about
the
skirts
of
Libanus
,
the
religion
of
both
which
Nations
,
(
such
as
it
is
)
partaketh
somewhat
,
both
of
Mahumetanisme
and
Christianitie
.
And
thirdly
,
the
Morduites
in
Europe
,
possessing
the
middle
confines
betwixt
the
Precopite
Tartars
,
and
the
Muscouites
,
that
are
in
a
manner
as
touching
their
religion
,
mingled
of
all
three
sects
:
for
they
are
both
baptised
like
Christians
,
and
circumcised
like
Mahumetans
,
and
withall
worship
Idols
.
Of
the
Iewes
dispersed
in
seuerall
parts
of
the
World
.
CHAP.
XIII
.
NOw
,
will
I
intreat
a
little
,
of
the
Professours
of
the
fourth
sort
and
sect
of
religion
,
that
is
founde
in
the
world
,
namely
of
Iudaisme
,
for
,
although
the
Iewes
haue
not
for
their
mansion
,
any
peculiar
Country
,
but
are
dispersed
abroad
among
forrayne
Nations
,
for
their
ancient
Idolatries
,
and
their
later
vnthankfulnesse
,
in
reiecting
their
Sauiour
the
sonne
of
God
:
So
that
euen
in
Ierusalem
,
there
be
not
to
bee
found
at
this
time
,
an
hundred
housholds
of
Iewes
:
Boter
.
Relat
▪
pa.
●
.
l.
2.
c.
de
Gindei
.
(
Onely
of
all
the
townes
of
Palestina
,
Tiberias
(
which
Amurath
the
great
Turke
gaue
to
Aluarez
Mendez
a
Iew
)
and
Staff●letto
,
are
somewhat
peopled
with
them
)
Neither
haue
they
at
this
present
,
for
any
thing
that
is
certainly
knowen
,
any
other
region
in
the
world
,
seuerall
to
themselues
:
Yet
,
because
there
be
some
prouinces
,
wherein
they
are
obserued
specially
to
abound
,
as
others
also
,
whence
they
are
excluded
and
banished
,
I
will
consider
a
little
of
their
present
condition
.
The
first
Country
of
Christendome
,
whence
the
Iewes
were
expelled
,
with
out
hope
of
returne
,
was
our
Country
of
England
,
whence
they
were
banished
,
Anno
1290
by
King
Edward
the
first
.
Not
long
after
they
were
likewise
banished
France
An.
1307.
by
Philippus
Pulcher
:
Onely
of
all
the
Countryes
of
France
,
in
the
Iurisdiction
of
Auignon
(
the
Popes
state
)
some
are
remaining
.
Out
of
Spaine
,
An.
1492
,
by
Ferdinand
,
and
shortly
after
out
of
Portugall
,
An
,
1497
by
Emanuel
.
Out
of
the
Kingdome
of
Naples
and
Sicilie
,
An.
1539.
by
Charles
the
5.
In
other
regions
of
Europe
they
are
found
,
and
in
some
of
them
in
great
numbers
,
as
in
Germanie
,
Bohem
,
Polonia
,
Lituania
,
Russia
,
and
part
of
Italie
,
specially
Venice
and
Rome
.
In
Greece
also
a
great
multitude
,
wherein
two
Citties
(
beside
all
them
of
other
places
)
Constantinople
and
Thessalonica
are
esteemed
to
be
about
160000
Iewes
.
As
also
they
are
to
be
found
by
plentifull
numbers
,
in
many
parts
of
the
Turks
dominion
,
both
in
Asia
,
and
Afrique
.
And
for
Asia
,
specially
in
Aleppo
,
in
Tripoli
,
in
Damascus
,
in
Rhodes
,
and
almost
in
euery
City
of
great
trade
and
traffique
in
the
Turk●sh
Empire
:
As
likewise
in
diuers
parts
of
the
Persian
gouernment
,
in
Arabia
also
,
&
lastly
in
India
,
(
namely
about
Cranganor
)
and
in
some
other
more
remote
regions
.
And
,
to
come
to
Afrique
,
they
are
not
only
foundin
the
Cities
of
Alexandria
,
and
Cair
in
Aegypt
,
but
,
as
in
many
other
regions
&
places
of
Afrique
,
so
principally
,
in
the
Cities
of
Fess
,
and
Tremisen
:
and
specially
,
in
the
Hilles
of
Sensaua
,
and
Demen
in
the
Kingdome
of
Maroccho
many
of
which
last
,
are
by
Leo
Africanus
,
specially
noted
to
be
of
that
Sect
,
Leo
African
.
l.
2.
c.
36.
&c.
which
the
Iewes
name
[
](A16718-e27470-b)*
*
For
of
the
Iewes
,
as
touching
their
religion
,
there
bee
in
these
times
three
fects
.
The
first
which
is
the
greatest
of
them
,
is
named
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
who
beside
the
holy
scriptures
,
imbrace
the
Talmud
also
for
Authenticall
,
and
for
that
cause
,
they
are
also
termed
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
.
The
second
are
called
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
which
receiue
onely
the
scriptures
.
And
the
Third
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
that
is
,
the
Samaritans
(
at
this
day
but
very
few
)
which
,
of
all
the
holy
Scriptures
,
admit
onely
the
Pentateuch
or
bookes
of
Moses
.
Karraim
,
and
by
the
other
Iewes
of
Afrique
,
are
reputed
no
better
then
heretiques
.
But
yet
,
beside
these
,
and
such
like
dispersions
of
the
Iewish
Nation
,
that
may
be
elsewhere
in
the
world
,
there
is
a
phantasie
of
many
learned
men
,
not
vnwoorthy
some
diligent
consideration
,
that
the
Tartars
of
Scythia
,
who
about
the
yeare
1200
,
or
a
little
before
,
became
first
knowen
abroad
in
the
world
by
that
name
,
and
hold
at
this
day
a
great
part
of
Asia
,
in
subiection
;
That
those
Tartars
I
say
,
are
of
the
[
](A16718-e27650-b)*
*
Postell
.
Descript.
Syriae
.
cap.
1.
Genebrad
.
Chron.
l.
1.
Bote●
Relat.
pa.
1.
l.
2.
c.
vl●ima
parte
della
Tartaria
&
pa.
3.
l.
2.
c.
de
Gindei
.
Israelites
progeny
:
Namely
of
the
ten
Tribes
,
which
by
Salmanazar
,
and
some
of
his
predecessours
,
were
carried
captiue
into
Assyria
.
Which
although
it
be
as
I
said
no
other
then
a
vain
and
cappriccious
phantasie
,
yet
,
hath
it
,
not
onely
found
acceptance
and
entertainement
,
with
sundrie
learned
and
vnderstanding
men
:
but
reason
and
authority
are
produced
,
or
pretended
to
establish
it
for
a
truth
.
For
first
,
It
is
alleaged
that
the
word
Tatari
,
or
Totari
,
(
for
so
indeed
they
are
rightly
called
,
as
[
](A16718-e27740-b)*
*
Leunclau
.
in
Pandect.
Hist.
Turcic
.
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
Heb.
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
Syr.
learned
men
obserue
,
and
not
Tartari
)
signifieth
in
the
Syriaque
and
Hebrew
tongues
,
a
Residue
or
Remainder
such
as
these
Tartars
are
supposed
to
bee
of
the
Ten
Tribes
.
Secondly
,
because
,
(
as
the
Patrons
of
this
phantasie
say
)
they
haue
alwaies
embraced
(
the
ancient
character
of
Iudaisme
)
Circumcision
.
And
thirdly
,
2
Esdras
13.
v.
41.42.43.44.45
.
the
authority
of
supposed
Esdras
,
(
the
very
spring
I
take
it
,
whence
hath
flowed
this
streame
of
opinion
)
is
alleaged
.
Namely
,
that
the
Tenne
Tribes
tooke
this
course
to
themselues
,
that
they
would
leaue
the
multitude
of
the
heathen
,
and
goe
foorth
into
a
farther
Country
,
where
neuer
mankinde
dwelt
.
That
they
might
there
keepe
their
statutes
,
which
they
neuer
kept
in
their
owne
land
.
And
that
they
entred
in
at
the
narrow
passages
of
the
Riuer
Euphrates
.
The
most
high
shewing
them
signes
,
and
staying
the
Springs
of
the
floud
,
till
they
were
passed
ouer
.
And
,
that
their
Iourney
was
great
,
euen
of
a
yeare
and
a
halfe
,
and
the
region
is
called
Arsareth
.
But
,
to
the
first
of
these
arguments
,
I
may
answere
,
that
the
Tartars
obtained
that
name
,
neither
from
Hebrew
nor
Syriaque
originall
,
and
appellation
,
but
,
from
the
riuer
Tartar
,
saith
Leunclauius
,
Leunclau
.
in
Pand.
histor.
Turcic
.
§.
3.
and
[
](A16718-e27940-b)*
*
Boem
.
de
Morib
gent.
l.
2.
c.
10.
Haitti
.
lib.
de
Tartaris
.
cap.
16.
others
.
Or
else
from
the
Region
,
as
sayth
Haitho
,
where
the
principall
of
them
anciently
dwelled
.
Secondly
,
that
the
name
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
or
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
in
the
Hebrew
,
or
Syriaque
signification
,
importing
a
residue
or
remainder
,
can
but
full
ill
(
as
it
seemes
)
be
applied
to
the
Tartars
in
relation
of
the
Israelites
,
whom
they
exceedingly
surpasse
in
multitude
,
as
ouerspreading
halfe
the
vast
continent
of
Asia
,
or
thereabout
.
For
all
the
Nations
of
Asia
,
from
the
great
riuers
of
Wolgha
and
Oby
,
Eastward
,
and
from
the
Caspian
sea
,
the
riuer
Oxus
,
the
Countryes
of
India
and
China
,
northward
,
are
contained
vnder
the
Appellation
of
Tartars
:
and
yet
without
these
bounds
many
Tartars
there
are
,
both
toward
the
West
,
and
South
.
And
what
if
the
innumerable
people
of
so
many
Nations
,
as
are
knowen
to
inhabite
and
ouerspread
the
huge
continent
of
America
,
be
also
of
the
same
of-spring
?
Certainely
,
if
I
bee
not
greatly
deceiued
,
they
are
no
other
.
For
first
that
their
originall
must
bee
deriued
from
Asia
is
apparent
,
because
,
(
as
he
that
readeth
the
relations
and
histories
of
those
Countryes
of
America
may
easily
obserue
)
they
haue
no
rellish
nor
resemblance
at
all
,
of
the
Arts
,
or
learning
,
or
ciuility
of
Europe
:
And
their
colour
testifieth
,
they
are
not
of
the
Africans
progenie
(
there
being
not
found
in
all
that
large
Continent
,
any
blacke
men
,
except
a
few
about
the
Riuer
of
S.
Martha
,
in
a
small
Countrey
called
Quarequa
,
which
by
force
and
violence
of
some
tempest
,
are
supposed
to
haue
beene
transported
thether
,
from
the
parts
of
Guinie
or
Aethiopia
.
)
Therfore
it
seemeth
,
that
they
had
their
originall
from
Asia
.
Which
yet
,
will
appeare
more
credible
,
if
it
be
obserued
,
which
by
the
Spanyards
discoueries
is
well
knowen
to
be
true
,
namely
,
that
the
West
side
of
America
respecting
Asia
,
is
exceeding
much
better
peopled
then
the
opposite
or
East
side
,
that
respecteth
toward
Europe
.
And
,
as
for
these
reasons
it
is
very
likely
,
that
America
receiued
her
first
inhabitants
,
from
the
East
border
of
Asia
:
So
is
it
altogether
vnlike
,
that
is
receiued
them
from
any
other
part
of
all
that
border
,
saue
from
Tartarie
.
Because
,
in
America
there
is
not
to
be
discerned
,
any
token
or
indication
at
all
,
of
the
arts
or
industry
of
China
,
or
India
,
or
Cataia
,
or
any
other
ciuill
region
,
along
all
that
border
of
Asia
:
But
in
their
grosse
ignorance
of
letters
,
and
of
arts
,
in
their
Idolatrie
,
and
the
specialties
of
it
,
in
their
inciuilitie
,
and
many
barbarous
properties
,
they
resemble
the
olde
and
rude
Tartars
,
aboue
all
the
nations
of
the
Earth
.
Which
opinion
of
mine
,
touching
the
Americans
descending
from
the
Tartars
,
rather
then
from
any
other
nation
in
that
border
of
Asia
,
after
the
neere
vicinitie
of
Asia
to
America
,
this
reason
aboue
all
other
,
may
best
establish
and
perswade
:
Because
it
is
certaine
,
that
that
Northeast
part
of
Asia
possessed
by
the
Tartars
,
is
if
not
continent
with
the
West
side
of
America
,
which
yet
remaineth
somewhat
doubtfull
:
yet
certainely
,
and
without
all
doubt
,
it
is
the
least
disioyned
by
sea
,
of
all
that
coast
of
Asia
,
for
that
those
parts
of
Asia
and
America
,
are
continent
one
with
the
other
,
or
at
most
,
disioyned
but
by
some
narrow
channell
of
the
Ocean
,
the
rauenous
and
harmefull
beasts
,
wherewith
America
is
stored
,
as
Beares
,
Lions
,
Tigers
,
Wolues
,
Foxes
,
&c.
(
which
men
as
is
likely
,
would
neuer
to
their
owne
harme
transporte
out
of
the
one
continent
to
the
other
)
may
import
.
For
from
Noahs
Arke
,
which
rested
after
the
deluge
,
in
Asia
,
all
those
beasts
must
of
necessitie
fetch
their
beginning
,
seeing
they
could
not
proceede
by
the
course
of
nature
,
as
the
vnperfect
sort
of
liuing
creatures
doe
,
of
Putrefaction
:
or
if
they
might
haue
Putrefaction
for
their
parentage
,
or
receaue
their
originall
(
by
any
other
new
sort
of
generation
)
of
the
earth
without
special
procreation
of
their
owne
kinde
,
then
I
see
no
nececessitie
,
why
they
should
by
Gods
speciall
appointment
,
be
so
carefully
preserued
in
Noahs
Arke
(
as
they
were
)
in
time
of
the
deluge
.
Wherefore
,
seeing
it
is
certaine
,
that
those
rauenous
beasts
of
America
,
are
the
progenie
of
those
of
the
same
kinde
in
Asia
,
and
that
men
,
as
is
likely
,
conueighed
them
not
(
to
their
owne
preiudice
)
from
the
one
continent
to
the
other
,
it
carrieth
a
great
likelihood
and
appearance
of
truth
,
that
if
they
ioine
not
together
,
yet
are
they
neer
neighbours
,
&
but
little
disioyned
each
from
other
,
for
euen
to
this
day
,
in
the
Isles
of
Cuba
,
Iamaica
,
Hispaniola
,
Burichena
,
and
all
the
rest
,
which
are
so
farre
remoued
from
the
firme
land
,
that
these
beasts
cannot
swimme
from
it
to
them
,
the
Spanyards
record
,
Ioseph
Acosta
De
N●tur
.
Nou
Orb.
l.
1.
c.
21.
that
none
of
these
are
found
.
Wherefore
it
seemeth
(
to
digresse
no
farther
)
that
the
nation
of
the
Tartarians
,
spreading
so
exceeding
farre
,
as
it
doth
,
cannot
certainely
be
the
posteritie
of
those
captiue
Israelites
.
Neither
(
to
answer
the
second
obiection
)
doth
their
circumcision
in
any
sort
inforce
it
:
for
,
neither
was
circumcision
,
among
the
Tartars
ancienter
then
Mahumetanisme
,
but
was
receaued
among
them
together
with
it
,
as
Michouius
hath
remembred
,
Michou
.
de
Sa●matia
.
l.
1.
●
.
●
.
so
that
to
this
day
,
it
is
not
intertained
(
for
ought
I
can
finde
in
Historie
)
among
those
Tartarians
,
which
haue
not
receaued
Mahumetanisme
,
but
remaine
in
their
auncient
Idolatrie
,
as
for
the
most
part
,
both
the
Tartars
of
Cataia
,
beyond
the
mountaine
Imaus
towards
the
East
Ocean
,
and
the
Tartars
of
Sarmatia
,
towards
the
North
,
on
both
sides
the
riuer
of
Oby
,
do
.
Neither
if
it
should
be
graunted
,
that
circumcision
had
beene
auncienter
among
them
then
Mahumetanisme
,
were
that
an
argument
of
anie
importance
,
to
prooue
them
to
bee
of
the
Israelites
progenie
.
Because
it
is
certainely
knowen
,
tha●
the
ceremony
&
custome
of
circumcision
hath
beene
&
stil
is
vsual
among
many
nations
,
of
whom
there
was
neuer
any
suspition
,
that
they
descended
from
the
Israelites
,
Diodor.
Sic●●●
part
2
c.
1
Philo.
Iudae
▪
l.
de
C●●umcisione
.
Strab.
l.
16.
Herodot
.
l.
2.
parum
.
a
Med.
Strab.
l.
16.
long
.
post
med.
for
Diodorus
hath
recorded
of
the
Colchians
,
Philo
Iudaeus
,
and
Strabo
,
of
the
Aegyptians
,
Herodotus
of
both
those
nations
,
and
of
the
Aethiopians
besides
,
that
they
vsed
circumcision
,
and
that
that
custome
among
the
Aegyptians
and
Aethiopians
,
did
seeme
very
auncient
,
euen
as
it
is
also
by
both
those
nations
retained
till
this
day
.
And
yet
,
beside
these
countries
already
mentioned
,
the
like
is
also
recorded
of
the
Troglodites
by
Strabo
,
and
by
[
](A16718-e28850-b)*
*
Diodor.
Sic.
l
3.
c.
3.
Agatharchid
.
l
de
Mar.
Rubr.
c.
49.
ap.
Phot.
in
Bibliotheca
Cyprian
.
l.
de
circumcision
.
in
principio
.
Niceph.
Callist.
l.
8.
ca.
35.
Ierem
9.26
.
Hieron
in
Comment
locitam
citati
.
others
:
Of
the
Phaenicians
,
and
Arabians
,
by
Cyprian
and
Nicephorus
.
And
(
to
leaue
this
accumulating
of
humane
testimonies
)
it
is
not
obscurely
acknowledged
by
the
Prophet
Ieremie
,
to
haue
beene
vsuall
(
beside
the
Israelites
)
with
the
Aegyptians
,
Edomites
,
Ammonites
,
Moabites
,
&
the
inhabitants
of
the
desert
,
that
is
the
[
](A16718-e28950-b)*
*
For
,
that
the
Ismaelites
and
Sarracens
are
the
same
nation
,
is
manifest
by
Hierome
,
and
Sozomen
,
and
others
,
which
being
anciently
termed
Scenitae
(
as
Ammianus
hath
obserued
)
namely
of
the
Graecians
,
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
,
because
they
dwelled
in
tents
(
for
such
to
bee
the
manner
of
their
habitation
,
is
not
onely
affirmed
by
[
](A16718-e29040-b)*
*
Loco
iam
citato
.
Hierome
,
but
signified
(
and
not
obscurely
)
by
[
](A16718-e29060-b)*
*
Psalm
.
120.5
.
vid.
etiam
Ierem.
49.28.29
.
Dauid
lamenting
his
dwelling
in
the
tents
of
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
by
which
name
Arabia
deserta
is
termed
in
the
Hebre●
)
were
of
their
dwelling
in
the
desert
,
by
the
Arabians
themselues
named
Sarracens
(
for
Sarra
signifieth
,
a
desert
,
and
Sakan
to
inhabite
,
in
the
Arabique
tongue
)
or
else
,
if
not
of
their
place
,
yet
at
least
(
as
[
](A16718-e29160-b)*
*
Scaliger
in
Animadu
.
Euseb.
pa.
17.
An.
88.
Fuller
.
Miscel●an
.
Theolog.
l.
2.
ca.
1●
.
learned
men
certainly
thinke
)
of
their
property
,
they
might
obtaine
that
name
of
Sarracens
,
namely
,
because
they
liued
much
by
rapine
(
for
that
the
word
Saracke
in
Arabique
doth
import
)
to
which
aboue
all
nations
they
euer
were
,
and
still
are
addicted
.
For
the
deduction
of
the
name
Sarracens
,
from
[
](A16718-e29230-b)*
*
By
Sozomen
●
.
6.
ca.
38.
Sara
,
as
if
they
claimed
descent
from
hir
,
being
indeede
Hagarens
,
(
the
progenie
of
Hagar
)
is
a
meere
fancie
and
fable
.
They
claime
it
not
.
Ismaelites
,
or
Sarracens
of
Arabia
:
Of
which
nations
,
Hierome
also
(
to
whom
those
regions
were
well
knowen
,
(
as
Epiphanius
also
of
the
most
of
them
)
hath
left
testified
,
that
they
retained
circumcision
,
Hieron
.
Comment.
in
sa●
.
ca.
21.
Sozomen
.
Histor.
l.
6.
c.
38.
Ammian
.
l.
22.
post
med.
euen
in
his
time
.
Touching
some
of
which
,
although
it
may
be
probablie
coniectured
,
that
they
receaued
it
(
in
som
sort
)
from
the
Israelites
:
if
not
as
their
progenie
(
which
yet
in
some
sense
may
be
said
of
the
inhabitants
of
the
desert
,
being
the
posteritie
of
Ismael
the
son
of
Abraham
:
and
likewise
of
the
Edomites
,
being
the
seed
of
Esau
the
sonne
of
Isaac
)
yet
at
least
,
by
imitation
of
Abrahams
familie
,
to
whom
also
in
blood
they
were
allied
,
as
the
Ammonites
&
Moabites
,
the
posteritie
of
Lot
,
Abrahams
brothers
son
,
and
who
had
liued
long
in
his
familiarity
and
family
.
Although
I
say
of
these
nations
it
may
bee
coniectured
,
that
their
ceremonie
of
circumcision
was
taken
vp
,
by
imitation
of
the
Israelites
:
yet
that
the
same
rite
,
or
custome
was
also
deriued
originally
,
from
them
to
the
whole
nation
of
the
Arabians
(
which
was
exceeding
great
)
or
to
the
Aegyptians
,
or
other
neighbouring
prouinces
,
I
know
not
why
anie
should
conceaue
,
or
if
they
doe
,
yet
appeareth
it
to
bee
otherwise
,
because
they
circumcised
not
in
the
eight
day
,
which
is
the
inuiolable
custome
of
the
Israelites
:
Ambros.
l.
2.
de
Abraham
.
Patriarcha
.
c.
12.
but
the
Aegyptians
in
the
foureteenth
yeare
,
as
is
recorded
by
Ambrose
,
&
the
Arabians
in
the
thirteenth
(
and
some
of
them
both
sexes
,
as
[
](A16718-e29530-b)*
*
Sard.
de
Riti
.
gent.
l.
1.
c.
10.
learned
men
haue
recorded
.
Euen
as
the
[
](A16718-e29540-b)*
*
Bellon
.
Obser
.
l.
3.
c.
28.
Georgenitr
.
l.
2.
de
Ritib
.
Turcar.
c.
de
Circumcisione
.
Turkes
also
at
this
day
,
who
receaued
the
rite
of
circumcision
from
the
Arabians
,
are
knowne
to
circumcise
in
the
eight
or
twelfth
,
or
fifteenth
yeare
or
sooner
,
or
later
,
as
opportunitie
may
serue
.
Of
these
nations
I
say
,
how
circumcision
should
proceede
from
the
Israelites
to
them
,
I
cannot
conceaue
:
no
more
then
I
can
of
the
great
nation
of
the
[
](A16718-e29580-b)*
*
Pigafet
.
de
Regn.
Cong
.
l.
1
c.
5.
Boter
Rebat
.
pa.
1.
●
.
c.
Loange
.
Anzichi
,
on
the
West
side
of
Nilus
beyond
Nubia
,
or
of
the
inhabitants
of
[
](A16718-e29640-b)*
*
Ma●●y●
Ocean
.
●ecad
.
4.
c
1.
Iucatana
in
America
,
whereof
the
first
yet
are
,
and
the
second
(
till
they
came
vnder
the
gouernment
of
the
Spaniards
)
were
meere
Idolaters
,
for
of
these
also
,
the
second
had
,
&
the
first
still
haue
circumcision
in
vse
.
And
although
these
instances
,
vtterly
dissolue
the
force
of
this
reason
,
touching
the
Tartarians
circumcision
(
though
it
were
admitted
to
haue
beene
anciently
in
vse
among
them
,
as
being
vsuall
with
many
other
nations
,
of
whom
no
suspition
at
all
can
be
conceaued
,
to
be
of
the
Israelites
progenie
)
yet
this
may
furthermore
declare
them
,
not
to
be
of
that
race
,
because
namely
,
nothing
else
was
to
be
found
among
them
,
that
might
sauour
of
Israel
.
For
First
,
they
were
meere
Idolaters
,
and
without
knowledge
of
the
true
God
,
as
is
recorded
by
Marcus
Paulus
,
Paul
.
Venet.
l.
3.
c
47.
Haith
.
l.
de
.
Tartar
.
c.
1.
by
Haitho
,
and
others
.
Secondly
,
they
had
no
remembrance
of
the
law
at
all
.
Thirdly
,
they
neither
obserued
the
Sabboath
,
nor
other
rites
and
ceremonies
of
the
Israelites
,
but
touching
their
matrimonies
,
married
without
impeachment
the
verie
[
](A16718-e29780-b)*
*
Vicent
.
Spec.
Historialis
.
l.
32
c.
6.
Paul
.
Venet.
l.
1.
c.
55.
Guiliel
de
Rubric
.
Itin.
Tartar
.
c.
9.
wiues
,
and
sisters
of
their
fathers
:
and
touching
their
feeding
,
abstained
not
at
all
,
from
vncleane
beasts
,
but
fed
on
the
flesh
of
[
](A16718-e29820-b)*
*
Sigism
.
com
.
Rer.
Moscou
.
Gu.
l.
de
Rubricis
Itinerar
Tartar
.
l.
5.
Boem
.
de
Motib
.
gentium
.
l.
2.
c.
10.
horses
,
dogges
,
cattes
,
and
dead
carion
,
and
dranke
their
blood
,
all
vtterly
forborne
and
forbidden
among
the
Israelites
.
Fourthly
,
they
haue
no
records
,
nor
regard
of
their
auncestors
and
linage
,
from
whom
,
or
by
whom
,
they
are
descended
,
whereof
Israelites
were
euer
curious
.
Fifthly
,
they
haue
no
affinitie
of
language
at
all
,
with
either
the
Hebrew
or
Chaldee
tongues
,
neither
had
any
vse
of
those
letters
,
nor
of
any
other
,
till
together
with
Mahumetan
religion
,
the
Arabique
characters
came
in
vse
among
some
of
them
.
Neither
(
in
a
word
)
doe
I
finde
any
thing
at
all
,
wherein
the
Tartarians
sauored
of
Israelites
,
for
touching
their
abstinence
from
swines
flesh
,
which
we
finde
recorded
of
them
,
neither
is
it
generall
among
them
,
but
peculiar
to
those
that
are
Mahumetans
:
Nor
if
it
were
so
,
were
that
any
good
argument
,
because
wee
know
that
the
auncient
[
](A16718-e29920-b)*
*
Herodot
.
l.
4.
Scythians
,
and
[
](A16718-e29940-b)*
*
Aelian
.
de
Animalib
.
l.
10.
c.
17.
Aegyptians
,
and
Arabians
did
,
and
almost
all
Mahumetans
at
this
day
doe
the
same
,
which
yet
are
well
knowne
to
be
in
no
sort
descended
of
the
Israelites
.
Now
touching
the
authority
of
forged
[
](A16718-e29990-b)*
*
Esdr.
2.13
.
Esdras
,
which
hath
stirred
vp
as
it
seemeth
this
vapourous
fantasie
,
in
the
braines
of
new fangled
antiquaries
:
neither
doth
that
which
hee
writeth
of
the
ten
tribes
,
agree
at
all
with
the
Tartars
:
nor
,
if
it
did
,
could
yet
the
circumstances
of
that
history
agree
with
the
truth
.
It
agreeth
not
with
the
Tartars
I
say
,
for
whereas
they
are
noted
in
that
reuelation
,
to
bee
[
](A16718-e30030-b)*
*
Vers.
39.
a
peaceable
people
,
and
that
they
[
](A16718-e30050-b)*
*
Vers.
41.
left
the
multitude
of
the
heathen
,
that
they
might
keepe
their
statutes
,
which
they
neuer
kept
in
their
owne
land
:
neither
of
both
those
properties
,
hath
any
conuenience
or
agreement
at
all
with
the
Tartarians
.
For
how
are
they
a
peaceable
people
,
that
with
their
wars
haue
troubled
and
ouerturned
almost
all
Asia
,
and
sundry
countries
of
Europe
,
and
hold
a
great
part
of
the
former
in
subiection
to
this
day
?
Or
how
kept
they
the
statutes
of
the
Israelites
,
that
were
meere
idolaters
,
and
vtterly
ignorant
of
all
Iewish
lawes
and
ceremonies
?
And
touching
the
history
it selfe
of
the
Israelites
departure
out
of
Assyria
,
as
it
is
set
downe
in
that
Apocryphall
Esdras
(
howsoeuer
it
might
otherwise
agree
with
the
Tartars
)
there
is
no
wise
or
considerate
man
,
I
think
,
that
can
bring
his
vnderstanding
to
giue
credit
to
it
.
For
first
it
contradicteth
the
vndoubted
canonicall
histories
of
the
Chronicles
,
1.
Chro.
5.26
.
2.
Kin.
17.23
.
and
of
the
Kings
,
in
both
which
it
is
recorded
of
them
,
that
they
were
carried
away
into
Ashur
,
&
disposed
in
seuerall
parts
of
the
Empire
,
namely
[
](A16718-e30130-b)*
*
If
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
be
Cholchi
,
and
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
Iberia
,
and
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
Armenia
,
so
called
for
the
mountainousnes
of
it
)
and
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
Gauzania
in
Media
,
then
all
confined
together
,
and
bounded
the
north
side
of
the
Assyrian
Empire
,
which
stretched
northward
,
but
to
that
Isthme
betweene
the
Euxine
&
the
Caspian
seas
:
So
that
,
the
Israelites
were
by
that
meanes
,
seated
farthest
off
from
their
owne
countrey
,
and
placed
in
the
parts
of
the
Empire
most
wast
and
desolate
of
inhabitants
,
as
the
confines
of
warring
nations
vsually
are
.
But
if
Calach
be
Calacine
,
and
Chabor
the
hil
Chaboras
,
(
being
part
of
Taurus
,
and
seuering
Assyria
,
from
Armenia
,
and
Media
)
and
Hara
the
other
hilly
parts
in
the
north
side
of
Assyria
,
as
seemeth
more
agreeable
to
the
obseruations
of
Beniamin
Tudelensis
,
for
about
those
parts
,
he
found
in
his
trauail
,
the
greatest
multitudes
of
the
Israelites
,
then
in
the
places
aleaged
,
I
would
vnderstand
by
Ashur
,
not
the
Empire
or
dominion
,
but
the
peculiar
kingdome
of
Assyria
.
Calach
,
and
Chabor
,
and
Hara
,
and
Gozan
,
vnto
this
day
,
which
limitation
of
time
(
vnto
this
day
)
must
at
least
of
necessitie
import
,
the
time
wherein
that
history
(
of
their
remaining
in
Ashur
)
recorded
in
the
books
of
the
Kings
,
&
of
the
Chronicles
was
written
.
Of
which
later
,
either
Esdras
himselfe
was
the
Author
,
as
in
the
iudgment
[
](A16718-e30400-b)*
*
R.
Dau.
Kimchi
&
R.
Shelomo
ex
sententia
seniorum
apud
Sixt.
Senens
.
Biblioth.
Sanctae
lib.
1.
of
learned
men
he
is
reputed
,
&
therfore
could
not
(
as
it
seemeth
)
be
the
Author
of
that
apocryphall
history
:
Abulens
.
in
praef.
Paralipom
.
in
Quaestion
.
5.
or
,
at
least
,
if
Esdras
were
not
the
Author
,
yet
,
that
the
Author
(
whosoeuer
he
was
)
liued
and
writ
that
history
of
the
Chronicles
,
after
the
return
of
the
Iewes
from
the
captiuity
,
or
in
the
end
of
it
,
(
that
is
in
Esdras
time
,
)
is
euident
by
the
end
of
the
booke
:
where
Cyrus
his
benignity
,
for
restoring
of
the
Iewes
,
&
his
proclamation
for
their
returne
to
Ierusalem
is
recorded
,
and
that
in
the
very
same
words
,
wherein
Esdras
in
the
beginning
of
his
own
booke
hath
registred
them
.
At
that
time
therfore
,
it
is
euident
,
that
the
Israelites
were
not
departed
out
of
the
dominions
of
Ashur
.
No
nor
long
after
that
in
Iosephus
his
time
:
Ioseph
.
Antiq.
l.
11.
c.
who
hath
recorded
that
euen
then
the
tenne
Tribes
remained
beyond
Euphrates
,
and
were
there
growne
into
innumerable
multitudes
:
neither
yet
many
hundred
yeares
after
Iosephus
was
dead
:
for
R.
Beniamin
a
Iew
,
that
liued
but
about
440.
yeares
agoe
,
and
trauailed
diligently
those
parts
of
the
world
,
and
many
other
to
visite
his
dispersed
countrimen
,
hath
in
his
Itinerary
left
obserued
,
not
only
,
that
he
found
exceeding
far
greater
multitudes
of
the
Israelites
,
Beniamin
in
Itiner
.
pag.
57.58.59.70.71.74
75.76.77.78.80.81.86
.
to
be
then
remaining
in
those
prouinces
of
the
ancient
dominion
of
Ashur
,
then
he
found
in
other
places
,
possessing
[
](A16718-e30550-b)*
*
Pag.
75.
&
87
large
regions
,
and
[
](A16718-e30560-b)*
*
Pag.
76.
&c.
many
cities
,
so
that
in
the
cities
of
some
one
Region
[
](A16718-e30570-b)*
*
Pag
cad.
300000.
Iewes
were
by
him
numbred
,
obseruing
specially
,
that
in
the
parts
of
Media
,
many
thousand
Israelites
of
the
progeny
of
them
that
Salmanaser
ledde
into
captiuity
,
were
then
remaining
,
but
withall
,
he
setteth
downe
particularly
and
precisely
,
the
very
places
of
those
regions
,
where
certaine
of
the
Tribes
were
seated
,
&
there
grown
into
great
multitudes
:
As
namely
,
in
[
](A16718-e30600-b)*
*
Pag.
77.
one
place
,
the
Tribes
of
Ruben
,
Gad
,
and
Manasse
:
And
in
[
](A16718-e30630-b)*
*
Pag.
87.
an
other
,
the
4.
Tribes
of
Dan
,
Asher
,
Zebulon
,
and
Naphtali
.
But
yet
if
there
were
neither
authority
of
holy
Scripture
,
nor
experience
to
refell
this
fable
,
&
the
fancies
that
haue
sprung
of
it
:
yet
ordinary
reason
,
at
least
of
men
that
are
not
ignorant
of
Geography
and
are
meanly
skilled
in
the
affaires
of
the
world
,
may
easily
discerne
the
futility
of
it
.
For
first
,
what
neede
was
there
of
such
a
miracle
,
2.
Esdr.
13.
as
to
[
](A16718-e30680-b)*
*
And
the
most
high
them
shewed
them
signes
,
&
stayed
the
springs
of
the
floud
(
Euphrates
)
till
they
were
pas●ed
ouer
.
●ecs
.
44.
stay
the
course
of
Euphrates
,
for
the
Israelites
passage
from
Assyria
,
or
Media
toward
Tartary
,
the
riuer
lying
far
to
the
west
,
both
of
the
one
region
and
of
the
other
,
&
no
way
crossing
or
impeaching
their
iourney
,
which
lay
northward
betweene
that
riuer
and
the
Caspian
Sea
?
Or
,
how
might
those
poore
captiue
Israelites
,
disarmed
as
they
were
,
and
dispersed
in
sundry
Prouinces
of
the
Assyrian
Empire
,
and
being
vnder
the
ouersight
and
gouernment
of
Assyrian
presidents
,
be
able
to
leaue
the
places
,
where
by
the
Kings
commandement
they
were
to
inhabite
?
Or
,
They
tooke
this
counsel
to
themselues
that
they
would
leaue
the
multitude
of
the
Heathen
.
v.
41.
if
the
Israelites
were
able
by
force
to
depart
,
and
free
themselues
from
the
dominion
of
the
king
of
Ashur
,
yet
were
they
so
wise
also
,
as
to
forsake
the
places
where
they
were
peaceably
setled
,
and
venture
their
small
remainders
vpon
perils
and
vncertainties
,
namely
,
to
finde
out
a
place
where
neuer
mankind
dwelt
?
Or
,
if
their
stomacke
serued
them
so
well
,
and
their
wit
so
ill
,
as
in
such
manner
to
forsake
Assyria
,
And
goe
forth
into
a
country
where
neuer
mankind
dwelt
.
v.
41.
yet
were
they
also
able
to
make
themselues
way
(
euen
a
way
as
hee
saith
,
of
18.
moneths
passage
)
through
the
fierce
and
mighty
nations
of
Scythia
,
whom
neither
the
conquerours
of
the
Israelites
,
the
Assyrians
I
meane
,
nor
the
Persians
(
and
I
might
adde
also
the
Grecians
and
the
Romans
)
were
neuer
able
to
subdue
,
but
were
in
the
after
times
subdued
by
them
?
for
that
the
parts
of
Scythia
should
bee
without
Inhabitants
(
&
in
Scythia
it
must
bee
where
they
would
find
that
country
where
neuer
mankind
dwelt
,
or
else
it
is
not
in
Tartary
)
is
scarse
credible
,
as
wherof
we
read
in
histories
,
[
](A16718-e30810-b)*
*
Iustin.
hist.
l.
2.
in
princip.
to
haue
contended
with
Aegypt
for
antiquity
of
habitation
,
&
to
haue
preuailed
,
and
for
the
aboundance
of
people
,
to
bee
termed
Hominum
Officina
.
Insomuch
that
the
greatest
occasion
of
swarming
abroad
of
those
nations
of
Scythia
,
and
of
their
ouerwhelming
of
Asia
&
Europe
,
with
their
infinite
multitudes
and
colonies
,
is
in
histories
recorded
,
to
be
lacke
of
room
for
habitation
in
their
owne
countries
.
And
lastly
,
to
make
an
end
of
this
tedious
discourse
,
with
the
ende
of
their
imagined
tedious
iourney
:
what
ancient
Geographer
or
Historian
is
there
,
(
set
our
Esdras
aside
)
that
euer
remembred
of
such
a
Region
as
Arsareth
,
where
they
are
saide
to
haue
seated
themselues
.
True
it
is
indeed
that
I
find
the
city
of
Arsaratha
,
Beros
.
lib.
3.
Ptolem.
Geog.
l.
5.
c.
13.
et
in
Tab.
3.
Asiae
.
mentioned
both
in
Berosus
fragments
,
and
in
Ptolomie
placed
neer
the
issue
of
the
riuer
Araxes
into
the
Caspian
sea
:
and
,
it
was
perhaps
one
of
the
Israelitish
colonies
,
planted
in
the
confines
of
the
empire
of
Assyria
:
for
it
may
well
bee
that
Arsaratha
,
is
but
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
,
or
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
,
that
is
the
City
,
or
the
hill
of
the
remainder
:
or
perhaps
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
(
the
last
letter
of
the
first
word
cut
of
in
the
Greeke
pronunciation
for
sounds
sake
)
the
Land
of
the
remainder
:
but
the
tale
of
eighteene
months
iourney
,
wil
no
more
agree
with
this
citie
,
then
the
region
of
Arsareth
doth
,
with
Geography
or
Historie
.
So
that
me
thinks
this
forged
story
of
the
Israelites
voyage
and
habitation
,
in
such
remote
regions
where
neuer
mankind
dwelt
,
sauoureth
of
the
same
phantastical
and
Talmudical
spirit
,
that
[
](A16718-e31000-b)*
*
Esd.
6.42
.
an
other
tale
of
the
same
author
doth
,
touching
the
collection
of
all
the
waters
,
into
a
seuenth
part
of
the
earth
,
the
other
sixe
beeing
left
vncouered
:
or
[
](A16718-e31010-b)*
*
Cap.
eod.
vers.
50.
a
third
,
of
(
the
Elephant
and
the
Whale
)
Behemoth
and
Leuiathan
:
namely
,
that
God
appointed
the
sea
to
one
of
them
,
and
the
land
to
the
other
,
because
they
were
so
great
that
the
Sea
could
not
hold
them
both
:
for
else
belike
,
if
the
Sea
had
bene
large
enough
,
we
might
haue
gone
a
fishing
for
Elephants
.
For
how
is
the
sea
gathered
into
a
seauenth
part
of
the
earth
,
whose
expansion
is
not
only
by
the
most
skilfull
Philosophers
esteemed
,
but
found
by
experience
of
nauigations
hitherto
made
,
to
ouerspred
as
neerly
as
may
be
discerned
,
about
halfe
the
compasse
of
the
Earth
?
Or
,
being
of
that
bredth
,
and
withall
of
the
depth
,
that
it
is
knowne
to
be
how
should
it
not
bee
spatious
enough
,
to
receiue
Elephants
and
Whales
together
?
The
dimensions
of
the
Elephant
,
euen
of
the
greatest
sort
of
Indian
Elephants
,
(
and
the
earth
breedeth
none
so
large
as
those
of
India
)
are
,
Aelian
de
Animalib
.
l.
12.
c.
8.
saith
Aelianus
,
nine
cubits
of
heigth
(
the
length
in
that
beast
is
equall
to
the
height
)
and
fiue
of
bredth
,
the
greatest
that
haue
bene
seene
in
Europe
,
being
[
](A16718-e31070-b)*
*
Vid.
Gillium
in
Descript:
6
,
Elephant
,
c.
6.
et
Gorop
l.
2.
Origin
.
Antuerptan
.
obserued
to
be
far
lesse
.
The
dimension
of
the
Whale
indeed
is
far
greater
(
fiue
times
saith
[
](A16718-e31080-b)*
*
Aelian
.
l.
16.
ca.
12.
Rondelet
.
de
Piscib
.
l.
16.
c.
11.
Arrian
.
de
Reb.
Indicis
longe
ante
finem
.
Aelianus
then
the
largest
sort
of
Elephants
)
But
yet
his
ordinary
dimension
is
,
but
36.
cubits
long
,
and
8.
cubits
high
,
as
Rondeletius
hath
obserued
.
But
admit
notwithstanding
some
of
them
to
bee
50.
cubits
,
of
which
length
,
Nearchus
in
Arrianus
is
saide
to
haue
measured
one
in
the
East
Ocean
:
nay
,
to
be
600.
foot
long
,
and
360.
foote
thicke
,
as
[
](A16718-e31130-b)*
*
Ap.
Plin.
l.
32.
c.
1.
Iuba
in
Plinie
related
to
bee
found
in
the
Bay
of
Arabia
,
(
where
yet
,
as
it
is
well
knowne
by
the
foundings
of
nauigators
,
that
sea
is
not
by
a
good
deale
360.
foote
deepe
)
Or
,
let
them
be
more
yet
,
Plin.
l
9.
c.
3.
euen
foure
Acres
long
,
(
that
is
960.
foote
)
as
Plinie
hath
related
of
some
in
the
sea
of
India
.
For
,
although
the
two
last
reports
bee
in
truth
no
better
then
fancies
and
fables
,
Basil.
in
Hexaemer
.
Homil.
7
which
the
impudence
of
some
,
hath
made
the
ignorance
of
others
,
to
beleeue
,
yet
I
will
exclude
none
,
but
onely
Basil
,
as
intolerably
hyperbolical
,
affirming
namely
that
whales
are
equal
to
the
greatest
mountaines
,
&
their
backs
when
they
shew
aboue
the
water
,
like
to
Islands
.
But
admitting
all
the
rest
I
say
,
what
proportion
haue
those
dimensions
of
the
Whale
&
the
Elephant
,
to
the
huge
bredth
&
depth
of
the
Ocean
?
For
if
I
may
without
offence
intersert
a
short
Philosophicall
speculaton
:
the
depth
of
the
Sea
(
to
speake
nothing
of
the
bredth
,
which
euery
common
mappe
doth
represent
)
is
determined
by
Fabianus
in
Plinie
,
Fabian
.
apud
Plin.
l.
2.
c.
102
Cleomed
.
Meteot
.
l.
1.
c.
10.
and
by
Cleomedes
,
to
be
15
furlongs
,
that
is
,
one
mile
and
seuen
eight
parts
:
Or
else
,
equall
to
the
height
of
the
greatest
mountaines
,
to
whose
height
,
and
the
deepenesse
of
the
Sea
,
the
Geometricians
(
as
Plutarch
hath
recorded
)
anciently
assigned
equall
dimensions
.
Plutarch
in
Vita
Aemilij
Pauli
.
Or
yet
rather
(
if
you
will
any
thing
respect
my
opinion
)
it
is
a
great
deale
more
.
Scalig.
de
Subtilitate
.
Exercit.
38.
For
,
as
for
the
shallow
speculation
of
Scaliger
,
and
[
](A16718-e31300-b)*
*
And.
Baccius
de
Thermis
.
l.
1.
c.
4.
&
Alij
.
others
,
of
the
shallownesse
of
the
Sea
,
determining
the
height
of
Hilles
,
farre
to
surpasse
the
deepenesse
of
the
sea
:
And
that
in
very
few
places
,
it
attaineth
100
passes
of
depth
,
is
indeed
true
in
the
narrow
Channels
and
Straits
of
the
Sea
:
But
in
the
free
and
large
Ocean
,
it
is
by
the
experience
of
Nauigators
knowen
to
bee
as
false
as
the
Gospell
is
true
.
Indeed
touching
the
height
of
mountaines
,
I
finde
it
pronounced
by
the
great
Mathematician
Eratosthenes
in
Theon
,
Theon
.
in
Comment.
Magnae
Construction
.
Ptolom
.
l.
1.
that
the
highest
sort
of
them
,
passe
not
in
perpendicular
erectnesse
10
furlongs
(
that
is
one
mile
and
one
fourth
part
)
of
which
height
also
,
it
is
obserued
in
Plinie
,
Plin.
l.
2.
c.
63.
Plutarch
.
loc.
supra
citato
.
that
Dicaearchus
by
Dioptricall
Instruments
,
found
the
Hill
Pelius
in
Thessalie
to
bee
,
and
in
Plutarch
,
that
Xenagoras
(
another
Mathematician
)
obserued
the
height
of
Olympus
,
in
the
same
Region
,
sauing
,
that
in
this
later
,
there
is
an
addition
of
20
passes
,
for
the
whole
number
of
passes
,
is
1270.
Neither
do
I
find
any
greater
perpendicular
height
attributed
to
Mountaines
,
by
any
ancient
writer
,
Cleomedes
excepted
:
Cleomed
.
l.
1.
Meteor
.
c.
10.
who
assigneth
to
the
height
of
Hils
,
as
he
doth
also
to
the
depth
of
the
Sea
,
15
furlongs
.
(
For
Alhazen
I
omit
,
because
he
onely
restraineth
the
height
of
hilles
,
Alhazen
.
de
Crepuscul
.
propos
.
1.
as
namely
,
not
to
exceed
8
miles
,
without
determining
what
their
height
should
be
)
But
yet
,
all
these
,
are
to
bee
vnderstood
,
I
take
it
,
with
relation
to
the
Mountaines
in
and
about
Greece
,
with
which
themselues
were
acquainted
,
which
may
in
no
sort
compare
with
the
huge
Mountaines
of
vast
Continents
,
such
as
are
the
Alpes
in
Europe
,
Atlas
in
Afrique
,
Caucasus
in
India
,
the
Andes
in
Peru
,
and
such
other
.
But
,
whatsoeuer
the
height
of
Hilles
may
bee
aboue
the
common
superficies
of
the
Earth
,
it
seemeth
to
me
after
good
consideration
,
that
the
depth
of
the
Sea
,
is
a
great
deale
more
.
For
declaration
of
which
point
,
I
require
to
be
supposed
,
first
,
that
the
Earth
at
the
first
forming
of
it
,
was
in
the
superficies
,
regular
,
and
sphericall
:
which
the
Holy
Scripture
directs
vs
to
beleeue
,
because
the
water
couered
and
compassed
all
the
face
of
the
Earth
:
And
secondly
,
that
the
face
of
the
Land
is
in
largenesse
and
expansion
,
at
least
equall
to
that
of
the
sea
:
And
thirdly
,
that
the
vneuennesse
and
irregularity
,
which
is
now
seene
in
the
superficies
of
the
Earth
was
caused
(
as
is
noted
in
Damascen
)
either
,
Damascen
.
l.
1.
de
fide
Orthodoxa
c.
10.
by
taking
of
some
parts
out
of
the
vpper
face
of
the
Earth
in
sundry
places
,
to
make
it
more
hollow
,
and
laying
them
in
other
places
,
to
make
it
more
conue●e
▪
Or
else
(
which
in
effect
is
equiualent
to
that
)
by
raysing
vp
some
,
and
depressing
others
to
make
roome
and
receite
for
the
sea
:
that
mutation
being
wrought
by
the
power
of
that
word
,
Genes.
1.9
.
Let
the
waters
be
gathered
into
one
place
,
that
the
dry
land
may
appeare
.
For
,
as
for
the
fancy
of
Aquinas
,
Dionysius
,
Aquin.
in
Sum
pa.
1.
q.
69.
a.
1.
Dionys.
Carth
Catharin
.
&
Alij
in
Comment.
cap.
1.
Genes.
Catharinus
and
some
other
Diuines
namely
,
that
that
gathering
of
waters
and
discouerie
of
the
Earth
,
was
made
,
not
by
any
mutation
in
the
Earth
,
but
by
a
violent
accumulation
of
the
waters
,
or
heaping
them
vp
on
high
,
it
is
too
vnreasonable
.
Because
it
is
vtterly
against
the
nature
of
water
,
being
a
flexible
and
ponderous
body
,
so
to
consist
,
and
stay
it selfe
,
and
not
fall
to
the
lower
parts
about
it
,
where
in
nature
there
is
nothing
at
all
to
hinder
it
.
Or
,
if
it
be
hindered
and
restrayned
supernaturally
,
by
the
hand
and
bridle
of
the
almighty
,
lest
it
should
ouerwhelme
and
drowne
the
Land
,
it
must
follow
thereof
,
that
God
in
the
very
institution
of
nature
,
imposed
a
perpetuall
violence
vpon
nature
:
And
this
withall
,
that
at
the
Deluge
,
there
had
beene
no
necessitie
at
all
,
to
break
vp
the
springs
of
the
deepe
,
and
to
open
the
Cataracts
of
Heauen
,
and
powre
downe
water
continually
,
so
many
dayes
and
nights
together
vpon
the
Earth
,
seeing
,
the
only
withdrawing
of
that
hand
,
or
letting
goe
of
that
bridle
,
which
restrayned
the
water
,
would
presently
haue
ouerwhelmed
all
.
But
,
to
come
to
the
Point
.
It
seemeth
vpon
the
former
suppositions
(
of
which
,
the
holy
scripture
establisheth
the
first
,
Experience
of
Trauailers
,
and
Nauigators
the
second
,
and
Reason
the
third
)
that
in
making
estimation
of
the
depth
of
the
Sea
,
wee
are
not
to
reckon
and
consider
onely
,
the
height
of
the
Hilles
,
aboue
the
common
superficies
of
the
Earth
,
vnto
which
the
extraordinary
depthes
or
whirlpooles
,
that
are
found
in
the
Sea
,
doe
properly
answere
(
descending
beneath
the
ordinary
bottome
of
the
Sea
,
as
the
Hilles
ascend
aboue
the
ordinary
face
of
the
Land
)
but
,
the
aduantage
or
height
of
all
the
dry
Land
aboue
the
superficies
of
the
Sea
.
Because
the
whole
Masse
of
the
Earth
,
that
now
appeareth
aboue
the
waters
,
being
taken
as
it
were
out
of
the
place
,
which
the
waters
now
possesse
,
must
bee
equall
to
the
place
out
of
which
it
was
taken
,
and
consequently
it
seemeth
,
that
the
height
or
eleuation
of
the
one
,
should
answere
the
depth
or
descending
of
the
other
.
And
therefore
as
I
sayd
,
in
estimating
the
deepenesse
of
the
Sea
,
wee
are
not
to
consider
onely
the
erection
of
the
Hilles
,
aboue
the
ordinary
land
,
but
the
aduantage
of
all
the
dry
land
aboue
the
sea
.
Which
later
,
I
meane
the
height
of
the
ordinary
maine
Land
,
(
euen
excluding
the
hilles
)
is
in
my
opinion
more
in
large
Continents
aboue
the
Sea
,
then
that
of
the
Hilles
,
is
aboue
the
Land
.
For
first
,
that
the
plaine
and
common
face
of
the
drie
Land
,
is
not
leuell
,
or
equally
distant
from
the
Center
,
but
hath
great
decliuity
and
descent
toward
the
Sea
,
and
accliuitie
or
rising
toward
the
Midland
parts
,
although
it
appeare
not
so
to
the
common
view
of
the
Eye
,
is
to
reason
notwithstanding
manifest
.
Because
as
it
is
found
in
that
part
of
the
Earth
,
which
the
Sea
couereth
that
it
descendeth
lower
,
and
lower
toward
the
middest
of
the
sea
,
(
for
the
Sea
which
touching
the
vpper
face
of
it
,
is
knowen
to
beleuell
by
nature
,
and
euenly
distant
from
the
Center
,
is
withall
obserued
to
waxe
deeper
and
deeper
,
the
farther
one
sayleth
from
the
shore
toward
the
Maine
)
Euen
so
,
in
that
part
which
is
vncouered
,
the
coursings
and
streamings
of
Riuers
on
all
sides
from
the
midland
parts
toward
the
Sea
,
[
](A16718-e31670-b)*
*
By
which
rule
of
the
proceeding
of
Riuers
by
the
decliuity
of
the
earth
and
euer
sliding
from
the
higher
ground
to
the
lower
,
till
they
come
to
the
Sea
,
is
euident
to
bee
discerned
,
that
in
Continents
,
those
Regions
are
the
higher
Land
from
which
Riuers
streame
,
&
those
the
lower
ground
,
to
which
they
proceed
,
and
consequently
,
that
of
all
,
those
are
the
highest
which
receiuing
no
forrain
Riuers
,
to
which
they
giue
passage
through
them
,
do
send
forth
the
longest
Riuers
on
all
sides
to
the
regions
round
about
them
.
By
which
obseruation
is
to
be
discerned
,
that
Heluetia
and
Rhetia
,
sending
forth
the
longest
Riuers
of
Europe
,
which
on
all
sides
descend
from
them
and
their
confines
,
Danubius
toward
the
East
,
Rhene
North
,
Rhodanus
West
,
beside
Ticinus
,
Addua
,
and
others
,
that
fall
into
Padus
South
,
are
the
highest
land
of
Europe
:
As
the
Region
of
Pamer
,
and
Kirgessi
,
with
some
other
neere
the
crossing
of
the
great
mountaines
Taurus
and
Imaus
aboue
India
,
whence
are
directed
,
the
greatest
and
longest
Riuers
of
Asia
,
Indus
and
Ganges
toward
the
South
,
Oxus
and
Iaxartus
toward
the
West
,
Oechardes
North
,
Cantan
East
,
is
proued
by
the
same
reason
,
to
be
the
heighest
part
of
Afrique
&
Asia
,
and
in
my
opinion
of
all
the
Earth
.
And
as
the
region
also
about
the
springs
of
Nilus
,
from
which
beside
Nilus
,
that
runneth
towards
the
North
,
are
sent
forth
,
the
riuer
of
Magnice
,
towards
the
South
,
of
Zaire
West
,
of
Coauo
&
Zuama
East
,
being
(
Niger
excepted
)
the
greatest
riuers
of
Afrique
,
is
by
the
same
reason
,
proued
to
be
,
the
heighest
part
of
that
continent
.
whose
propertie
wee
know
is
to
slide
from
the
higher
to
the
lower
,
euidently
declare
so
much
.
And
although
I
am
not
able
precisely
to
determine
,
what
the
ordinary
decliuity
of
the
earth
may
be
,
yet
,
if
that
be
conuenient
in
the
workes
of
nature
,
which
is
required
in
the
workes
of
Art
,
that
imitateth
Nature
,
it
will
bee
found
true
that
before
I
sayd
:
Namely
,
that
in
great
Continents
,
through
which
Riuers
haue
long
Courses
,
some
of
1000
,
or
2000
miles
,
the
height
of
the
ordinary
Midland
,
aboue
the
face
of
the
Sea
,
is
more
,
then
of
the
Hilles
aboue
the
common
face
of
the
Earth
,
for
Plinie
in
the
deriuation
of
water
,
〈◊〉
31.
●6
.
requireth
one
cubit
of
declining
,
in
240
foot
of
proceeding
(
for
he
saith
vnum
cubitum
in
binos
Actus
&
Actus
as
may
Col●mell
.
de
Re
Rustica
.
l.
5.
c●
bee
obserued
in
Columella
and
others
is
a
dimension
of
120
foote
long
)
Vitruuius
and
Palladius
in
their
conduction
of
waters
,
Vitrum
Archirectur
.
l.
8
〈◊〉
Pallad.
〈◊〉
Ru●●●ca
l.
5.
Tic.
II.
require
indeede
somewhat
lesse
,
namely
,
that
in
proceeding
of
200
foote
forward
,
there
should
bee
allowed
one
foote
of
descending
downeward
,
which
yet
in
the
course
of
1000
miles
(
as
Danubius
or
Wolgha
,
or
Indus
&c.
haue
so
much
or
more
)
will
make
fiue
miles
of
descent
in
perpendicular
account
:
And
in
the
course
of
2000
,
or
more
,
(
as
Nilus
,
and
Niger
,
and
the
Riuer
of
Amazons
haue
)
10
mile
or
more
of
like
descent
.
And
,
although
I
know
well
enough
,
that
water
being
(
as
it
is
)
heauy
and
flexible
,
will
slide
away
at
any
inequalitie
,
and
therefore
am
altogether
perswaded
,
that
this
rule
of
Vitruuius
touching
conueiance
of
waters
,
is
not
to
be
taken
as
a
rule
of
necessitie
,
to
be
obserued
in
the
deriuing
of
them
,
as
if
water
could
not
runne
without
that
aduantage
,
(
for
in
that
respect
the
Conueiers
of
waters
of
these
times
,
content
themselues
euen
with
one
inch
in
600
foote
,
as
Philander
also
on
Vitruuius
,
Philand
in
Vitruu
.
l.
8.
c.
7.
hath
obserued
)
but
is
rather
to
bee
vnderstood
as
a
rule
of
commodity
,
namely
with
relation
to
the
expedition
and
holesomenesse
of
the
water
so
conueied
,
lest
resting
too
long
in
the
pipes
it
should
contract
from
them
some
vnholesome
qualitie
,
or
else
through
the
slacknesse
of
motion
,
or
long
closenesse
,
or
banishment
from
the
aire
,
it
might
gather
some
aptnesse
and
disposition
to
putrefie
.
Although
I
say
,
such
excesse
of
aduantage
as
in
the
artificiall
conueance
of
waters
the
forenamed
authors
require
,
be
not
of
necessitie
exacted
,
in
the
naturall
deriuation
of
them
:
yet
neuerthelesse
certaine
it
is
,
that
the
descent
of
riuers
,
being
as
it
is
continuall
,
and
the
course
of
some
of
them
verie
long
,
and
in
many
places
swift
,
and
here
,
and
there
headlong
&
furious
,
the
difference
of
height
or
aduantage
,
can
not
but
be
great
,
betwixt
the
springs
of
riuers
and
their
outlets
,
betwixt
their
first
rising
out
of
the
earth
,
and
their
falling
into
the
sea
.
Vnto
which
decliuitie
of
the
land
,
seeing
the
deepenesse
of
the
sea
doth
in
proportion
answer
(
as
I
before
declared
)
&
not
onely
to
the
height
of
hils
.
It
remaineth
that
we
esteeme
and
determine
that
deepenesse
to
be
a
great
deale
more
,
then
it
hath
beene
hetherto
by
Philosophers
commonly
reputed
.
And
although
the
deepenesse
of
the
Sardinian
sea
(
which
indeede
Aristotle
acknowledgeth
for
the
deepest
part
of
the
mediterrane
)
bee
specially
recorded
by
Posidonius
in
Strabo
,
Arist.
Meteor
l.
2.
c.
1.
Strabo
.
l.
1.
longe
post
medium
.
to
haue
beene
found
but
1000
fadomes
(
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
)
which
is
but
a
mile
and
one
fift
part
:
yet
what
may
the
depth
in
that
narrow
sea
bee
,
compared
to
the
hollow
deepenesse
of
the
vast
Ocean
?
Or
rather
(
to
turne
this
Instance
to
our
aduantage
)
if
in
so
narrow
a
sea
as
the
mediterraine
is
(
whose
bredth
attayneth
not
where
it
is
largest
,
600
miles
)
the
depth
bee
so
great
,
what
may
wee
esteeme
the
deepenesse
of
the
huge
Ocean
to
be
,
that
is
in
many
places
aboue
fiue
times
as
broade
?
especially
,
seeing
that
the
broader
that
seas
are
,
if
they
be
withall
entire
,
and
free
from
Islands
,
they
are
answerablie
obserued
to
be
the
deeper
.
But
whether
haue
I
beene
carried
by
these
Elephants
and
Whales
?
to
what
heights
and
depths
,
of
Mountaines
,
and
Seas
?
I
pray
you
pardon
mee
,
for
I
see
I
haue
digressed
,
that
is
,
transgressed
,
now
I
returne
into
the
way
againe
.
Of
the
Quantitie
and
proportion
of
the
parts
of
the
earth
,
possessed
by
the
seueral
sorts
of
the
abou
mentioned
religions
.
CHAP.
XIIII
.
NOw
,
if
out
of
the
former
long
discourse
,
I
should
collect
a
short
somme
,
and
estimate
the
proportion
with
respect
to
the
whole
earth
,
that
each
one
of
the
forementioned
religions
,
haue
to
the
other
.
It
being
first
supposed
,
which
vpon
exact
consideration
and
calcalation
,
will
bee
found
to
swarue
very
little
from
the
truth
,
that
the
proportions
of
Europe
,
Afrique
,
Asia
,
and
America
,
are
as
1.3.4
&
7.
And
that
the
professors
of
the
forementioned
religions
,
possesse
the
seuerall
portions
and
proportions
,
of
each
of
them
,
which
is
before
set
downe
:
It
will
be
found
I
say
vpon
these
suppositions
(
which
the
best
Gographie
,
and
histories
doe
perswade
mee
to
bee
true
)
that
Christians
possesse
,
neere
about
a
fixt
part
of
the
knowne
inhabited
earth
:
Mahumetans
,
a
fift
part
(
not
as
[
](A16718-e32340-b)*
*
Pos●el
in
p●aefat
.
Grammat
.
Arabic
.
Ludouic
.
Reg●us
de
Vicissitud
.
Rerum
.
l
〈◊〉
●ue
.
some
haue
exceedingly
ouerlashed
,
halfe
the
world
or
more
)
and
Idolaters
,
two
thirds
,
or
but
little
lesse
.
So
that
,
if
we
diuide
the
knowne
regions
of
the
world
,
into
30
equall
parts
.
The
Christians
part
is
as
fiue
,
the
Mahumetans
as
sixe
,
and
the
Idolaters
as
nineteene
,
for
the
poore
dispersed
and
distressed
Christians
,
which
are
found
in
Asia
and
Afrique
,
mingled
among
Mahumetans
,
and
Idolaters
,
I
receaue
not
into
this
account
,
both
because
they
are
but
thinne
dispersed
,
in
respect
of
the
multitudes
of
Mahumetans
and
Idolaters
in
those
regions
among
whom
they
liue
(
being
withall
vnder
their
dominion
)
and
because
also
,
many
Mahumetans
,
are
found
mingled
among
Christians
in
Europe
,
to
recompence
and
counteruaile
a
great
part
of
that
number
.
Such
therefore
may
be
the
generall
proportion
of
Christians
to
Mahumetans
and
Idolaters
,
in
the
continents
of
the
earth
hetherto
discouered
,
namely
,
in
this
our
neighbour
continent
of
the
East
comprehending
Europe
,
Afrique
,
and
Asia
,
and
in
that
other
continent
of
the
West
,
called
America
,
and
in
the
Islands
belonging
to
them
both
.
But
if
the
South
or
Antarctique
continent
,
be
so
large
,
as
I
am
verily
perswaded
it
is
(
euen
no
lesse
,
then
that
of
the
East
before
mentioned
,
which
containeth
Europe
,
Afrique
and
Asia
together
)
then
will
the
Idolaters
be
found
to
surpasse
all
the
other
religions
,
in
exceeding
great
proportion
,
for
that
the
Inhabitants
of
that
South
continent
,
are
Idolaters
,
there
is
no
question
at
all
(
as
I
take
it
)
to
bee
made
,
both
because
in
the
parts
hitherto
known
,
as
namely
in
the
region
of
[
](A16718-e32490-b)*
*
Varro
.
l.
6.
de
Ling.
Latina
.
Beach
,
ouer
against
Iaua
,
they
were
found
to
be
so
:
And
also
,
because
they
are
knowne
to
be
no
other
then
Idolaters
,
that
inhabite
all
those
parts
of
the
other
continents
,
that
neighbour
most
towards
them
,
from
whom
it
is
likely
,
they
should
haue
receaued
the
change
of
their
religion
,
if
any
were
:
for
first
,
in
Asia
,
both
India
,
and
the
Islands
of
the
Indian
sea
,
whereof
some
lie
close
on
the
South
continent
.
Secondly
,
in
Afrique
,
the
regions
about
the
Cape
of
Buona
Speranza
.
And
Thirdly
,
in
America
,
the
Countries
that
border
on
Magaglians
Straite
,
which
are
the
neerest
neighbours
to
the
foresaid
continent
of
the
South
,
are
knowne
to
bee
all
ouerspred
with
Idolaters
.
Now
that
the
South
continent
is
no
lesse
then
I
before
esteemed
it
,
namely
,
then
that
of
Asia
,
Afrique
and
Europe
altogether
,
although
I
might
be
probablie
induced
to
beleeue
so
,
because
it
is
well
knowne
,
both
(
touching
latitude
)
to
approach
in
some
parts
neere
the
equator
,
and
(
touching
longitude
)
to
runne
along
in
a
continuall
circuite
about
the
earth
,
fronting
both
the
other
continents
:
Yet
haue
I
also
another
reason
of
more
certaine
importance
,
to
perswade
me
:
Namely
,
because
it
is
well
knowne
,
that
the
land
to
the
North
side
of
the
line
,
in
the
other
continents
(
the
old
and
new
world
)
yet
altogether
is
at
least
foure
times
as
large
as
that
part
of
them
which
lieth
to
the
South
.
Now
,
forasmuch
as
it
is
certaine
,
For
touching
the
first
of
these
suppositions
.
It
is
the
propertie
of
water
,
euer
to
fall
that
way
,
where
it
findeth
decliuitie
.
Wherefore
,
if
the
water
,
in
the
vpper
face
of
it
,
were
higher
in
one
place
then
in
another
,
it
would
necessarily
fall
,
from
the
heigher
position
to
the
lower
,
because
it
is
heauie
and
flexible
,
&
hath
nothing
in
the
open
and
free
Sea
,
to
let
or
hinder
it
.
And
consequently
,
would
neuer
rest
setled
and
stable
,
till
the
face
of
it
were
leuelled
,
in
an
euen
distance
from
the
center
.
first
by
Archimedes
his
rule
,
Archimed
.
de
Insidentib
.
Aquae
l.
1.
Propos.
2.
that
the
face
of
the
sea
,
is
in
all
parts
naturally
leuell
,
or
equally
distant
from
the
center
of
the
water
,
for
which
equalitie
,
it
hath
obtained
the
name
of
Aequer
&
Aqua
,
[
](A16718-e32660-b)*
*
Varro
.
l.
●
.
de
Ling.
Latina
.
Isidor
.
Origi●
.
l.
3.
c.
12
&
Alij
.
as
Grammarians
say
:
And
touching
the
second
if
the
earth
were
vnequallie
poysed
on
opposite
sides
of
the
center
,
then
must
it
follow
,
that
the
least
and
lighter
masse
of
the
earth
should
presse
downe
as
forciblie
,
as
the
greater
and
weightier
,
because
it
attaineth
the
center
as
well
as
it
.
But
if
it
be
graunted
,
which
reason
doth
inforce
,
that
the
weightier
part
of
the
earth
,
should
presse
downeward
,
with
greater
force
,
and
with
more
right
challenge
the
center
,
then
the
lighter
part
:
it
must
follow
,
that
the
lighter
masse
or
side
of
the
earth
,
must
yeelde
and
giue
place
to
the
weightier
,
so
farre
,
till
the
center
of
that
whole
masse
of
the
earth
take
possession
of
the
center
of
the
world
(
for
till
then
,
one
side
will
be
still
heauier
then
the
other
)
and
so
the
opposite
halfes
of
the
earth
,
in
respect
of
heauinesse
,
be
brought
on
all
sides
,
about
the
center
,
vnto
a
perfect
equilibration
.
And
secondly
,
by
the
Philosophers
knowne
rule
,
that
the
earth
is
equally
poised
on
both
sides
of
her
owne
center
.
And
the
third
may
be
established
,
by
manifest
demonstration
.
Because
,
a
clod
of
earth
,
suffered
to
fall
from
any
point
of
the
aire
,
wheresoeuer
,
on
the
face
of
the
sea
(
the
same
doth
water
,
falling
on
euen
&
plaine
land
)
when
all
is
calme
,
and
the
aire
not
troubled
with
windes
,
nor
the
sea
with
waues
,
will
descend
by
a
perpendicular
line
,
on
the
face
of
the
water
.
In
such
sort
I
say
,
that
the
line
by
which
it
falleth
maketh
exactly
equall
and
right
angles
on
all
sides
,
with
the
face
of
the
water
whereon
it
falleth
.
Therefore
it
is
manifest
,
that
the
earth
so
falling
,
tendeth
directly
to
the
center
of
the
water
Because
no
straight
line
insisteth
perpendicularly
,
on
the
face
or
circumference
of
any
special
body
(
as
the
water
is
)
except
only
those
that
proceede
directly
to
the
center
of
the
sphaire
:
But
certaine
it
is
,
that
the
earth
is
withal
directly
carried
toward
it
own
center
,
therefore
there
is
but
one
common
center
of
the
water
and
of
the
earth
.
And
thirdly
,
that
the
center
of
the
earth
&
of
the
water
are
all
one
(
both
of
them
being
indeede
no
other
than
the
center
of
the
world
)
which
though
some
phantastical
heads
haue
called
into
question
yet
no
sound
philosopher
euer
doubted
of
:
It
followeth
thereupon
,
that
the
earth
should
in
answerable
measure
and
proportion
,
lift
it selfe
and
appeare
aboue
the
face
of
the
sea
,
on
the
south
side
of
the
line
,
as
it
doth
on
the
north
.
And
consequently
,
that
what
is
wanting
in
the
South
parts
of
the
two
foresaid
continents
towards
the
counteruailing
of
the
North
parts
(
which
is
about
three
fiue
parts
of
both
the
other
continents
laied
together
)
must
of
necessitie
be
supplied
in
the
continents
of
the
South
.
And
yet
I
omit
all
the
land
,
that
may
be
about
the
Arctique
Pole
,
beyond
the
Scythian
or
Sarmatian
sea
,
which
must
be
also
counterpoysed
in
that
Antarchtique
continent
,
for
nothing
comes
within
the
compasse
of
my
vnderstanding
,
to
bee
hereto
replied
,
except
any
would
perhaps
imagine
,
that
either
the
sea
on
the
South
side
of
the
equator
,
is
verie
shallow
,
or
that
the
land
of
that
continent
,
may
be
much
higher
aboue
the
face
of
the
sea
,
them
the
land
of
the
other
two
(
&
so
equal
in
masse
,
though
lesse
in
circuit
)
or
that
the
earth
on
the
south
side
of
the
Equator
,
should
be
of
a
more
ponderous
disposition
,
than
on
the
North
,
in
which
cases
,
some
compensation
of
weightines
,
may
be
made
for
the
want
of
extention
.
But
of
these
three
,
the
experience
of
sailers
euidently
refelleth
the
first
,
who
in
equall
distance
from
the
land
,
obserue
an
equall
deepenesse
of
the
sea
,
in
both
South
and
North
latitude
.
And
neither
is
there
any
experience
,
nor
good
reason
that
can
be
alleadged
to
establish
either
of
the
later
:
which
,
but
that
I
haue
alreadie
too
much
offended
by
digressions
,
I
could
prooue
I
doubt
not
against
all
exception
.
But
this
for
a
conclusion
to
this
discourse
,
I
dare
pronounce
touching
that
South
continent
,
that
it
wil
certainely
be
found
(
in
the
after
times
,
when
it
shall
be
better
discouered
)
much
larger
then
any
globe
or
map
hitherto
extant
,
hath
represented
it
.
Such
therfore
(
as
I
haue
declared
)
is
the
general
state
of
Christianity
at
this
present
in
the
world
,
&
the
proportion
of
it
to
other
religions
.
But
because
you
require
yet
further
to
be
specially
informed
of
the
diuers
sorts
and
sects
of
Christians
that
are
abroad
in
the
world
,
and
withall
of
their
diuers
regions
and
religions
,
at
least
of
those
principall
characters
of
their
religion
,
wherin
they
specially
differ
each
from
other
,
I
will
here
set
downe
my
second
period
,
touching
the
generall
differences
of
religions
,
and
of
the
seuerall
parts
of
the
world
where
they
are
maintained
:
and
will
now
proceed
to
that
particular
consideration
touching
the
sects
of
Christianity
,
and
indeuour
to
giue
you
the
best
satisfaction
that
my
poore
reading
,
and
obseruation
may
inable
me
to
performe
.
Of
the
dinerse
sorts
or
sects
of
Christians
in
the
world
,
and
of
their
seuerall
regions
.
And
first
of
the
Grecians
.
CHAP.
XV.
THE
sects
therefore
of
Christians
,
that
carrie
name
&
report
at
this
present
in
the
World
,
beside
the
Protestants
and
Romans
in
the
West
,
of
whom
I
will
bee
silent
,
because
you
know
their
condition
better
then
my selfe
,
are
¹
the
Grecians
,
²
Melchites
or
Syrians
,
³
Georgians
,
⁴
Moscouites
&
Russians
,
⁵
Nestorians
,
⁶
Indians
termed
the
Christians
of
St.
Thomas
,
⁷
Iacobites
,
⁸
Cophites
,
⁹
Armenians
,
10
Habassines
,
and
11
Maronites
.
Of
which
eleuen
sects
,
there
be
three
Principall
,
namely
the
Grecians
,
Iacobites
and
Nestorians
,
with
which
the
rest
haue
,
for
the
most
part
,
either
some
dependance
and
deriuation
,
or
neerer
conuenience
and
agreement
.
The
Grecians
acknowledge
obedience
to
the
Patriarch
of
Constantinople
,
vnder
whose
Iurisdiction
are
in
Asia
,
Bellon
.
Obseruation
.
l.
1.
c.
35.
the
Christians
of
Natolia
(
excepting
Armenia
the
lesse
,
and
Cilicia
)
of
Circassia
,
of
Mengrelia
,
and
of
Russia
:
As
in
Europe
also
,
the
Christians
of
Greece
,
Macedon
,
Epirus
,
Thrace
,
Bulgaria
,
Rascia
,
Seruia
,
Bosina
,
Walachia
,
Moldauia
,
Podolia
,
and
Moscouia
:
together
with
all
the
Islands
of
the
Aegean
sea
,
and
others
about
Greece
,
as
farre
as
Corfu
,
beside
a
good
part
of
the
large
dominion
of
Polonia
,
and
those
parts
of
Dalmatia
,
and
of
Croatia
,
that
are
subiect
to
the
Turkish
dominion
.
Of
which
great
extendment
of
the
Greeke
Patriarchs
iurisdiction
,
if
you
demand
the
reason
:
I
haue
obserued
sundry
occasions
,
from
whence
it
hath
proceeded
.
For
first
,
his
originall
or
Primitiue
authority
assigned
,
or
rather
confirmed
to
him
,
(
as
Bishop
of
the
Jmperiall
citie
)
by
the
councell
of
Chalcedon
;
contained
all
the
Prouinces
of
Thrace
,
Concil.
Chalcedone●s
.
can.
23.
and
of
Anatolia
,
(
Isauria
,
and
Cilicia
,
onelie
excepted
,
which
belonged
to
the
Patriarch
of
Antiochia
)
and
they
were
in
all
,
no
lesse
then
28.
Romane
Prouinces
.
Secondly
,
the
voluntary
submission
of
the
Grecians
vpon
their
separation
from
the
latin
Church
,
greatly
increased
it
:
for
thereby
not
onely
Greece
,
Macedon
,
●spirus
,
Candie
,
and
the
Isles
about
Greece
(
in
all
seuen
Prouinces
)
came
vnder
his
obedience
,
but
also
Sicil●e
,
and
the
East
point
of
Italie
,
named
Calabria
,
reuolted
from
the
Bishop
of
Rome
,
and
for
a
long
time
,
pertained
to
the
Patriarch
of
Constantinople
,
Nouell
.
Leon.
De
ordine
Metropolitan
in
Lib.
2.
To●ri
L●uris
.
as
appeareth
in
the
Nouell
of
Leo
Sophus
touching
the
order
and
precedence
of
Metropolitans
,
belonging
to
that
Patriarchie
.
And
by
the
like
ordination
set
downe
by
Andronicus
Paloeologus
,
in
Curopalates
,
Orientalis
.
Curopalat
.
de
Official
.
Palat.
Constantinop
.
prope
sinem
.
where
wee
find
,
the
Metropolitans
of
Syracusa
,
and
Catana
in
Sicilie
,
of
Rhegium
,
Seueriana
,
Rosia
,
and
Hydruntum
in
Calabria
,
registred
among
the
Metropolitans
of
that
Iurisdiction
.
Thirdly
it
was
inlarged
by
the
conuersion
of
the
north
regions
to
Christian
Religion
,
performed
by
his
Suffragans
and
ministers
,
euen
from
Thrace
to
[
](A16718-e33430-b)*
*
Cromer
.
de
.
script
.
Polon
.
L.
1.
Herdenst
de
Bell.
Mosc
.
l.
1.
Gu●guin
.
Descript●on
.
Moscou
.
c.
2.
Russia
and
the
Scythian
Sea
(
the
like
whereof
was
the
principall
cause
,
that
so
farre
inlarged
the
Bishop
of
Rome
his
Iurisdiction
in
the
west
parts
of
Europe
.
)
And
fourthly
,
by
the
Turks
conquests
made
vpon
the
Westerne
countries
,
subiect
before
to
the
Bishop
of
Rome
:
all
which
,
while
partly
,
the
former
Bishops
and
Pastors
fled
,
to
auoid
the
Turks
oppression
(
like
the
hireling
that
forsaketh
the
flocke
,
when
he
seeth
the
wolfe
comming
)
and
partly
,
while
the
Patriarch
of
Constantinople
,
to
supply
that
default
,
was
faine
to
prouide
them
of
new
ministers
,
they
haue
beene
by
little
and
little
brought
&
trained
to
the
Greeke
religion
.
Now
as
touching
the
proper
characters
of
their
religion
,
I
must
,
for
the
better
designing
and
remembring
of
them
,
set
before
me
some
instance
or
patterne
,
to
compare
it
,
and
other
sects
of
Religion
withall
:
And
that
is
most
fit
to
be
the
Romane
Church
,
both
because
their
differences
with
that
Church
specially
,
are
in
writers
most
obserued
.
So
that
,
by
that
meanes
my
discourse
may
be
the
shorter
,
and
yet
no
lesse
perspicuous
to
you
,
that
know
the
opinions
of
the
Romane
Church
so
well
.
The
principall
characters
then
of
the
Grecians
religion
,
(
for
none
but
the
principall
you
require
,
and
to
mention
euery
slender
difference
of
ceremonies
,
would
be
but
tedious
,
and
fruitlesse
,
(
and
is
beside
without
my
compasse
)
are
these
that
follow
.
-
1.
[
](A16718-e33500-b)1
1
Concil.
Florent
.
Sess.
18.
&
sequentib
.
Ierem.
Patriarch
Constant
in
Resp.
1.
ad
Germanos
.
cap.
1.
That
the
holy
Ghost
proceedeth
from
the
father
onely
,
not
from
the
sonne
.
-
2.
[
](A16718-e33520-b)2
2
Concil.
Florentin
.
prope
Initium
.
Respons.
Graecer
ad
cardinal
.
Guisan
.
Quest.
9.
That
there
is
no
purgatory
fire
.
-
3.
[
](A16718-e33540-b)3
3
Resp.
cad.
Graecor
.
Q.
5.
Ierem.
Patr.
Resp.
1.
cap.
1.
That
they
celebrate
the
Sacrament
of
the
Eucharist
in
both
kinds
.
-
4.
[
](A16718-e33560-b)4
4
Ierem.
Resp.
cad.
c.
10.
&
21
And
in
leauened
bread
,
and
thinke
it
cannot
be
effectually
consecrated
in
bread
vnleauened
.
-
5.
[
](A16718-e33580-b)5
5
Posseuin
.
de
Rebus
Mosco
.
uiae
pag.
43.
That
they
reiect
extreame
vnction
.
-
6.
[
](A16718-e33600-b)6
6
Id.
lib.
citat
.
pag.
40.
And
confirmation
.
-
7.
[
](A16718-e33620-b)7
7
Ierem.
Respons.
cap.
21.
That
they
deny
the
soules
of
holy
men
to
enioy
the
blissefull
vision
of
God
,
or
the
soules
of
wicked
men
to
be
tormented
in
hel
,
before
the
day
of
iudgement
.
Th.
a
Ies.
de
Conu
.
gent.
l.
6.
c.
1.
-
8.
[
](A16718-e33660-b)8
8
Tom.
vnionis
inter
nouel
.
Constantin
.
Porphyrogen
.
in
Tomo
1
Tur.
Orientalis
.
lib.
2.
Zonar
.
Annal.
Tom.
3.
in
Im
pe
Leon's
philosophi
.
That
they
admit
Priests
marriages
,
namely
,
so
that
they
may
keepe
their
wiues
married
before
their
ordination
,
but
must
not
marry
after
ordination
.
-
9.
[
](A16718-e33680-b)9
9
Resp.
Graecor
.
ad
Guisan
Quest
8.
Posse●i●
.
de
reb.
Moscou
.
That
they
prohibite
vtterly
the
fourth
marriage
,
as
a
thing
intolerable
.
Insomuch
,
that
(
as
we
find
recorded
)
their
Patriarchs
haue
for
that
cause
excommunicated
some
of
their
Emperours
,
although
they
had
no
issue
left
of
their
three
former
marriages
.
-
[
](A16718-e33700-b)10
10
Posseu
l●b
.
〈◊〉
pag.
41
et
2.
●●llamont
on
●oyag
.
l
2.
c
21
10.
That
they
reiect
the
religious
vse
of
massie
images
,
or
statues
,
admitting
yet
pictures
or
plaine
images
in
their
Churches
.
-
[
](A16718-e33740-b)11
11
Vil●am
.
on
Vo●ag
.
l.
2.
c.
21
●t
Alij
.
11.
That
they
solemnize
Saturday
(
the
old
sabbath
)
festiually
,
and
eat
therin
flesh
,
forbidding
as
vnlawfull
to
fast
any
Saturday
in
the
yeare
,
except
Easter
Eue.
-
[
](A16718-e33760-b)12
12
Posseuin
.
l.
〈◊〉
p.
42.
12.
That
they
obserue
foure
lents
in
the
yeare
.
-
[
](A16718-e33780-b)13
13
N●lus
Episcop.
Thes●al
.
de
Primatu
Papae
Barlaam
de
primatu
Papae
et
Alij
.
Leo.
9.
epist.
1.
〈◊〉
Episcop.
Constantinop
.
13.
That
they
eate
not
of
any
thing
strangled
,
nor
of
bloud
.
-
[
](A16718-e33800-b)14
14
Acrican
.
et
in
pluribus
〈◊〉
.
S●●●bert
.
in
Ch●onico
ad
An.
●●5●
.
Possen
.
de
Reb
Mosco
.
p
38.
〈…〉
.
14.
And
lastly
,
that
they
deny
the
Bishop
of
Romes
primacy
,
and
(
reputing
him
&
his
Church
for
schismaticks
)
exclude
them
from
their
communion
:
And
so
haue
done
,
as
I
finde
in
Leo
the
ninth
his
Epistles
,
and
in
Sigebert
,
aboue
these
500.
years
,
And
if
you
desire
to
see
more
differences
of
the
Greeke
and
Romane
Church
,
you
may
see
them
,
(
but
they
are
of
lesse
importance
then
those
I
haue
related
in
Posseuines
booke
of
the
matters
of
Moscouia
.
Of
the
Syrians
or
Melchites
.
CHAP.
XVI
.
SYrians
are
the
same
,
that
in
some
Histories
are
termed
Melchites
:
beeing
esteemed
for
their
number
the
[
](A16718-e33930-b)*
*
Botar
.
Relat.
pa.
3.
l.
2.
ca.
de
Melchiti
.
greatest
sect
of
Christians
in
the
Orient
.
The
first
,
[
](A16718-e33940-b)*
*
Postel
.
in
Descript.
Syriae
.
pag.
30.
being
properly
the
name
of
their
nation
,
And
the
second
noting
the
property
of
their
religion
.
Surians
they
were
named
(
to
let
vaine
fancies
go
)
of
the
Citty
of
Tyre
,
which
in
the
ancient
language
of
the
Phoenicians
,
Gellius
.
l.
14.
c.
6.
Festus
in
D●●ctione
sarra
▪
was
called
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
.
and
certainelie
,
that
Tyre
was
anciently
called
Sarra
,
is
recorded
by
the
[
](A16718-e34040-b)*
*
For
Pos●els
phantasie
deriuing
Suria
from
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
is
meerelie
vaine
,
&
beeing
neuer
so
named
in
the
Hebrew
tongue
,
but
alwaies
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
,
by
which
name
also
it
seemeth
anciently
to
haue
bene
knowne
,
euen
among
the
Grecians
for
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
mentioned
in
Homer
,
are
no
other
,
as
Possidonius
in
[
](A16718-e34120-b)*
*
Strad
.
l.
26.
in
fine
.
Strabo
expounds
him
,
then
the
Syrians
:
Strabo
himselfe
also
recording
in
other
places
,
that
the
Syrians
[
](A16718-e34160-b)*
*
Vitria
histor.
Oriental
.
c.
43
Niger
in
commenta●
.
4.
Asiae
.
Postell
.
in
descrip.
Syriae
.
pag.
50.
were
called
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
in
his
time
:
And
,
that
the
[
](A16718-e34200-b)*
*
Strad
.
l.
13.
non
long
ante
fine
.
naturall
inhabitants
of
Syria
,
so
called
themselues
.
Yet
neuerthelesse
they
were
vulgarly
knowne
by
the
name
of
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
among
the
Grecians
,
because
the
Citie
of
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
,
beeing
the
maine
mart
towne
of
all
those
parts
,
was
the
place
,
where
they
had
their
trade
&
commerce
,
with
those
Aramites
.
But
when
the
Phoenician
tongue
began
to
degenerate
into
Chaldee
,
then
the
name
of
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
was
conuerted
into
Tur
,
the
letter
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
beeing
turned
into
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
&
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
in
sound
made
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
.
As
[
](A16718-e34320-b)*
*
Vid.
Scaliger
as
Fest.
in
dictione
Sarra
.
et
Guidon
.
Fabric
.
in
Grammatic
.
Chaldaea
&c.
they
that
obserue
the
differences
of
the
Hebrew
and
the
Chaldee
,
and
the
transitions
of
the
first
into
the
latter
,
know
to
be
ordinary
.
Roman
writers
:
and
it
is
also
acknowledged
by
[
](A16718-e34330-b)*
*
Strab.
l.
1
post
med.
Burchard
.
descr
.
terrae
Sanctae
.
Vitriacus
,
Niger
,
Postell
and
others
,
that
the
place
of
Tyre
,
(
for
the
city
was
vtterlie
ruined
three
hundred
yeares
ago
)
is
still
called
the
port
of
Sur
,
Hieron
.
in
lib.
de
Nominib
.
Hebraicis
.
Plin.
l.
5.
c.
19.
which
name
it
seemeth
to
haue
obtained
,
either
because
it
was
built
on
a
Rocke
,
for
so
Burchardus
that
viewed
the
place
hath
obserued
)
which
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
in
the
Phoenician
toung
signifies
:
or
else
as
Hierome
deriues
it
,
of
the
straitnesse
and
scarcenes
of
roome
,
as
being
seated
in
a
smal
Iland
(
but
19.
miles
in
circuit
as
Plinie
noteth
)
a
small
Territory
for
such
a
City
:
or
perhaps
,
because
it
was
the
strongest
fortres
(
for
that
also
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
importeth
)
of
all
those
Regions
,
as
being
founded
on
a
rocke
,
enuironed
with
the
sea
,
(
for
it
was
before
[
](A16718-e34460-b)*
*
Q
Curt.
l.
4.
Alexanders
time
[
](A16718-e34480-b)*
*
Plin.
loc.
citabo
.
700.
paces
distant
from
the
firme
land
)
mightily
strengthened
by
fortifications
of
Art
,
populous
as
beeing
the
Metropolis
of
Phoenicia
,
and
exceeding
rich
as
sometime
the
Cittie
of
greatest
traffique
in
the
World
.
Of
this
city
then
,
both
the
region
and
inhabitants
of
Suria
obtained
their
names
:
but
Melchitae
as
I
saide
they
were
termed
,
meerely
in
respect
of
their
religion
,
wherein
namely
they
altogether
followed
the
examples
and
decrees
of
the
Emperours
.
For
whereas
after
the
Councell
of
Chalcedon
,
infinite
perplexity
and
trouble
began
to
arise
in
the
East
parts
,
principally
about
the
opinion
of
Eutyches
and
Dioscorus
,
of
one
only
nature
in
Christ
,
which
that
councel
had
condemned
,
but
notwithstanding
found
many
that
maintained
it
,
and
reiected
the
Councell
,
in
those
Easterne
countries
:
And
thereupon
the
Emperour
Leo
began
to
exact
,
(
as
diuers
other
of
his
Successours
afterward
did
)
the
suffrages
and
subscriptions
of
the
Easterne
Bishops
,
for
the
better
establishment
of
the
Councel
.
Niceph.
Callist
Histor.
Ecclesiast.
l.
18.
c.
52.
Then
began
they
that
embraced
and
approued
the
authority
of
that
Councell
,
because
they
followed
the
Emperours
decrees
,
made
in
behalfe
of
it
,
to
be
termed
by
their
aduersaries
,
Melchitae
,
of
Melchi
,
saith
Nicephorus
,
(
rather
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
)
which
in
the
speech
of
Syria
signifieth
a
King
:
(
as
one
would
say
of
the
Kings
Religion
)
whereas
they
that
opposed
themselues
to
the
Councell
,
were
distracted
into
no
lesse
then
twelue
seueral
sects
,
and
not
long
after
into
many
more
,
as
the
same
[
](A16718-e34630-b)*
*
Lib.
18.
c.
45.
Nicephorus
hath
recorded
.
Now
although
the
Syrians
or
Melchites
,
are
for
their
religion
meerely
of
the
Grecians
opinions
.
As
:
-
1.
That
the
Holy
Ghost
proceedeth
only
from
the
father
.
1.2.3.4.5
.
Iacob
a
Vitriaco
Hist.
Orient
.
ca.
75.
-
2.
That
they
celebrate
diuine
seruice
as
solemnly
on
the
Sabbath
,
as
on
the
Lords
day
.
-
3.
That
they
keepe
that
day
festiuall
,
eating
therein
flesh
,
and
fast
no
Saturday
in
the
yeare
but
Easter
Eue.
-
[
](A16718-e34740-b)4
4
Villamont
●n
voyag
.
l.
2.
c.
22.
4.
That
their
Priests
and
Deacons
contract
not
marriage
,
being
already
in
Orders
,
but
yet
retaine
their
wiues
before
married
.
-
5.
That
the
fourth
Matrimony
is
vtterlie
vnlawfull
.
-
[
](A16718-e34770-b)6.7.8.
6.7.8.
Villamont
.
loco
citato
.
6.
That
they
communicate
the
Eucharist
in
both
kinds
.
-
7.
That
they
acknowledge
not
Purgatory
.
-
8.
That
they
obserue
foure
Lents
in
the
yeare
,
&c.
And
in
a
word
,
although
they
be
meerely
[
](A16718-e34800-b)*
*
Vitriac
.
loco
iam
citato
.
Salignici●
.
Itiner
.
Tom.
8.
c.
1
Bamugart
.
Peregrin
.
l.
2.
c.
9.
〈◊〉
Alij
.
of
the
same
Religion
&
communion
with
the
Grecians
:
yet
are
they
not
of
the
iurisdiction
of
the
Patriarch
of
Constantinople
,
but
of
the
Archbishop
of
Damascus
,
by
the
title
of
the
Patriarch
of
Antiochia
.
For
Antiochia
it selfe
(
where
yet
the
name
of
Christians
was
first
heard
in
the
world
,
&
was
long
knowne
by
the
name
of
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
)
lying
at
this
present
in
a
manner
wast
,
or
broken
and
dispersed
into
small
villages
,
of
which
,
onely
one
,
of
about
60
houses
,
with
a
smal
Temple
belongeth
to
Christians
,
[
](A16718-e34870-b)*
*
Bellon
.
ob●eru
.
l.
c.
Chitrae
.
de
stat.
Ecclesiar
.
pag.
5.
the
Patriarchall
seat
was
translated
thence
to
Damascus
(
where
as
is
reported
are
Bote●
.
Relat.
pa.
3.
l.
2.
c.
de
Maro●●ti
.
Cru●
.
Tur●o
.
grar
.
l.
4
p.
296.
ex
relatione
Gerlachij
.
aboue
1000
houses
of
Christians
)
and
there
remaineth
.
For
although
[
](A16718-e34940-b)*
*
Boter
loco
〈◊〉
citato
.
the
Patriachs
of
the
Maronites
,
and
of
the
Iacobites
,
whereof
the
former
keepeth
residence
in
Libanus
,
and
the
later
in
Mesopotamia
,
intitle
themselues
Patriarchs
of
Antiochia
,
and
by
the
Christians
of
their
owne
sects
,
bee
so
acknowledged
:
yet
do
the
Melchites
,
who
retaine
the
auncient
religion
of
Syria
,
acknowledge
none
for
patriarche
,
but
the
Archbishop
of
Damascus
,
reputing
both
the
other
for
schismaticks
,
as
hauing
departed
from
the
obedience
and
communion
of
the
true
Patriarch
.
And
yet
,
beside
all
these
,
a
fourth
there
is
,
of
the
Popes
designation
,
that
vsurpeth
the
title
of
the
Patriarche
of
Antiochia
.
For
[
](A16718-e35030-b)*
*
Boter
.
Relat.
p.
3.
l.
1.
ca.
del
Patriarcha
latino
d●
Constantinopoli
.
euer
since
the
Latines
surprised
Constantinople
,
(
which
was
about
the
yeare
1200
)
&
held
the
possession
of
the
east
Empire
about
70.
yeares
,
al
which
time
the
Patriarchs
of
Constantinople
,
were
consecrated
by
the
Pope
:
As
also
,
since
the
holy
Land
,
and
the
Prouinces
about
it
,
were
in
the
hands
of
the
Christian
Princes
of
the
West
,
which
began
to
bee
about
An.
1100.
And
so
continued
about
80.
yeares
,
during
which
season
the
Patriarchs
of
Antiochia
also
,
and
of
Ierusalem
,
were
of
the
Popes
consecration
:
Euer
since
then
I
say
,
the
Church
of
Rome
,
hath
,
and
doth
still
create
successiuely
,
imaginary
or
titular
Patriarchs
(
without
iurisdiction
)
of
Constantinople
,
Antiochia
,
Ierusalem
and
Alexandria
,
so
loth
is
the
Pope
,
to
loose
the
remembrance
of
any
superiority
or
title
:
that
hee
hath
once
compassed
.
Of
the
Georgians
,
Circassians
and
Mengrellians
.
CHAP.
XVII
.
THe
Georgians
inhabite
the
Country
,
that
was
anciently
named
Iberia
,
betwixt
the
Euxine
and
the
Caspian
Seas
:
inclosed
with
Sheruan
(
Media
)
East
:
with
Mengrelia
,
(
Colchis
)
West
:
with
Turcomania
(
Armenia
the
greater
)
South
:
[
](A16718-e35150-b)*
*
Volaterran
.
l.
11.
c.
de
Sect.
Syriae
Prateo
l.
de
Sectis
.
Hae●et
.
in
Verbo
.
Georgiani
.
&
Alij
.
And
with
Albania
(
Zuiria
)
North.
The
vulgar
opinion
of
Historians
is
,
that
they
haue
obtained
the
name
of
Georgians
,
from
their
deuotion
to
St.
George
,
whom
they
principally
honour
for
their
Patron
:
and
whose
Image
they
alwayes
beare
in
their
military
Ensignes
.
But
yet
,
(
as
I
take
it
)
this
vulgar
opinion
is
but
vulgar
errour
:
Mela
l.
1.
c.
2.
Plin.
l.
6.
c.
13.
because
I
finde
mention
made
of
the
nation
of
the
Georgians
in
those
parts
,
both
in
Mela
and
Plinie
,
afore
St.
George
was
borne
,
whosoeuer
hee
was
.
Touching
the
properties
of
whose
religion
this
may
be
sufficient
to
obserue
for
all
:
That
[
](A16718-e35260-b)*
*
Paul
.
Venet.
lib.
1
ca.
14.
it
is
the
same
both
in
substance
and
ceremonies
with
that
of
the
Grecians
[
](A16718-e35280-b)*
*
Chitrae
.
de
statu
Ecclesiat
.
pag
23
&
.
50.
&
Alij
.
who
yet
are
in
no
sort
subiect
(
neither
euer
were
)
to
the
Patriarch
of
Constantinople
:
but
all
their
Bishops
(
being
18
)
professe
absolute
obedience
to
their
owne
Metropolitan
,
without
any
other
higher
dependance
or
relation
.
Who
yet
keepeth
residence
farre
off
,
in
the
Monastry
of
St.
Katherine
in
the
Hill
of
Sinai
.
Prateo
.
de
Haeret.
sect.
verbo
Georgiani
.
Bernard
.
Lucemburg
.
in
Catalog
.
Haeret.
in
Georgiani
.
Next
these
,
I
must
speake
a
little
of
their
next
neigbours
,
the
Mengrelians
and
Circassians
,
(
Colchi
and
Zychi
they
were
anciently
called
)
seated
betweene
the
Georgians
and
the
Riuer
Tanais
,
along
the
Coast
of
Maeotis
and
the
Euxine
sea
,
as
being
also
Christians
of
the
Greeke
communion
,
and
beside
,
[
](A16718-e35430-b)*
*
Bellon
.
Obseru.
l.
1.
c.
35.
Michou
.
de
Sarmatia
.
l.
1.
c.
7.
of
the
Patriarch
of
Constantinople
his
obedience
,
and
[
](A16718-e35450-b)*
*
Bellon
.
Obseru.
l.
1.
c.
35.
Michou
.
de
Sarmatia
.
l.
1.
c.
7.
conuerted
by
his
Ministers
Cyrillus
and
Methodius
,
to
Christian
religion
.
Which
religion
notwithstanding
at
this
present
is
exercised
among
them
,
not
without
some
deprauation
,
and
mixture
of
strange
phantasies
,
Interiano
della
vita
de
Zychi
cap.
1.
Anan
.
Fabrica
del
Mondo
Tratt
.
2.
Boter
.
par
3
▪
l.
2.
c.
for
the
Circassians
baptise
not
their
Children
till
the
eight
yeare
,
and
enter
not
into
the
Church
,
(
the
Gentlemen
especially
)
till
the
sixtieth
(
or
as
others
say
,
till
the
fortieth
)
yeare
,
but
heare
diuine
seruice
standing
without
the
Temple
,
that
is
to
say
,
till
through
age
,
they
grow
vnable
to
continue
their
rapines
and
robberies
,
to
which
sinne
,
that
Nation
is
exceedingly
addicted
.
So
deuiding
their
life
betwixt
sinne
and
deuotion
,
dedicating
their
youth
to
rapine
,
and
their
old
age
to
repentance
.
〈◊〉
Metropolitan
.
Russ.
in
epist.
ad
Episcop.
Rom.
apud
Sigismund
.
de
Rebus
Muscou
.
pag.
31.
Of
the
Muscouites
and
Russians
.
CHAP.
XVIII
.
THe
Muscouites
and
Russians
as
they
were
conuerted
to
Christianitie
by
the
Grecians
.
Zonar
.
Annal.
Tom.
3.
Cromer
.
de
reb.
Polon
.
l.
3.
so
haue
they
euer
since
continued
of
the
Greeke
communion
and
religion
.
Guagin
.
descript.
Muscou
.
c.
2.
Sacran
.
de
error
.
b.
Ruthenor
c.
2.
1.
Denying
the
Holy
Ghost
to
proceede
from
the
Sonne
.
2.
[
](A16718-e35640-b)2
2
Sigism
.
lib.
citato
.
pag.
41
Sacran
.
de
Relig.
Ruthenor
.
cap.
2.
Scarga
.
Polon
.
l.
3.
c.
2.
Reiecting
Purgatorie
,
but
yet
praying
for
the
dead
.
3.
[
](A16718-e35660-b)3
3
Scargas
.
Polon
.
l.
3.
c.
2.
Guaguin
.
descrip.
Moscou
.
c.
2.
Beleeuing
that
holy
men
enioy
not
the
presence
of
God
afore
the
Resurrection
.
4.
[
](A16718-e35680-b)4
4
Ioan
Metropol
.
Russ
vbi
supra
pag.
32.
Guagin
descr
.
Muscou
.
ca.
2.
Celebrating
the
sacrament
of
the
Eucharist
,
with
leauened
bread
,
and
requiring
warme
water
to
mingle
with
the
wine
.
5.
[
](A16718-e35700-b)5
5
Sigism
.
loc.
citato
.
pag.
40.
And
communicating
in
both
kindes
,
6.
[
](A16718-e35720-b)6
6
Sigism
.
loc.
citato
pag.
40.
Guaguin
.
loc.
citato
.
But
mingling
both
together
in
the
Chalice
,
and
distributing
it
together
with
a
spoone
.
7.
[
](A16718-e35750-b)7
7
Guaguin
.
Ibid
.
And
receiuing
children
after
7.
years
old
to
the
communion
,
saying
that
at
that
age
they
begin
to
sinne
against
God
.
8.
[
](A16718-e35770-b)8
8
Ioan.
Metropol
.
Russ.
vbi
supra
.
apud
.
Sigism
.
pag.
31.
Guagin
.
loc.
citato
.
Sacran
.
de
errorib
.
Ruthenor
.
c.
2.
Omitting
Confirmation
by
the
Bishop
.
9.
[
](A16718-e35790-b)9
9
Sacran
.
loc.
citato
.
Denying
the
spirituall
efficacie
of
extreame
vnction
.
10.
[
](A16718-e35810-b)10
10
Sigism
.
lib.
alleg
.
pag.
47.
Posseuin
.
de
Rebus
Moscou
.
pag.
2.
Excluding
the
fourth
mariage
as
vtterlie
vnlawfull
:
whereas
they
approoue
not
the
second
,
as
perfectly
lawfull
,
Guaguin
.
Descript.
Moscou
.
cap.
2.
but
onely
permit
it
,
but
tolerate
not
the
third
,
except
on
very
important
considerations
.
11.
[
](A16718-e35840-b)11
11
Sacran
de
errorib
.
Ruthenor
.
c.
2.
Dissoluing
mariage
by
diuorcement
vpon
euery
light
occasion
or
displeasure
.
12.
[
](A16718-e35860-b)12
12
Sigism
.
lib.
citat
.
pag.
28.
Scarga
.
de
vno
pastor
l.
3.
c.
2.
Admitting
neither
Deacons
nor
Priests
to
Orders
,
except
they
be
maried
:
but
yet
[
](A16718-e35870-b)*
*
Possein
.
de
Reb.
Moscou
.
pag.
1.
Guaguin
.
loc.
citat
.
prohibiting
mariage
to
them
being
actually
in
Orders
.
13
,
[
](A16718-e35890-b)13
13
Posseu
.
lib.
allegato
.
p.
44.
Reiecting
carued
or
massie
Images
,
but
admitting
the
painted
.
14.
[
](A16718-e35910-b)14
14
Ioan.
Metropol
Russ.
vbi
supr.
p.
3●
Guaguin
.
loc.
allegato
.
Reputing
it
vnlawfull
to
fast
on
Saturdayes
.
15.
[
](A16718-e35930-b)15
15
Posseu
.
●●
Moscouia
.
pag.
42.
Sacran
.
de
error
.
Ruthen
.
cap
2.
Or
,
to
eate
of
that
which
is
strangled
,
or
of
bloud
.
16.
[
](A16718-e35950-b)16
16
Guaguin
.
loc.
citat
.
Obseruing
4
lents
in
the
yeare
.
17.
[
](A16718-e35970-b)17
17
Sigism
.
lib.
citato
pag.
3●
.
Boter
Relat.
par.
3.
l.
1.
c.
de
Moscouia
.
Refusing
to
communicate
with
the
Roman
Church
.
And
(
to
conclude
)
excepting
the
difference
in
distributing
of
the
Eucharist
,
and
exacting
of
marriage
in
their
Priests
and
Deacons
,
there
is
not
any
materiall
difference
in
points
of
religion
,
that
I
find
betwixt
them
and
the
Grecians
.
With
whom
,
they
not
onely
maintaine
Communion
,
but
were
also
,
and
that
not
long
since
,
(
and
of
right
still
ought
to
be
)
of
the
same
Iurisdiction
and
gouernement
,
for
[
](A16718-e36000-b)*
*
Posteuin
.
Rer.
Moscou
.
Com
1.
pag.
1.
Guaguin
.
Descrip.
Moscou
.
cap.
2.
their
chiefe
Metropolitan
or
Primate
(
who
is
the
Archbishop
of
Mosco
)
was
wont
to
bee
confirmed
by
the
Patriarch
of
Constantinople
,
but
is
now
,
and
hath
beene
about
some
60
yeares
,
nominated
and
appointed
by
the
Prince
(
the
Emperour
of
Russia
)
and
vpon
that
nomination
,
consecrated
by
two
or
three
of
his
owne
Suffragans
:
Of
whom
euen
all
sorts
together
.
Bishops
and
Archbishops
,
there
are
but
[
](A16718-e36040-b)*
*
Posse●●
loco
proxime
citato
Sigism
.
in
Moscou
.
pag.
28.
eleuen
,
in
all
that
large
Dominion
of
the
Emperour
of
Russia
.
Thus
is
it
with
these
sorts
of
Christians
hitherto
related
,
touching
their
religion
,
and
gouernours
.
All
which
(
as
you
may
easily
perceaue
)
are
of
the
same
communion
,
and
in
effect
of
the
same
religion
with
the
Grecians
:
And
beside
these
,
some
large
parts
of
the
King
of
Polonia
his
dominion
,
for
Podolia
,
and
for
the
most
part
[
](A16718-e36100-b)*
*
Boter
.
Rel.
pa.
1.
l.
1.
c.
Russia
.
Guagu●n
.
Description
M●scou
.
c.
2.
Russia
Nigra
,
or
Rubra
as
some
call
it
(
the
larger
Russia
subiect
for
the
greatest
part
to
the
Duke
of
Muscouia
they
tearme
Russia
alba
)
are
of
the
Greeke
religion
.
And
although
the
Bishops
of
South
Russia
,
subiect
namely
to
the
King
of
Polonia
,
submitted
themselues
almost
20.
yeares
agoe
(
An.
1594
)
to
the
Bishop
of
Rome
,
as
Baron
.
Tom.
7.
Annal.
in
fine
.
&
Posseuin
.
in
Apparsacr
.
in
Rutheni
.
haue
recorded
,
yet
was
it
not
without
special
reseruation
of
the
Greeke
religion
and
rites
,
as
is
manifest
by
the
articles
of
condition
extant
.
ap.
Th.
a
Ies.
de
Conu
.
gent.
l.
6.
pa.
3.
ca.
1.
pag.
328
&
seq
.
tendered
by
them
to
the
Church
of
Rome
and
accepted
,
before
they
would
accept
of
the
vnion
.
So
that
it
was
not
any
reuolting
from
the
Greeke
religion
,
but
onely
(
in
effect
)
from
the
iurisdiction
of
the
Greeke
Patriarch
,
to
the
Pope
,
and
that
also
with
sundrie
limitations
.
And
in
[
](A16718-e36290-b)*
*
Sigism
.
de
Reb.
Moscou
.
pag.
27
Guagu●in
in
loco
iam
citato
.
Wilna
(
the
Metropolis
of
Lituania
.
)
Although
the
Archbishop
professe
obedience
to
the
Pope
,
yet
are
there
also
in
that
Citie
,
as
Sigismund
hath
obserued
,
more
Temples
of
the
Greeke
religion
(
[
](A16718-e36350-b)*
*
Sigism
.
de
Reb.
Moscou
.
pag.
27
Guagu●in
in
loco
iam
citato
.
there
be
30
of
them
)
then
of
the
Roman
.
[
](A16718-e36370-b)*
*
Sigism
.
de
Reb.
Moscou
.
pag.
27
Guagu●in
in
loco
iam
citato
.
Epist.
ad
Chitrae
.
de
Relig.
Russor
.
So
that
if
we
should
collect
and
put
together
all
the
Christian
regions
hetherto
intreated
of
:
which
are
all
of
the
Greeke
communion
:
And
compare
them
with
the
parts
pofessing
the
Roman
Religion
,
wee
should
finde
the
Greeke
farre
to
exceede
,
if
wee
except
the
Romane
new
and
foraine
purchases
,
made
in
the
West
,
and
East
Indias
.
Of
the
Nestorians
.
CHAP.
XIX
.
THe
Nestorians
,
who
haue
purchased
that
name
,
by
their
ancient
imitation
,
and
maintaining
of
Nestorius
his
heresie
,
inhabite
(
though
euery
where
mingled
with
Mahumetans
,
or
with
Pagans
)
a
great
part
of
the
Orient
,
for
besides
the
cuntries
of
Babilon
,
and
Assyria
,
and
Mesopotamia
,
and
Parthia
,
and
Media
,
wherein
verie
manie
of
them
are
found
,
that
sect
is
spred
and
scattered
farre
and
wide
in
the
East
,
both
Northerly
to
Cataya
,
and
Southerly
to
India
.
So
that
in
Marcus
Paulus
his
historie
of
the
East
regions
,
and
in
[
](A16718-e36590-b)*
*
Guil.
de
Rubr.
It●
.
Tart.
c.
Paul
.
Venet.
1
l.
1.
c.
38.2
.
l.
eod.
c.
39.3
c.
40.4
c.
47.5
.
c.
45.
&
49.6
.
c.
48.7
.
c.
62.8
c
64.
l.
2.
c.
39.
l.
eod.
c.
61
&
64.
&c.
others
,
we
finde
mention
of
them
,
and
of
no
sect
of
Christians
but
them
,
in
very
many
parts
and
prouinces
of
Tartarie
:
As
namely
in
1
Cassar
,
2
Samarchan
,
3
Carcham
,
4
Chinchintalas
,
5
Tanguth
,
6
Suchuir
,
7
Ergimul
,
8
Tenduch
,
9
Caraiam
,
10
Mangi
,
&c.
Insomuch
,
that
beyond
the
riuer
Tigris
Eastward
,
there
is
not
anie
other
sect
of
Christians
to
be
found
,
for
ought
I
can
reade
,
except
onely
the
Portugales
,
and
the
conuerts
made
by
them
in
India
,
and
the
late
migration
of
the
Armenians
into
Persia.
The
reason
of
which
large
spreading
and
preuailing
of
that
sect
so
farre
in
the
orient
,
if
you
enquire
I
finde
to
that
purpose
,
recorded
by
Paulus
Diaconus
of
Cosrhoes
the
King
of
Persia
,
Paul
.
Diacon
.
Histor.
Miscel.
l.
18
,
that
he
for
the
mortall
hatred
hee
bare
the
Emperour
Heracl●us
,
by
whom
he
had
beene
sore
afflicted
with
a
grieuous
warre
,
inforced
all
the
Christians
of
the
Persian
Empire
to
Nestorianisme
permitting
no
catholiques
to
remaine
in
all
his
dominions
.
By
whose
preaching
,
the
Christian
religion
being
farre
there
inlarged
and
propagated
into
the
East
(
as
it
seemes
both
because
those
of
the
Persian
dominion
,
were
more
Eastwardly
then
other
Christians
,
and
because
it
is
certaine
,
that
all
of
them
till
this
day
acknowledge
obedience
to
the
Nestorian
Patriarch
in
Mesopotamia
,
which
Country
was
then
part
of
the
Persian
dominion
:
)
It
is
no
wonder
if
sowing
their
owne
tares
and
Christes
wheate
together
,
they
propagated
with
the
gospell
also
there
owne
heresie
.
Shortly
after
which
time
,
the
Sarracens
of
Arabia
(
Mahumetans
)
conquering
Persia
,
and
bringing
their
religion
,
together
with
their
victories
into
all
that
large
dominion
,
there
remained
but
little
outward
meanes
and
slender
hope
of
their
repaire
and
reformation
from
any
sound
part
of
the
Church
,
(
from
which
they
were
more
now
then
afore
diuided
)
except
what
affliction
and
time
,
and
the
grace
of
God
might
worke
and
repaire
in
them
.
Now
touching
their
ecclesiasticall
gouernment
:
The
patriarch
of
the
Nestorians
,
to
whom
all
those
of
the
East
parts
,
acknowledge
obedience
(
a
number
of
whose
suffragan
Bishops
and
Metropolitans
,
Sand
de
Visibil
.
Monarch
.
l.
7.
An.
1556.
Paul
Venet.
l.
1.
ca.
15.
you
haue
reckoned
vp
in
Sanders
booke
de
Visibili
Monarchia
,
and
whom
they
call
Iacelich
,
saith
Paulus
Venetus
Brochardus
,
and
others
,
but
mistake
it
(
or
else
they
of
the
East
pronounce
it
amisse
)
for
Catholich
,
Brocard
.
Descript.
Tert.
sanct.
Leunclau
.
Pand.
Histor
Turc
.
§.
3.
as
is
obserued
by
Leunclauius
)
hath
his
seat
in
the
Cittie
of
Muzal
,
on
the
riuer
Tygris
in
Mesopotamia
,
or
in
the
Patriarchall
Monasterie
of
S.
Ermes
fast
by
Muzal
.
Th.
a
Ies.
l.
7.
pag.
3.
c.
4.
In
which
Citie
,
though
subiect
to
Mahumetans
,
it
is
[
](A16718-e37090-b)*
*
Aubret
.
M●rae
.
Notitiae
.
Episcopor
.
Orb.
pag.
35.
Mas.
in
Ortel
.
in
Thesaur
.
in
Seleucia
.
Plin.
l.
5.
c.
25.
Strab.
l.
26.
longa●ite
Med.
recorded
,
that
the
Nestorians
retaine
yet
,
15.
temples
,
being
esteemed
about
40000
soules
.
Th.
a
Ies.
l.
7.
par.
1.
c.
4.
&
the
Iacobits
.
3.
which
Citie
of
Musal
,
I
either
take
with
Masius
and
Ortelius
,
to
be
the
same
,
that
anciently
was
called
Selutia
(
and
in
Plinie
Seleutia
Parthorum
)
both
because
Seleutia
was
,
as
Strabo
saith
,
the
Metropolis
of
Assyria
,
euen
as
[
](A16718-e37240-b)*
*
Guili●l
.
Tyrius
de
Bel.
sac●o
.
l
21
c.
8.
Musal
is
recorded
to
be
:
And
also
,
because
I
finde
the
ecclesiasticall
iurisdiction
of
those
parts
,
committed
by
the
fathers
of
[
](A16718-e37260-b)*
*
Concil.
Nicen
.
Arab.
l.
3.
c
33
&
34.
the
Nicene
councell
,
to
the
bishop
of
Seleucia
,
assigning
him
with
all
,
the
name
of
Catholique
,
and
the
next
place
of
Session
in
councels
after
the
Bishop
of
Ierusalem
,
which
name
and
authoritie
in
those
parts
,
the
Bishop
of
Mozal
now
hath
.
Or
if
Seleucia
,
were
some
other
citie
,
Muzal
,
the
patriarchall
seate
of
the
Nestorians
,
is
either
a
remainder
of
the
ancient
Niniue
,
as
Vitriacus
,
and
Tyrius
(
who
therefore
in
his
historie
calleth
the
Inhabitants
of
that
Citie
,
Niniuites
)
haue
recorded
:
Or
at
least
,
built
neere
the
Ruines
of
it
:
Namely
,
ouer
against
it
,
on
the
other
side
of
the
riuer
Tigris
,
as
by
Beniamin
,
who
diligently
viewed
the
place
,
is
obserued
,
for
Niniue
(
which
hee
noteth
to
bee
dissolued
into
scattered
villages
,
and
castles
)
stoode
on
the
East
bancke
of
Tigris
,
on
Assyria
side
:
whereas
Muzal
is
seated
on
the
West
banke
on
Mesopotamia
side
,
being
yet
both
ioyned
together
,
by
a
Bridge
made
ouer
Tigris
.
now
distroyed
,
Vitriac
.
histor
Oriental
.
c.
3●
Tir.
de
Bel.
sacro
.
l.
21.
c.
8.
as
for
certaine
reasons
I
am
induced
rather
to
thinke
,
yet
at
least
,
the
Patriarcall
seate
was
from
Seleucia
translated
to
Muzal
,
for
the
opinion
of
Scaliger
,
Scalig.
ad
Ch●on
Eusebij
An.
M.D.
CCXIII.
namly
,
that
Seleucia
was
the
same
,
that
is
now
called
Bagded
,
Beniamin
.
in
Itinerar
.
in
Medio
.
or
new
Babilon
,
my
obseruations
in
Geographie
and
historie
,
will
not
suffer
mee
to
approoue
.
First
because
Seleucia
is
remembred
by
Strabo
to
be
300
furlongs
(
37
miles
and
one
or
two
)
Plinie
saith
,
Strabo
.
l.
16.
Plin.
l.
6.
c.
26.
a
great
deale
more
,
distant
from
Babilon
,
whereas
Bagdet
is
built
close
by
the
ruines
of
it
.
Secondly
,
because
I
finde
the
position
of
Seleucia
in
Ptolomie
to
bee
two
third
parts
of
a
degree
,
Ptolom
.
Geog.
l
▪
6.
c.
18
&
20.
Dion
.
Histor.
l.
10.
Plin.
l.
6.
c.
26.
more
North
then
that
of
Babilon
whereas
Bagdet
is
more
South
.
Thirdly
,
because
in
Dion
,
and
others
,
Seleucia
is
named
for
a
Citie
of
Mesopotamia
,
which
Bagded
is
not
,
but
in
the
prouince
of
Babilon
,
as
being
beneath
the
confluence
of
Tigris
and
Euphrates
.
The
Bishop
of
Muzal
then
,
is
Patriarch
of
the
Nestorians
.
But
yet
at
this
present
,
if
the
[
](A16718-e37780-b)*
*
Boter
.
Relat.
par
3.
l.
2.
c.
de
Nestoriani
.
Thom.
a
Ies.
de
con●ers
.
gen●
l.
7
〈…〉
c
●
&
relations
of
these
times
be
true
,
there
is
a
distraction
of
that
sect
:
which
began
about
60
yeares
agoe
,
in
the
time
of
Pope
Iulius
the
third
:
the
Nestorians
in
the
North
part
of
Mesopotamia
(
about
the
Citie
of
Caramit
)
submitting
themselues
to
another
Patriarch
of
the
Popes
erecting
(
that
reuolting
from
the
Bishop
of
Muzal
,
taking
also
on
him
,
the
title
of
the
Patriarch
of
Muzal
,
which
the
Pope
bestowed
on
him
)
hauing
first
rendred
and
professed
obedience
to
the
Sea
of
Rome
,
in
which
obedience
it
is
said
,
that
those
Nestorians
about
Caramit
doe
still
continue
.
Now
touching
the
specialties
of
these
Nestorians
religion
,
in
relation
to
the
Roman
:
they
beleeue
.
First
,
[
](A16718-e37910-b)1
1
Vtriac
.
Hist
Orient
.
c.
78.
that
there
are
two
persons
in
our
Sauiour
,
as
well
as
two
natures
,
but
yet
confesse
,
that
Christ
from
the
first
instant
of
his
conception
,
was
perfect
God
and
perfect
man
.
Th.
a.
Ies.
Ibid.
Secondly
,
[
](A16718-e37940-b)2
2
Id.
loco
citat●
that
the
blessed
Virgin
ought
not
to
be
termed
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
which
yet
now
in
some
sort
they
[
](A16718-e37960-b)*
*
Bo●er
.
Relat
pa.
3.
l.
2.
c.
de
Nestoriani
▪
Thom.
a
Ies
de
conu
gent.
l.
7.
c.
2.
qualifie
,
confessing
hir
to
be
the
Mother
of
God
the
Sonne
,
but
yet
refusing
to
terme
her
the
Mother
of
God
.
Thirdly
,
[
](A16718-e37980-b)3
3
Boter
.
loco
proxim
.
citat
.
that
Nestorians
condemned
in
the
third
and
fourth
generall
councels
,
and
Diodorus
Tar
sensis
,
and
Theodorus
Mopsuestensis
,
condemned
for
Nestorianisme
in
the
fifth
,
were
holy
men
:
Reiecting
for
their
sake
,
the
third
generall
councell
held
at
Ephesus
,
and
all
other
councels
after
it
,
and
specially
detesting
(
the
mall
of
Nestorianisme
)
Cyrill
of
Alexandria
.
Th.
a.
Ies.
Ibid.
[
](A16718-e38080-b)4
4
Vitriac
.
Histor.
Orient
.
78.
Villamont
.
en
voyages
.
l.
2.
c.
23.
4.
They
celebrate
the
Sacrament
of
the
Eucharist
,
with
leauened
bread
.
5.
They
communicate
in
both
kinds
.
6.
They
vse
not
auricular
confession
.
Villam
.
loc
citat
.
7.
Nor
confirmation
.
[
](A16718-e38160-b)6
6
Et.
7.
Sulak
.
Nestorian
.
profess
.
Tom.
4.
Biblioth.
Vet
Patrum
.
pag.
1054.
8.
They
contract
marriage
in
the
second
degree
of
consanguinity
.
Th.
a
Ies.
Ibid.
9.
Their
Priests
after
the
death
of
their
first
wiues
,
haue
the
liberty
of
the
second
or
third
or
oftner
marriage
.
Th.
a.
Ies.
Ibib.
[
](A16718-e38210-b)8
8
Gulielm
.
de
Rubric
.
Itiner
.
Tartar
.
C.
17.
10.
They
haue
not
the
Image
of
the
Crucifix
on
their
crosses
.
Of
the
Indians
or
Christians
of
St.
Thomas
.
CHAP.
XX.
THe
Christians
of
India
,
vulgarly
named
the
Christians
of
S.
Thomas
,
because
by
his
preaching
they
are
supposed
to
haue
beene
conuerted
to
Christian
Religion
:
(
and
his
bodie
as
is
thought
,
remaineth
among
them
,
buried
in
the
citie
of
Maliapar
on
the
coast
of
Choromandel
)
inhabite
in
the
neerer
part
of
India
:
namely
in
that
great
Promontory
,
whose
base
lying
betweene
the
outlets
of
the
riuers
Indus
&
Ganges
,
stretcheth
out
the
sides
far
toward
the
South
,
(
well
nigh
1000.
miles
)
till
meeting
in
the
point
of
Comori
,
they
make
,
together
with
the
base
line
forementioned
,
(
betwixt
Cambaia
,
and
Bengala
)
the
figure
almost
of
an
equilateral
Triangle
.
In
the
more
southerly
part
of
this
great
promontory
,
I
say
,
neerer
to
Cape
Comori
,
about
the
cities
of
Coulan
and
Cranganor
on
the
west
side
,
and
about
Maliapur
and
Negapatan
on
the
East
side
,
doe
these
Christians
of
Saint
Thomas
dwell
,
being
esteemed
afore
the
Portugals
frequented
those
parts
,
about
[
](A16718-e38410-b)*
*
Sommar
.
●
.
popoli
Oriē●ap
Ramus
.
Vol
l.
de
V●agg●
.
p.
332.
15000.
or
[
](A16718-e38420-b)*
*
Barbosa
eod.
vol.
pag.
312.
16000.
families
,
or
after
anothers
account
[
](A16718-e38430-b)*
*
Boter
Rei
.
p.
3.
l.
2.
c.
della
.
noua
Christianita
d'India
.
70000.
persons
.
but
on
the
west
coast
,
the
farre
greater
number
of
them
is
found
,
and
especially
their
habitation
is
thickest
,
about
Angamale
,
15.
miles
from
the
citie
Cochin
northward
,
where
their
Archbishop
keepeth
residence
.
Now
as
touching
their
gouernement
:
Their
Archbishop
till
20.
yeares
since
or
little
more
,
acknowledged
obedience
to
the
Patriarch
of
Mozal
,
[
](A16718-e38480-b)*
*
Boter
.
Relat.
p.
3.
l.
2.
c.
dell●
vecchia
Christi●n
〈◊〉
d'India
.
Th.
a
Ies
de
conu
.
G●nt
.
l.
7
pa.
l.
c.
4.
by
the
name
of
the
Patriarch
of
Babilon
,
as
by
those
Christians
of
India
he
is
still
tearmed
:
and
certainly
,
[
](A16718-e38520-b)*
*
Pausan.
in
Attici●ante
med.
that
the
Patriarch
of
Mozal
[
](A16718-e38540-b)*
*
For
Mozal
as
I
said
afore
,
is
either
Seleucia
,
or
succeeded
into
the
dignity
of
it
.
And
Seleucia
is
recorded
to
haue
beene
inhabited
by
the
cittizens
of
Babilon
,
whereof
it
was
a
Colony
:
And
such
a
Colony
,
as
in
short
time
it
[
](A16718-e38590-b)*
*
Th.
a
Ies.
de
conu
.
gent.
l.
7.
part.
1.
c.
4.
exhausted
Babilon
it selfe
,
of
all
the
Inhabitans
,
passing
,
by
reason
of
the
more
commodious
situation
,
to
dwell
at
Seleucia
.
So
that
Seleucia
beeing
inhabited
by
the
Babilonians
,
and
so
becomming
in
stead
of
Babilon
,
the
principall
citty
of
the
Prouinces
of
Babilonia
,
and
Assyria
,
the
citty
[
](A16718-e38670-b)*
*
Plin.
loco
proxim
.
citato
obtained
the
name
of
Babilon
of
her
inhabitants
,
(
as
well
as
Seleucia
of
her
founder
)
as
Plinie
hath
recorded
:
And
the
Patriarch
of
it
,
the
title
of
the
Patriarch
of
Babilon
.
And
although
[
](A16718-e38710-b)*
*
Apud
Ramus
vol.
1.
de
viaggi
.
p.
313.
Barbosa
note
,
that
subordination
of
the
christians
of
India
,
to
be
to
the
Patriarch
of
Armenia
,
(
which
no
doubt
he
receiued
from
the
Indians
relation
,
among
whom
he
was
)
yet
certaine
it
is
,
that
hee
meaneth
no
other
,
then
this
patriarch
of
Mozal
:
because
those
Armenians
which
he
meaneth
,
are
by
himselfe
obserued
to
haue
for
their
vulgar
language
,
the
Arabique
tongue
,
&
to
celebrate
their
diuine
seruice
,
in
the
Chaldee
,
both
which
agree
with
the
Christians
of
Mozal
,
but
neither
of
both
with
those
of
Armenia
,
whose
language
both
in
the
vulgar
and
sacred
vse
,
is
knowne
to
bee
no
other
then
the
Armenian
tongue
.
As
also
,
because
the
Indians
are
known
to
haue
bin
Nestorians
,
to
which
heresie
the
Armenians
were
most
opposite
,
as
beeing
in
a
manner
Iacobites
.
But
as
it
seemeth
,
that
Patriarch
is
saide
to
haue
beene
of
Armenia
,
for
the
nearenesse
of
Mozal
to
the
confines
of
Armenia
.
,
[
](A16718-e38820-b)*
*
Plin.
l
6.
c.
26
challengeth
their
obedience
,
as
being
of
his
Iurisdiction
appeareth
by
the
profession
of
Abil-Isu
,
a
Patriarch
of
Mozal
,
of
Pope
Pius
the
fourth
his
Inuesting
(
An.
1562
)
as
is
to
be
seene
in
Sanders
booke
de
visicili
Monarchia
.
Sander
visib
.
Monarch
.
l.
7.
pag.
642.
But
then
,
the
Archbishop
of
these
Indians
,
reuolting
from
his
former
Patriarch
,
submitted
himselfe
by
the
Portugalls
perswasion
,
to
the
Bishop
of
Rome
,
●etayning
notwithstanding
,
the
ancient
religion
of
his
cuntry
,
which
was
also
permitted
by
the
Pope
.
In
so
much
,
that
in
a
Synode
held
in
Goa
,
for
that
purpose
,
hee
would
not
suffer
any
alteration
to
bee
made
of
their
ancient
rites
or
religion
,
[
](A16718-e38900-b)*
*
Linsel●ot
.
l.
1
cap.
●5
.
as
one
that
liued
in
those
parts
at
that
time
hath
recorded
.
But
that
Bishop
beeing
dead
,
his
successour
in
another
Synode
,
[
](A16718-e38910-b)*
*
Posseuin
.
in
Apparat.
sacro
in
D●amperi●●se
concilium
.
held
by
the
Archbishop
of
Goa
,
at
Diamper
,
not
farre
from
Maliapur
,
An.
1599.
made
profession
,
together
with
his
suffragans
,
and
Priests
,
both
of
the
Roman
obedience
,
and
religion
,
renouncing
in
such
direct
sort
,
the
Patriarch
of
Mozal
,
and
Nestorianisme
,
that
they
deliuered
vp
all
their
books
,
to
the
censure
of
the
Archbishop
of
Goa
,
and
suffered
their
Liturgie
,
in
the
points
that
relished
of
Nestorianisme
to
be
altered
,
euen
in
such
sort
as
now
it
is
to
be
seene
in
the
last
Edition
of
Bibliotheca
veteriem
Patrum
.
Biblioth.
vet.
Pat
Auctorij
Tom.
2.
in
fine
.
But
before
this
alteration
of
their
religion
was
procured
by
the
Portugals
,
those
Christians
of
India
were
Nestorians
,
[
](A16718-e39030-b)1
1
Osorius
de
Rel.
Emmanuel
.
l.
3.
Boter
.
Rel.
p.
3.
l.
2.
ca.
della
vecchia
Christianitad
India
.
as
hauing
the
dependance
that
I
related
,
on
the
Patriarch
of
the
Nestorians
,
they
could
not
well
bee
any
other
.
Some
specialties
of
whose
religion
I
finde
thus
recorded
.
1.
That
they
distributed
the
Sacrament
of
the
Eucharist
in
both
kinds
.
2.
That
they
celebrated
it
with
bread
seasoned
with
salt
,
[
](A16718-e39070-b)2
2
Odoard
.
Barbos
.
ap.
Ramus
.
Vol.
1.
pag.
313.
(
pane
salato
,
saith
my
Historian
)
and
in
stead
of
wine
,
(
because
India
affordeth
none
)
in
the
iuice
of
Raisons
,
softened
one
night
in
water
&
so
pressed
forth
.
[
](A16718-e39100-b)3
3
Nauigat
.
Ioseph
:
Indi
,
inter
Relationes
Noui
orbis
.
c.
134.
3
That
they
baptized
not
their
infants
till
they
were
40.
daies
old
,
except
in
danger
of
death
.
4.
That
they
vsed
not
extreame
vnction
.
[
](A16718-e39130-b)4
4
Ioseph
.
Ind.
lib.
citato
.
ca.
134.
5.
That
their
Priests
were
married
,
but
excluded
from
the
second
matrimony
.
Osor.
de
Reb.
Emanuel
.
l.
3.
[
](A16718-e39160-b)5
5
Osor.
loco
ante
citato
.
Posseu
.
in
Appara
.
sacro
.
in
Diamperiense
consilium
.
Thet.
cos.
l.
10.
ca.
15.
6.
That
they
had
no
images
of
Saints
in
their
Churches
,
but
onely
the
crosse
.
7.
That
detesting
(
the
Mall
of
Nestorianisme
)
Cyrill
of
Alexandria
,
they
honoured
Nestorius
and
Dioscorus
as
Saints
,
which
yet
mee
thinks
were
strange
,
being
of
so
contrary
opinions
,
[
](A16718-e39220-b)6
6
Ioseph
.
Ind.
vbi
supra
.
c.
133.
as
they
were
,
the
first
,
for
two
persons
in
Christ
,
as
well
as
two
natures
:
the
second
,
for
one
nature
,
as
well
as
one
Person
;
[
](A16718-e39230-b)7
7
Posseu
.
loco
lam
citato
.
but
it
may
be
that
Dioscorus
is
by
the
relater
mistaken
for
Diodorus
,
who
was
indeed
a
great
Nestorian
,
and
for
it
condemned
in
the
fifth
general
Councell
.
[
](A16718-e39280-b)8
8
Posseu
.
loco
citato
.
8.
That
they
denied
the
Primacy
of
the
Pope
.
[
](A16718-e39300-b)9
9
Posseu
.
in
Apparat.
sacro
in
Nesto●iani
.
9.
That
their
new
Testament
which
in
their
Churches
they
formerly
read
,
(
and
still
doe
)
in
the
Syriaque
toung
,
was
by
the
Nestorians
in
sundry
places
,
which
are
now
altered
by
the
Romans
,
corrupted
to
the
aduantage
of
that
heresie
,
wherin
yet
,
I
thinke
the
reporter
is
deceaued
:
because
the
same
corruptions
obiected
to
them
,
(
wherof
some
are
no
corruptions
at
all
,
but
agree
rightly
with
the
originall
text
,
and
much
better
then
doth
the
vulgar
Latine
,
by
comparing
whereof
he
examines
them
,
and
censures
them
for
corruptions
)
the
same
I
say
,
are
found
in
the
Syriaque
edition
that
wee
haue
,
being
so
farre
from
being
corrupted
by
the
Nestorians
,
Widmanstad
.
in
praef.
Testam
▪
Syriaci
.
that
it
was
brought
out
of
Mesopotamia
into
Europe
(
to
be
printed
by
Moses
Mardenus
,
from
the
Patriarch
of
the
contrary
sect
,
namely
,
of
the
Iacobites
.
But
yet
notwithstanding
,
I
am
indeede
certainly
perswaded
,
that
the
Syriaque
translation
of
the
new
Testament
(
whosoeuer
was
the
Authour
of
it
)
is
nothing
neere
of
that
Antiquity
,
The
Imperfections
of
the
Syriaque
edition
,
consist
partly
in
sundry
defects
:
namely
1.
of
all
the
Reuelation
:
2.
of
the
Epistle
of
S.
Iude
:
3.
of
the
second
epistle
of
S.
Peter
:
4.
of
the
second
and
third
Epistles
of
S.
Iohn
:
5.
of
the
history
of
the
Woman
taken
in
adultery
,
in
the
eight
chapter
of
S.
Iohns
Gospel
,
containing
the
first
eleuen
verses
:
and
6.
of
the
7.
verse
of
the
fifth
Chapter
of
the
first
Epistle
of
S.
Iohn
.
Of
which
,
the
two
last
wants
are
no
lesse
found
in
sundry
auncient
Greeke
copies
,
as
Erasmus
,
Beza
,
Iunius
&
others
haue
obserued
:
And
partly
;
beside
these
defects
,
in
some
(
very
few
)
faulty
translations
.
which
the
Syrians
(
as
Bellarmine
and
others
report
of
them
)
pretend
it
to
bee
,
Bellar.
de
Verbo
Dei
.
l.
2.
c.
4.
namely
to
haue
bene
the
work
of
S.
Marke
.
First
,
because
S.
Mark
died
in
the
8.
yeare
of
Nero
,
Hieron
.
de
Scriptorib
Ecclesi●sticis
,
in
Ma
c
Erasmus
.
Beza
.
Iunius
.
in
.
Annot.
ad
loc.
praedict.
as
Hierome
with
others
hath
certainely
recorded
,
after
which
time
,
many
parts
of
the
new
Testament
,
were
written
:
as
namely
S.
Iohns
Gospell
,
the
Acts
of
the
Apostles
,
(
for
all
the
History
from
the
24.
chapter
to
the
ende
,
relateth
occurents
after
S.
Markes
death
)
the
Epistles
of
S.
Paul
to
the
Galathians
,
Ephesians
,
Philippians
,
Collossians
,
to
Philemon
,
and
the
second
to
Timothy
.
Secondly
,
because
that
Syriaque
translation
is
not
to
bee
found
once
mentioned
,
in
any
of
all
those
ancient
and
learned
writers
,
that
liued
in
those
east
parts
,
and
diligently
sought
out
and
obserued
the
seuerall
editions
and
translations
of
the
holy
scripture
.
And
thirdly
,
because
the
dialect
discouereth
it
to
be
of
a
farre
later
age
,
then
that
of
the
Apostles
:
which
they
will
soone
finde
to
be
so
,
(
to
omit
some
other
euidences
)
that
shall
compare
the
Syriaque
words
recorded
in
the
new
Testament
by
the
Euangelists
,
(
which
all
are
noted
by
Hierome
and
by
others
)
with
the
Syriaque
booke
:
as
for
example
,
Hieron
.
l.
de
Nominib
.
Hebr.
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
,
Mat.
6.24
.
Mamouno
.
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
,
Ioan.
19.13
.
Gephiphto
.
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
,
Mat.
27.33
.
Gogoultho
.
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
,
Act.
1.19
.
Chakal
demo
,
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
,
1.
Cor.
16.22
.
Moraneto
.
And
to
be
short
,
there
is
not
almost
any
Syriaque
worde
recorded
in
the
new
Testament
,
which
varieth
not
from
that
ancient
pronouncing
that
was
vsuall
in
the
Apostles
time
,
either
in
consonants
,
or
vowels
,
or
both
:
which
could
not
bee
the
alteration
of
any
short
course
of
time
.
Of
the
Iacobites
.
CHAP.
XXI
.
THe
Iacobites
obtained
that
appellation
,
as
Damascene
and
Nicephorus
haue
recorded
,
Damas.
l.
de
h●eresib
.
post
med.
Niceph.
Hist.
Eccles
▪
〈◊〉
l.
18.
c.
52.
of
one
Iacobus
surnamed
Zanzalus
,
of
Syria
,
who
liuing
about
Anno.
530.
was
in
his
time
a
mighty
inlarger
of
Eutiches
sect
,
and
maintainer
of
his
opinion
,
touching
the
vnity
of
nature
in
our
Sauiour
:
And
his
followers
are
at
this
day
in
great
numbers
,
knowne
by
the
name
of
Iacobites
,
in
Syria
,
in
Cyprus
,
in
Mesopotamia
,
in
Babilon
and
in
Palestine
.
For
,
the
Patriarch
of
Ierusalem
,
who
keepeth
his
residence
still
in
Ierusalem
,
(
in
which
city
,
there
yet
remaine
[
](A16718-e39920-b)*
*
Chitrae
.
de
stat.
Ecclesia●
.
pag.
25.
tenne
,
or
more
Churches
of
Christians
)
is
also
a
Iacobite
.
But
,
although
in
al
these
forementioned
regions
,
these
Iacobites
are
found
,
(
where
they
bee
esteemed
to
make
about
[
](A16718-e39930-b)*
*
Namely
15.
Crus
in
Turco●rae●
.
l.
4.
p.
297.
160000.
families
)
or
rather
50000.
as
Leonard
the
Bishop
of
Sidon
,
[
](A16718-e39960-b)*
*
Bote●
.
Relat.
pa
3
l.
2.
c.
de
G●●kobiti
.
the
Popes
visiter
in
those
parts
hath
recorded
.
ap.
Th.
a
Ies.
l.
7.
p.
1.
ca.
14.
yet
chiefly
they
inhabit
in
Aleppo
of
Syria
,
and
in
Caramit
,
and
the
mountaine
Tur
of
Mesopotamia
:
But
yet
their
religion
vnder
other
titles
,
is
extended
much
farther
,
in
so
much
that
it
is
recorded
to
be
spread
abroad
in
some
[
](A16718-e40050-b)*
*
Breitenbach
Peregrin
.
c.
de
Iacobit●●
.
Vitria
.
hist.
Orient
▪
c.
76.
40.
kingdomes
.
All
which
Iacobites
of
the
places
before
specified
,
haue
,
and
long
haue
had
,
a
Patriarch
of
their
owne
religion
,
(
for
I
finde
the
[
](A16718-e40070-b)*
*
Paul
.
Diacon
.
Hist.
Miscell
.
l.
18.
Patriarch
of
the
Iacobites
spoken
of
,
Zonar
.
Annal.
Tom.
3.
in
Heraclio
.
in
the
Emperour
Heraclius
his
time
)
to
whom
they
render
obedience
.
The
Patriarchall
Church
of
which
sect
,
is
in
the
[
](A16718-e40110-b)*
*
Mirae
.
in
Notitia
.
episcopor
Orb.
pag.
35.
Boter
.
Relat.
pa.
3.
l.
2.
c
de
Giacobiti
.
Monasterie
of
Saphran
,
neere
to
the
citie
of
Merdin
in
the
North
part
of
Mesopotamia
:
But
the
Patriarch
himselfe
,
keepeth
ordinarie
residence
,
in
the
citie
of
Caramit
,
the
ancient
Metropolis
of
Mesopotamia
,
and
which
at
this
day
,
consisteth
for
the
greatest
part
of
Christians
,
for
that
Caramit
is
the
same
citie
,
which
the
auncient
writers
called
Amida
,
Caramit
,
is
Kara
Amida
,
that
is
(
in
the
Turkish
toung
)
black
Amida
,
because
it
was
walled
with
blacke
stone
.
Sabellicus
,
Sabell●c
.
Supplem
.
Histor.
l.
18.
and
others
,
haue
left
obserued
,
and
Amida
to
haue
beene
anciently
the
Metropolis
of
Mesopotamia
,
I
finde
in
the
subscriptions
of
the
auncient
councels
plainely
recorded
.
[
](A16718-e40290-b)*
*
Concil.
Chalced.
Action
,
1
,
&c.
But
till
Eutichianisme
so
mightely
preuailed
in
those
parts
,
as
to
worke
in
them
a
detestation
of
the
councell
of
Chalcedon
,
and
a
departure
withall
,
from
their
auncient
obedience
:
They
belonged
till
then
I
say
to
the
Iurisdiction
of
the
Patriarch
of
Antiochia
,
as
being
[
](A16718-e40340-b)*
*
Notitia
prouinciar
.
prouinces
of
the
dioces
of
the
Orient
,
which
wee
finde
in
the
[
](A16718-e40350-b)*
*
Concil.
Constantinop.
1.
prim
.
Con.
2.
second
Generall
councell
,
to
be
the
circuit
and
limitation
of
that
Patriarchs
authoritie
,
which
is
the
reason
that
the
Patriarch
of
the
Iacobites
,
keeping
euer
the
name
of
Ignatius
,
intitleth
himselfe
Patriarch
of
Antiochia
:
And
that
the
[
](A16718-e40390-b)*
*
Mirae
.
Notit
.
ep●scop
.
Orbis
p●●
.
36.
Patriarch
of
Ierusalem
,
who
is
also
as
I
said
a
Iacobite
,
acknowledgeth
him
(
as
some
record
)
for
superior
:
Hauing
therein
(
if
it
be
so
)
but
in
some
sort
returned
to
the
auncient
obedience
,
wherein
the
Bishops
of
Ierusalem
stood
to
the
Patriarchs
of
Antioch●a
,
euen
till
the
time
of
the
councell
of
Chalcedon
:
for
then
began
Ierusalem
,
to
be
erected
into
a
Patriachship
:
And
(
as
we
reade
in
the
[
](A16718-e40460-b)*
*
Co
〈…〉
A●●●●on
.
7.
actions
of
that
Councell
)
with
the
consent
and
allowance
of
the
Patriarch
of
Antiochia
,
the
three
prouinces
of
Palestina
,
which
till
then
(
An.
451.
)
belonged
to
Antiochia
,
were
withdrawne
from
it
,
and
assigned
to
the
Bishop
of
Ierusalem
for
his
Patriarchall
Iurisdiction
.
Now
as
touching
the
Characters
of
their
Religion
.
1.
They
acknowledge
but
one
nature
,
1.2.3
▪
4.
Iacob
a
Vitriaco
,
Histor.
Oriental
.
c.
76.
Villamont
.
l.
2.
c.
22.
and
but
one
will
and
one
operation
,
ex
catechism
.
Iacobitar
.
ap.
Th.
a
Ies.
l.
7.
pa.
1.
ca.
15.
in
Christ
(
as
there
is
but
one
person
)
and
in
token
of
that
,
they
make
the
signe
of
the
Crosse
,
with
one
finger
onely
,
which
the
other
Christians
of
the
East
do
with
two
.
2.
They
signe
their
Children
before
baptisme
,
many
in
the
face
,
2.
Bucebing
.
Hist.
Eccles.
part.
2.
pa.
33●
.
Sali
〈◊〉
I●ner
.
To●
8.
c.
1.
some
in
the
arme
,
with
the
signe
of
the
Crosse
,
imprinted
with
a
burning
Iron
.
3.
They
vse
Circumcision
Saligniac
.
Itin.
Tom.
8.
c.
1.
euen
of
both
sexes
.
Vitriac
.
vt
ibi
.
4.
They
confesse
their
sinnes
to
God
onely
,
nor
to
the
priest
,
Th●a
Ie●●
pa.
1.
c
14.4
.
Bucebing
.
loco
citato
.
Al●
hons●
.
Castro
.
l.
4.
conu●
He●es
.
T
it
Confeslie
Baungar
.
Itiner
.
2.
c.
9.
&
as
others
record
,
but
verie
seldom
,
so
that
many
communicate
without
auricular
confession
.
Leonam
Sidon
.
ap.
Th.
a
Ies.
l.
7.
pa.
1.
c.
14.
5.
They
admit
not
of
purgatorie
,
nor
of
praiers
for
the
dead
.
Th.
a
Ies.
l.
7.
pa.
1.
c.
23.
6.
They
consecrate
the
Eucharist
in
vnleauened
bread
Salign
.
Itin.
Hieros
.
Tom.
8.
c.
1.
They
minister
the
Sacrament
of
the
Eucharist
in
both
kindes
.
7.
The
priests
are
married
.
8.
They
beleeue
all
the
soules
of
iust
men
to
remaine
in
the
earth
till
the
day
of
Iudgement
,
expecting
Christs
second
comming
,
ex
Catechism
.
Ia●obit
.
9.
They
affirme
the
Angels
to
consist
of
two
substances
,
fire
and
light
.
ex
Catechism
.
Iacobit
.
10.
They
honour
Dioscorus
and
Iacobus
Syrus
as
Saintes
,
but
yet
condemne
Eutyches
,
as
an
Heretique
.
Patriarch
.
Iacobit
.
ap.
Th.
a
Ies.
l.
7
pa.
1.
c.
14.
These
are
the
Properties
(
that
I
finde
registred
)
of
the
Iacobites
religion
,
namely
of
them
,
that
are
properly
so
called
,
and
still
retaine
the
auncient
opinions
of
Iacobus
Syrus
.
But
it
seemeth
,
that
their
principall
errour
,
and
which
occasioned
their
first
schisme
and
separation
from
the
Church
,
Namely
the
heresie
of
Eutiches
,
touching
one
nature
in
Christ
,
is
for
the
most
part
,
long
since
abolished
,
for
as
Vitriacus
hath
long
agoe
recorded
,
Vitriac
.
Histor
Orient
.
c.
76.
they
denied
to
him
(
then
the
Popes
legate
in
those
parts
,
and
demaunding
the
question
)
that
they
beleeued
one
onely
nature
in
Christ
:
And
being
further
asked
,
why
then
making
the
crosse
,
they
signed
themselues
onely
with
one
finger
,
their
answer
was
,
that
they
did
it
in
acknowledgement
of
one
diuine
Nature
,
as
also
they
did
it
in
three
seuerall
places
,
in
acknowledgement
of
three
persons
in
that
one
nature
.
And
beside
of
late
time
,
Leonard
another
legate
of
Pope
Gregories
the
13
in
those
parts
,
hath
recorded
of
the
Patriarchs
profession
made
to
himselfe
,
that
although
they
held
indeede
but
one
personated
nature
to
bee
in
Christ
,
resulting
of
the
vnion
of
two
natures
not
personated
,
yet
they
acknowledged
those
two
natures
to
bee
vnited
in
his
person
,
without
any
mixtion
or
confusion
,
and
that
they
themselues
differed
not
in
vnderstanding
,
but
onely
in
termes
from
the
Latine
Church
.
Th.
a
Ies.
l.
7.
pa.
1.
c.
14.
And
although
(
as
it
is
storied
by
some
writers
of
these
times
)
some
there
bee
among
them
that
still
retaine
that
errour
,
yet
certainely
,
that
it
is
no
generall
and
receaued
opinion
among
them
,
is
most
manifest
,
for
wee
haue
extant
the
confessions
of
the
[
](A16718-e40990-b)*
*
Tom.
4.
Biblioth.
Vete●
.
Patrum
.
pag.
1050.
Iacobites
of
Mesopotamia
,
and
of
those
of
[
](A16718-e41020-b)*
*
Apud
.
Baron
.
in
fine
Tomi
.
6.
Annal.
Aegypt
,
and
[
](A16718-e41040-b)*
*
Zag
.
Zaho
.
de
Religion
.
&
Morib
.
Aethiop
.
apud
Damian
a
Goer
.
of
Aethiopia
,
and
of
[
](A16718-e41060-b)*
*
Confess
.
Armenior
.
Num.
26.27.28.29
,
&c.
Armenia
,
that
is
to
say
,
all
sorts
of
Iacobites
,
out
of
which
it
is
euident
,
that
that
errour
of
Eutiches
,
is
clearly
renounced
,
as
articularly
acknowledging
,
that
the
humane
nature
of
Christ
was
taken
of
the
Virgin
,
and
of
the
same
substance
with
ours
,
and
remained
,
after
the
adunation
with
the
deitie
(
without
any
mutation
of
properties
)
distinct
from
the
diuine
nature
:
[
](A16718-e41100-b)*
*
Vid.
Concil.
Chalcedon
Action
.
1
&
Theodoret.
de
haeres
.
l.
4
in
Eutiche
.
All
which
the
heresie
of
Eutyches
denied
.
Of
the
Copthi
or
Christians
of
Aegypt
.
CHAP.
XXII
.
THe
Sect
of
Christians
named
Cophti
,
are
no
other
,
then
the
Christians
of
Aegypt
:
And
,
it
is
the
name
of
their
Nation
,
rather
,
then
of
their
Religion
,
(
in
respect
whereof
,
they
are
meerely
Iacobites
)
for
as
Masius
hath
obserued
,
Mas.
in
Syror.
Peculio
.
the
Aegyptians
in
some
ancient
Monuments
are
termed
Aegoph●i
,
whom
vulgarly
wee
name
Cophti
,
or
Copti
,
and
so
they
also
name
themselues
,
as
may
be
seene
,
in
the
Confessions
of
these
Aegyptians
recorded
in
Baronius
.
Baron
.
in
Le●at
.
Eccles.
Alexand.
ad
sed
Apostolic
.
●●om
6
Annal.
in
sine
.
O●ted
in
The●a●●o
in
Aegyp●●s
Sealig
.
ad
Eu.
seb●●
Chronic.
ad
An.
M
DC
CXXXIV
.
D●us
de
Trib.
secc
.
Iudaeor
.
l.
2.
c.
14.
tit
.
de
Philacterijs
.
Damascend
.
de
haeresib
.
post
med.
And
certainly
,
that
the
Aegyptians
themselues
,
name
their
Country
Chibth
,
Ortelius
after
Theuet
hath
recorded
:
As
also
it
is
obserued
by
Scaliger
,
that
in
the
Talmud
it
is
called
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
.
And
,
by
Drusius
,
out
of
R.
Dauid
,
and
R.
Shelomo
,
that
Aegypt
is
by
them
named
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
,
but
not
without
some
traiection
of
letters
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
for
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
R.
Dauid
in
praef.
l.
Radic
.
R.
Shelom
.
in
Exod.
13.
But
touching
their
Religion
(
to
omit
curiosities
about
the
name
)
they
differ
not
,
as
I
said
from
the
Iacobites
.
Insomuch
that
,
(
as
Damascen
hath
obserued
)
the
same
sectaries
,
that
first
were
termed
Aegyptij
,
because
among
the
Aegyptians
,
that
heresie
of
one
onely
nature
in
Christ
,
found
the
mightiest
patronage
,
were
after
of
Iacobus
Syrus
aboue
mentioned
,
named
in
Syria
Iacobites
.
And
till
this
day
Seuerus
,
Dioscorus
and
Iacobus
,
the
principall
parents
and
patrons
of
the
sect
,
are
by
the
Aegyptians
honoured
in
the
memorials
of
their
Liturgies
.
Th.
a
Ies-l.
7.
pa.
1.
cap.
5.
●●oter
.
Rel.
p.
3.
l.
3.
c
de
●hristiani
del
●●gitio
.
1.
Vsing
Circumcision
:
Yet
I
am
not
very
certain
whether
for
religion
,
or
,
(
which
I
obserued
it
before
to
haue
beene
)
as
an
ancient
custome
of
that
nation
,
which
custome
yet
is
reported
Th.
a
Ies.
l.
7.
pa.
1.
c.
6
,
Boter
.
p.
3.
l.
3.
c.
de
Christ
.
de
Egitto
,
to
bee
now
abrogated
among
them
,
by
the
perswasion
of
the
Bishops
of
Romes
Legates
in
a
Synode
held
at
Caire
about
30
yeares
agoe
,
An.
1583.
2.
The
confer
the
inferior
sacred
orders
(
vnder
priesthood
)
euen
to
infants
presently
after
baptisme
,
altogether
,
their
parents
promising
for
them
and
performing
in
their
steads
(
till
they
be
16
years
old
or
thereabout
)
what
they
promise
in
their
behalfes
namely
chastitie
,
and
fasting
euery
Wednesday
and
Friday
and
in
the
4.
lents
of
the
yeare
.
Th.
a
Ies.
l.
7.
p.
1.
c.
5.
They
repute
not
baptisme
of
any
efficacy
,
except
ministred
by
the
Priest
and
in
the
Church
in
what
necessitie
soeuer
.
Th.
a
Ies.
l.
7.
pa.
1.
c.
5.
3.
Neither
baptise
their
children
afore
the
40
day
,
though
they
should
die
without
baptisme
.
Th.
a
Ies.
Ibid.
4.
Min●string
the
Sacrament
of
the
Eucharist
in
both
kindes
.
2
Theue●
in
Cosm.
de
Leuant
.
c.
48.
5.
They
minister
the
sacrament
of
the
Eucharist
in
leauened
bread
.
Th.
a
Ies.
Ibid.
7.
Giue
the
sacrament
of
the
Eucharist
to
Infants
presently
after
their
baptisme
.
Id.
Ibid.
8.
To
sicke
persons
they
neither
minister
extreame
vnction
nor
the
Eucharist
.
Id
Ibid.
9.
Athough
they
acknowledge
the
holy
Ghost
to
proceed
from
the
Father
and
the
Son
,
yet
in
relating
of
the
Nicene
Creed
,
they
leaue
out
those
words
(
and
from
the
Sonne
)
as
the
Grecians
do
.
Id.
Ibid.
10.
They
admit
not
to
Purgatorie
nor
of
prayer
for
the
dead
.
Th.
a
Ies.
l.
7.
pa.
1.23
.
11.
They
contract
marriages
euen
in
the
second
degree
of
consanguinity
without
any
dispensation
Tecla
.
Abissin
.
ap.
Th.
a
Ies.
l.
7.
pa.
1.
c.
13.
12.
They
obserue
not
the
Lords
dayes
nor
other
feasts
,
except
in
the
Citties
.
Tecla
.
Abissin
.
Ibid.
13.
In
celebrating
of
the
Eucharist
,
they
eleuate
not
the
Sacrament
.
Tecla
.
Abissin
.
Ibid.
14.
Reiect
all
the
generall
counsels
after
that
of
Ephesus
,
expressely
condemning
the
counsell
of
Chalcedon
.
Id.
Ibid.
14.
Read
the
Gospell
of
Nicodemus
in
their
Liturgies
.
Prateol
.
de
Heresib
.
in
Cophti
.
15.
Repute
the
Roman
Church
hereticall
,
and
auoide
the
communion
and
conuersation
of
the
Latins
no
lesse
of
Iewes
.
And
although
Baron
.
in
fin
.
Tom.
6.
Annal.
haue
registred
an
Ambassage
from
Marcus
the
Patriarch
of
Alexandria
to
Pope
Clement
the
8.
wherein
hee
is
said
to
haue
submitted
&
reconciled
himselfe
&
the
Prouinces
of
Aegypt
to
the
Pope
,
yet
the
matter
being
after
examined
was
found
to
be
but
a
trick
of
imposture
,
as
Th.
a
Ies.
l.
7.
pa.
1.
c.
6.
hath
recorded
.
16.
Maintaining
the
opinion
of
one
nature
in
Christ
:
Thom.
a
Iesu
de
Conu
.
gent.
l.
7.
par.
1.
c.
5.
yet
in
such
sort
,
that
although
in
the
generall
position
touching
one
nature
in
our
Sauiour
,
they
follow
Eutyches
,
yet
in
the
speciall
declaration
,
at
this
day
they
differ
very
much
from
him
.
For
they
acknowledge
him
to
be
truely
,
and
perfectly
both
God
and
man
:
3.
Thom.
a.
Ies.
loc.
citato
.
Botor
.
loc.
cit.
And
,
that
the
Diuine
and
humane
natures
,
are
become
in
him
one
Nature
,
not
by
any
confusion
or
commixtion
of
them
,
as
Eutyches
taught
:
but
onely
by
coadunation
.
Wherin
,
although
they
catholiquely
confesse
,
that
there
is
no
mutation
of
properties
in
either
nature
,
being
united
in
Christ
,
from
what
the
diuine
and
human
natures
seuerally
obtaine
in
seuerall
Persons
:
Yet
,
being
not
well
able
(
as
it
seemes
)
to
distinguish
betweene
the
nature
and
the
Person
,
they
dare
not
say
there
be
in
Christ
two
Natures
,
for
feare
they
should
slip
into
Nestorius
heresie
of
two
Persons
.
Which
heresie
of
one
onely
Nature
in
our
Sauiour
,
beginning
with
Eutyches
,
although
after
dispersing
it selfe
into
many
branches
,
hath
euer
since
the
time
of
the
Counsell
of
Chalcedon
,
by
which
Eutychianisme
was
condemned
and
for
it
,
the
Patriarch
of
Alexandria
[
](A16718-e42230-b)*
*
Concil.
Chalced.
Action
.
3.
Dioscorus
deposed
,
beene
nourished
and
maintayned
,
as
by
other
Christians
of
the
East
,
so
specially
by
the
Aegyptians
.
Insomuch
,
that
not
onely
sundry
Patriarchs
of
Alexandria
,
and
Antiochia
,
(
but
specially
of
Alexandria
)
together
with
many
other
Bishops
of
the
East
parts
,
their
Suffragans
,
and
adherents
,
are
recorded
to
haue
maintained
and
aduanced
,
Euagr.
l
3.
c.
5.6.22.30.33
.
&c.
Leont
.
de
Sect.
Action
.
5.
Niceph.
l.
16.
c.
2.4
.
&
5.
&
l.
18.
c.
45.
&
sequent
.
that
heresie
of
Eutyches
but
we
finde
moreouer
,
manie
Synodes
of
those
parts
,
registred
or
remembred
in
Euagrius
,
Leontius
,
Nicephorus
,
and
the
booke
called
[
](A16718-e42320-b)*
*
Synod
97.101.103
,
108
,
109
&c.
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
,
brought
to
light
by
Pappus
&c.
wherin
(
in
the
behalfe
of
that
heresie
)
the
decrees
of
the
Councell
of
Chalcedon
were
condemned
.
In
which
counsell
,
although
we
reade
of
the
greatest
Confluence
of
Bishops
,
that
euer
mette
about
the
Establishment
of
any
point
in
Christian
religion
(
and
yet
beside
the
630
Bishops
present
in
that
Councell
,
there
are
extant
in
the
[
](A16718-e42360-b)*
*
Ad
sin
Concil.
Chalcedon
.
Tom.
2.
Concil.
Binij
,
Booke
of
Councels
,
the
suffrages
of
about
30
prouinciall
Synodes
,
that
by
their
Epistles
to
the
Emperour
Leo
,
confirmed
it
,
together
with
all
the
Bishops
of
the
West
,
by
whom
it
was
likewise
receiued
)
yet
notwithstanding
all
this
,
that
heresie
so
preuailed
in
the
East
parts
,
and
specially
in
Aegypt
,
wherof
we
now
entreat
,
that
from
that
time
to
this
it
was
neuer
cleared
of
it
.
But
as
there
was
neuer
heresie
that
so
grieuously
wounded
the
Church
of
God
,
as
that
of
Eutyches
,
(
except
perhaps
Arrianisme
)
so
was
no
part
of
the
Church
so
deepely
and
deadly
wounded
by
it
,
as
that
of
Aegypt
.
So
that
,
euen
at
this
day
,
although
the
wound
be
in
some
sort
healed
,
yet
the
wemme
or
scarre
still
remaineth
.
For
it
is
not
many
yeares
,
since
by
certaine
lesuits
,
Agents
for
the
Bishop
of
Rome
,
some
conferences
were
had
with
the
Patriarch
of
Alexandria
and
his
Synode
,
Boter
.
Relat.
pa.
3.
l.
3.
c.
de
Christiani
de
Egitto
.
wherein
,
although
they
confessed
(
if
true
relation
be
made
of
that
conference
)
that
Christ
is
true
God
and
true
Man
:
yet
did
they
purposely
refraine
from
mentioning
two
natures
in
Christ
,
lest
they
should
by
little
and
little
slippe
into
the
heresie
of
two
persons
.
Now
as
touching
their
Ecclesiastical
gouernment
they
are
subiect
to
the
Patriarch
of
Alexandria
[
](A16718-e42470-b)*
*
Chitrae
.
de
●at
.
Ecclesiar
.
pag.
21.
,
whose
Patriarchall
seat
is
at
this
present
translated
,
(
and
so
long
hath
beene
)
to
the
Citie
of
Caire
,
in
[
](A16718-e42490-b)*
*
Legatio
Alex●ndrin
ap.
Ba●on
.
Tom.
●
.
in
fine
.
either
of
which
Cities
,
(
Caire
and
Alexandria
)
there
remaine
at
this
day
,
but
three
Christian
temples
a
peece
.
Whereas
Burchardus
recordeth
of
his
time
(
about
320
years
agoe
)
that
in
one
of
them
(
Caire
)
there
were
aboue
40.
Burch
,
descr
.
ter.
sanct.
par.
2.
c.
3.
But
yet
,
to
the
Iurisdiction
of
this
Patriarch
belong
,
not
onely
the
natiue
Christians
of
Aegypt
,
who
are
but
very
few
,
considering
the
exceeding
populousnesse
of
that
Nation
,
(
for
they
are
esteemed
as
I
sayd
before
,
not
to
passe
50000
)
which
in
Burchardus
his
time
,
are
by
him
recorded
to
haue
beene
aboue
300000.
Id.
pa.
2.
c.
3.
together
with
the
small
Remainder
of
Christians
,
that
are
found
about
the
Bay
of
Arabia
,
and
in
Mount
Sinai
Eastward
,
or
in
Afrique
as
farre
as
the
greater
Syrtis
Westward
▪
but
the
Christians
likewise
of
Aethiopia
,
acknowledge
obedience
to
him
.
〈…〉
.
cap.
1●5
For
although
Aluarez
in
his
storie
of
Aethiopia
haue
related
(
as
he
doth
also
some
other
matters
touching
the
ancienter
condition
of
the
Church
,
too
grossely
and
boldly
)
that
the
Christians
of
Nubia
,
till
their
defection
from
Christianity
,
were
of
the
Popes
dependance
and
Iurisdiction
,
and
receiued
their
Bishops
by
his
consecration
,
(
and
say
nothing
of
the
Patriarch
of
Alexandria
)
yet
certainely
,
that
they
were
not
so
,
is
manifest
,
for
besides
that
Saligniacus
(
himselfe
the
Popes
protonotary
,
and
whose
trauaile
had
taught
him
some
knowledge
of
the
East
parts
,
directly
denieth
the
Nubians
professing
of
obedience
to
the
Bishop
of
Rome
,
obseruing
,
that
they
were
gouerned
by
a
Prelate
of
their
owne
,
whom
they
termed
the
Priest
of
the
law
.
Itiner
.
Tom.
8.
c.
2.
Beside
that
direct
testimonie
of
his
I
say
,
there
be
other
Euidences
.
First
,
because
there
cannot
be
produced
any
Instance
,
out
of
any
Ecclesiasticall
history
,
either
ancient
or
moderne
(
as
I
am
certainely
perswaded
)
to
that
effect
.
Secondly
,
because
the
fathers
of
the
Nicene
counsell
,
as
we
finde
in
[
](A16718-e42760-b)*
*
Nicen.
Concil.
l.
3.
c.
36.
Gelasius
Cizicenus
,
are
knowen
to
haue
assigned
Aethiopia
,
whereof
Nubia
is
a
part
,
to
the
Patriarch
of
Alexandria
his
Iurisdiction
.
Thirdly
,
because
the
Patriarchship
of
Alexandria
,
lyeth
directly
betweene
Nubia
and
Rome
,
as
being
immediately
at
the
backe
of
Aegypt
.
Fourthly
,
because
the
Nubians
were
in
religion
Iacobites
,
as
a
Roman
Cardinal
Vitriacus
Brocardus
,
and
others
haue
recorded
,
Vitriac
.
histor.
●rient
.
c.
76.
Brocard
.
de●●ript.
Terre
.
sanct.
and
as
their
baptising
with
fire
remembred
by
Burchardus
and
Saligniacus
did
manifestly
import
Burch
.
descr
.
terr.
sanct.
pa.
2.
c.
3.
§
7.
Saligniac
.
Itin.
Tom
,
8.
c.
2.
of
which
sect
the
Patriarch
of
Alexandria
is
knowen
to
be
:
which
,
had
the
Pope
the
assignement
or
confirmation
of
their
prelates
,
it
is
vtterly
vnlike
they
should
haue
been
.
Fiftly
,
because
in
time
of
their
necessitie
,
being
left
destitute
of
Bishops
and
Ministers
,
if
they
had
pertained
to
the
Bishop
of
Rome
his
Iurisdiction
,
they
would
rather
haue
had
recourse
to
him
,
for
repaire
of
the
decayed
and
ruinous
state
of
their
Church
who
both
plentifully
could
,
and
no
doubt
readily
would
haue
relieued
them
,
rather
,
then
suffered
them
to
depart
as
they
haue
done
,
from
the
Christian
faith
:
To
him
I
say
,
they
would
rather
haue
resorted
for
supply
,
then
to
the
K.
of
Habassia
[
](A16718-e42980-b)*
*
Aluarez
.
lo●o
prox
.
citato
.
(
as
they
did
)
being
of
another
patriarchall
Iurisdiction
.
Certaine
therefore
it
seemeth
,
that
Nubia
while
it
was
Christian
,
belonged
not
to
Rome
but
to
Alexandria
:
By
whom
,
if
the
Nubians
in
their
distresses
were
not
relieued
,
no
man
can
wonder
,
that
knoweth
the
great
want
and
misery
of
the
Church
of
Aegypt
.
Of
the
Habassines
.
CHAP.
XXIII
.
NOW
touching
the
Habassines
.
or
midland
Aethiopians
,
whether
they
haue
obtained
that
name
,
by
reason
of
their
habitations
(
in
houses
)
which
the
Aegyptians
called
Auases
,
Strab.
l.
2.
et
l.
as
Strabo
hath
obserued
,
(
for
the
ancient
books
ha●e
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
not
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
)
in
difference
from
them
,
which
dwelling
neerer
the
Bay
of
Arabia
,
were
called
Trogloditae
(
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
)
because
they
dwelled
in
caues
,
Plin.
l.
5.
c.
8.
Solin
.
Polyhistor
.
c.
34.
not
in
houses
,
as
Plinie
and
others
haue
recorded
:
whether
I
say
,
for
that
reason
they
haue
obtained
the
name
of
Abassins
,
or
no
,
let
more
curious
men
inquire
.
But
,
as
touching
their
Religion
,
they
are
in
manner
meere
Iacobites
:
And
their
King
(
whome
by
errour
wee
call
Prester
Iohn
)
is
sundry
times
in
histories
termed
the
Prince
of
Iacobites
.
And
their
leauing
out
of
their
memorials
(
in
[
](A16718-e43200-b)*
*
Liturg.
Aethiop
.
tom.
6.
Biblioth.
ve●
.
Patrum
.
pag.
59.
et
65.
their
Liturgy
)
the
Councell
of
Chalcedon
,
by
which
the
heresie
maintained
after
by
Iacobus
Syrus
was
condemned
whereas
the
Councels
of
Nice
,
of
Constantinople
,
and
of
Ephesus
are
remembred
,
doth
import
so
much
.
Zag
.
Zabo
.
de
.
Relig.
et
Morib
.
Aethiop
.
●
ap.
Damian
.
a
Goes
.
And
in
very
deede
considering
the
dependance
,
that
the
Church
of
Habassia
,
hath
of
the
Patriarch
of
Alexandria
,
it
is
almost
vnpossible
but
they
should
be
so
;
for
as
Zaga
Zabo
an
Habassine
Bishop
hath
left
recorded
,
although
they
haue
a
Patriarch
of
their
owne
,
whom
they
call
in
their
own
language
Abuna
,
(
our
Father
)
and
he
chosen
by
the
Habassine
monks
of
S.
Antonies
order
,
remaining
in
Ierusalem
,
yet
are
they
limited
to
choose
one
of
the
Iurisdiction
of
Alexandria
,
and
a
[
](A16718-e43320-b)*
*
You
may
obserue
,
which
I
in
my
reading
haue
done
,
that
all
the
Patriarchs
and
other
Bishops
of
the
East
,
are
monkes
of
the
Orders
either
of
S.
Basil
,
or
S.
Anthony
,
for
the
Patriarchs
of
Constantinople
,
of
Antiochia
&
of
Armenia
,
are
monks
of
S.
Basils
order
:
the
Patriarchs
of
Alexandria
,
of
Aethiopia
,
of
the
Iacobites
,
and
of
the
Maronites
,
are
of
S.
Anthonies
,
And
the
Patriarch
of
the
Nestorians
either
of
both
.
monke
of
S.
Antonie
he
must
be
.
And
beside
that
,
the
confirmation
,
and
consecration
of
him
,
belongeth
to
the
Patriarch
of
Alexandria
,
and
by
him
hee
is
sent
with
Ecclesiastical
charge
into
Habassia
.
And
(
to
be
short
)
their
praier
,
in
their
〈◊〉
▪
Aethiop
.
Tom.
6.
Biblioth.
Vet.
〈◊〉
▪
p.
62.
present
Liturgie
,
for
the
Patriarch
of
Alexandria
,
tearming
him
the
Prince
of
their
Archbishops
,
and
remembring
him
before
their
owne
Patriarch
,
euidently
declareth
their
dependance
and
subiection
to
that
Sea
.
Which
supreme
Ecclesiasticall
power
touching
Aethiopia
,
to
haue
belonged
very
antiently
to
the
Patriarch
of
Alexandria
,
may
appeare
by
the
Arabique
booke
of
the
Nicene
Councell
,
translated
by
Pisanus
,
〈…〉
l
3.
can
.
3●
where
that
authority
is
found
assigned
,
to
the
Patriach
of
Alexandria
,
touching
that
Abuna
of
Aethiopia
,
(
by
the
name
of
Catholique
)
and
withall
,
to
that
Catholique
or
chiefe
Bishop
of
Aethiopia
,
the
seuenth
place
in
the
Sessions
of
generall
Councels
,
namely
,
next
after
the
Bishop
of
Seleucia
,
(
whose
seat
was
next
the
Patriarchs
of
Ierusalem
)
by
the
decree
of
the
same
Nicene
Fathers
was
allotted
.
But
if
you
desire
a
register
of
some
special
points
of
their
Religion
,
-
1.
They
circumcise
their
children
the
8.
day
,
[
](A16718-e43480-b)1.2.3 4.5.6.9.10.11.
1.2.3 4.5.6.9.10.11.
Z●g
Zab.
de
R●lig
.
et
morib.
Aethiop
.
ap.
D●●●●●num
.
after
the
manner
of
the
Iewes
:
Euen
females
also
as
well
as
Males
,
wherein
they
differ
from
the
Iewes
.
-
2.
They
reuerence
the
Sabbath
(
Saturday
)
keeping
it
solemne
equally
with
the
Lords
day
.
-
3.
They
eat
not
of
those
beasts
,
which
in
the
old
Law
are
censured
for
vncleane
.
-
4.
They
consecrate
the
Sacrament
of
the
Eucharist
in
vnleauened
bread
:
[
](A16718-e43520-b)4
4
Aluarez
Histor.
Aethiop
.
cap
11.
Contrary
to
the
custome
of
all
the
East
,
[
](A16718-e43530-b)5
5
Aluarez
.
ibi
.
the
Armenians
excepted
.
Neuerthelesse
Tecla
an
Habassine
monke
and
Priest
,
saith
that
they
celebrate
ordinarily
in
leauened
bread
,
but
on
the
day
of
the
Institution
of
the
Lords
supper
(
the
thursday
before
Easter
)
they
doe
it
in
bread
vnleauened
ouer
all
Habassia
.
an
.
Th.
a
Ies.
l.
7.
p.
1.
c.
13.
-
5.
And
communicate
in
both
kinds
,
which
they
receiue
standing
.
And
all
of
them
as
well
of
the
Laity
as
Cleargy
at
leastwise
euery
weeke
,
the
Priest
ministring
the
bread
,
Tecla
Abissin
.
ap.
Th.
●
Ies.
loc.
alleg
.
and
the
Deacon
the
wine
with
a
spoone
.
Tecla
.
Abissin
.
Ioel.
Zag
.
Zab.
de
rel.
But
yet
onely
in
the
Temple
,
It
beeing
not
lawfull
for
any
(
not
the
K.
or
Patriarch
)
elsewhere
to
communicate
.
After
the
receauing
whereof
it
is
not
lawfull
for
them
to
spit
that
day
till
the
setting
of
the
Sunne
.
Zag
.
Zab.
ibid.
-
7.
And
that
euen
to
their
yong
infants
,
presently
after
they
are
baptized
:
[
](A16718-e43630-b)*
*
Tec●a
Abissin
.
ap
.
Tho.
●
Iesu.
de
con●
.
vers.
gen●l
.
pa.
1.
●
.
13.
which
in
their
males
is
40.
daies
after
their
birth
,
and
in
females
80.
(
except
in
perill
of
death
,
for
then
they
are
presentlie
baptized
.
Tecla
.
Abissin
.
ibid.
)
til
which
time
be
complete
,
their
women
also
enter
not
into
the
Temple
.
Zag
.
Zab.
ibid.
-
8.
They
professe
but
one
nature
and
one
will
in
Christ
,
yet
without
any
mixtion
or
confusion
of
the
Diuine
and
humane
substances
.
Tecla
.
ap.
Th.
a
Iesuit
.
l.
7.
pa.
1.
c.
13.
-
9.
Beleeue
the
reasonable
soules
of
men
to
bee
traduced
from
parents
by
seminall
propagation
.
Zag
.
Zab.
de
Relig.
Aethiop
.
in
fine
.
Th.
a
Ies.
l.
7.
p.
1.
c.
8.
-
10.
Beleeue
the
soules
of
their
infants
departing
afore
Baptism
to
be
saued
,
because
they
are
sprung
from
faithfull
parents
,
and
namely
the
vertue
of
the
Eucharist
,
receaued
by
the
mother
after
conception
to
sanctifie
the
childe
in
her
wombe
.
Zag
.
Zab.
Ibid.
Th.
a
Ies.
l.
7.
p.
1
,
c
,
8.
Aluar.
hist.
Aethiop
.
ca.
22.
-
11.
They
presently
vpon
commission
of
sinne
resort
to
the
confessour
,
and
at
euery
confession
,
(
though
it
were
euery
day
)
receaue
the
Sacrament
of
the
Eucharist
.
Zaga
Zabo
.
Ibidem
.
-
12.
They
haue
only
painted
,
not
massie
images
in
their
Churches
.
Tecla
.
vbi
supra
.
-
13.
They
accept
onely
the
three
first
generall
Councels
,
reiecting
that
of
Chalcedon
,
for
determining
two
natures
to
bee
in
Christ
,
and
for
condemning
Dioscorus
the
Patriarch
of
Alexandria
Tecla
.
Abis.
ib.
-
14.
Eleuate
not
the
Sacrament
in
celebrating
of
the
Eucharist
,
but
keepe
it
couered
:
Aluarez
.
〈◊〉
loco
.
neither
reserue
it
after
the
communion
.
-
15.
To
excommunicate
obstinate
sinners
is
peculiar
to
their
Patriarch
,
which
yet
is
not
vsuall
among
them
except
in
case
of
Murther
Zab.
Zab.
ibid.
-
16
▪
Their
Priests
and
other
inferiour
Ecclesiasticall
ministers
(
as
also
monks
)
liue
by
their
labor
,
hauing
no
tithes
for
their
maintenance
,
nor
beeing
suffered
to
craue
almes
.
Zag
.
Zab.
loc.
citato
.
-
17.
But
the
conferring
of
Bishopricks
,
and
other
Ecclesiasticall
benefices
(
except
the
Patriarchship
)
belongeth
onely
to
the
King
Zag
.
Zab.
ibid
▪
-
18.
Vse
neither
confirmation
,
[
](A16718-e43950-b)*
*
Zaga
.
Zabo
.
loco
.
citato
.
Aluarez
.
lib.
citato
.
c.
5.
nor
extreame
vnction
.
-
19
Admit
the
first
marriage
in
their
Bishops
and
Priests
,
but
not
the
second
,
except
their
Patriarch
dispense
.
-
20.
Eat
flesh
euery
Friday
(
as
on
other
daies
)
betwixt
Easter
and
Whitsunday
:
Aluar.
c.
13
as
on
euery
Saturday
also
through
the
whole
yeare
,
[
](A16718-e43990-b)*
*
Zaga
Zabo
,
vbi
supra
.
except
in
Lent
.
-
21.
Baptise
themselues
euery
yeare
on
the
day
of
the
Epiphany
,
in
Lakes
or
Ponds
.
Concerning
which
first
and
last
points
,
namely
,
of
their
circumcision
,
and
annuall
baptismes
,
I
haue
somwhat
to
obserue
:
Namely
,
first
,
touching
their
circumcision
,
that
they
obserue
it
,
not
so
much
perhaps
,
of
religion
,
as
of
an
auncient
custome
of
their
nation
.
For
although
their
circumcising
on
the
eight
day
,
seemeth
to
imply
that
they
receiued
it
from
the
Iewes
,
yet
,
their
circumcising
of
both
sexes
,
as
certainely
argueth
,
that
they
did
not
so
.
And
,
if
the
Habassines
bee
of
the
race
of
the
ancient
Aethiopians
,
the
doubt
may
bee
the
lesse
:
because
Herodotus
and
others
haue
recorded
it
,
Herodot
.
l
2.
par.
a
M●d●o
.
for
an
ancient
ceremony
of
that
nation
.
Or
,
if
they
be
not
of
the
Aethiopian
race
,
Stephanus
Py●ant
.
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
,
in
dictione
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
.
but
of
the
progenie
of
the
Arabians
,
as
by
Vranius
in
Stephanus
Byzantius
,
it
should
appeare
,
recording
them
for
a
nation
of
the
Arabians
,
neere
to
the
[
](A16718-e44110-b)*
*
Which
seemeth
to
bee
true
,
both
because
in
the
[
](A16718-e44120-b)*
*
Liturg.
Aethiop
.
in
●om.
6
8
bl●●thecae
Ve●
.
pat.
p.
59.
Aethiopian
Liturgie
,
they
terme
their
owne
kingdome
the
kingdome
of
Sheba
,
and
also
,
because
the
KK
.
of
Habassia
,
[
](A16718-e44140-b)*
*
Zag
.
Zabo
de
Morib
.
Aeth●op
.
apud
Dami●●
.
deduce
lineally
their
discent
,
from
the
Q.
of
Sheba
that
came
to
see
Salomon
:
which
Sheba
,
is
to
the
skilfull
,
certainly
known
to
be
in
Arabia
:
and
either
the
same
,
that
wee
call
Arabia
foelix
,
or
some
part
of
it
And
certainely
it
is
obserued
by
learned
men
,
that
Arabia
foelix
;
in
the
easterne
tongue
,
is
named
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
,
as
Arabia
deserta
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
,
and
Arabia
Petraea
,
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
,
or
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
.
Sabaeans
:
euen
in
this
case
also
,
the
occasion
and
originall
of
circumcising
among
the
Abassines
will
bee
discerned
well
enough
:
namelie
,
because
it
is
specially
storied
,
to
haue
bene
a
very
ancient
ceremony
among
the
Arabians
:
among
whom
it
might
haue
beginning
,
by
reason
of
the
descent
of
manie
of
the
Arabians
,
from
Ismael
,
and
from
the
other
sonnes
of
Abraham
,
by
Keturah
,
planted
in
Arabia
,
of
which
Sheba
is
by
name
recorded
for
one
.
Genes.
25.3
.
But
yet
,
if
the
Abassines
obserue
circumcision
,
not
,
as
an
ancient
nationall
custome
,
Shindler
.
i●
D●ctionar
.
Pen●
.
●●lot
.
in
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
but
in
any
sort
for
religion
sake
,
then
it
may
bee
excused
in
such
manner
,
as
[
](A16718-e44320-b)*
*
.
one
of
their
owne
Bishops
hath
professed
,
namely
,
that
it
is
done
onely
in
remembrance
,
and
loue
,
and
imitation
of
our
Sauiour
,
because
he
was
circumcised
,
and
not
for
any
other
opinion
of
holinesse
at
all
.
And
secondly
,
touching
their
annual
baptisings
,
in
the
feast
of
the
Epiphanie
,
which
they
(
with
many
auncients
of
the
Church
)
suppose
to
be
the
day
of
our
Sauiours
baptisme
,
it
is
declared
by
the
[
](A16718-e44360-b)*
*
De
Religion
Aethiop
.
●ong
.
an
t
.
med.
Aethiopian
bishop
aboue
mentioned
,
to
bee
practised
among
them
,
not
as
any
sacrament
,
or
any
conceate
of
sanctification
to
be
obtained
by
it
,
but
onely
as
a
memoriall
of
Christs
baptisme
,
because
as
on
that
day
hee
was
baptised
in
Iordan
.
Euen
as
the
[
](A16718-e44390-b)*
*
Posseuin
.
de
Reb.
Moscou
.
pag.
6.
Moscouites
also
doe
the
like
on
the
same
day
,
in
riuers
,
and
for
the
same
reason
,
which
appeareth
the
more
euidently
to
bee
so
,
because
this
yearely
baptising
is
no
auncient
ceremonie
of
the
Habassins
,
but
a
fashion
of
late
taken
vp
among
them
,
as
Aluarez
,
that
liued
long
in
those
parts
,
hath
related
,
as
being
,
namely
the
institution
of
[
](A16718-e44430-b)*
*
Aluarez
histor.
Aethiop
.
cap.
95.
his
grandfather
,
that
then
reigned
in
Habassia
,
being
about
100
yeares
agoe
.
Of
the
Armenians
.
CHAP.
XXIIII
.
THe
Armenians
,
for
traffique
to
which
they
are
exceedingly
addicted
,
are
to
bee
found
in
multitudes
,
in
most
cities
of
great
trade
specially
in
those
of
the
Turkish
Empire
,
obtaining
more
fauour
and
priuiledge
among
the
Turkes
and
other
Mahumetans
,
[
](A16718-e44520-b)*
*
Vid.
Postel
.
lib.
de
re.
Linguis
Tit.
de
Lingua
Armenica
.
by
a
patent
graunted
that
nation
vnder
Mahumets
owne
hand
,
then
any
other
sect
of
Christians
.
Insomuch
that
no
nation
seemeth
more
giuen
to
Marchandize
,
nor
is
for
that
cause
more
dispersed
abroade
,
then
the
Armenians
,
except
the
Iewes
.
But
yet
the
natiue
regions
of
the
Armenians
,
and
where
they
are
stil
found
in
the
greatest
multitude
,
&
their
religion
is
most
supported
,
are
Armenia
the
greater
(
named
since
the
Turkes
first
possession
of
it
Turcomania
)
beyond
Euphrates
,
and
Armenia
the
lesse
on
this
side
Euphrates
,
and
Cilicia
,
now
termed
Carmania
.
Now
the
Armenians
touching
their
Ecclesiasticall
gouernement
,
were
aunciently
of
the
Iurisdiction
of
the
Patriarch
of
Constantinople
,
as
being
[
](A16718-e44680-b)*
*
Notitia
pro●●nciar
.
Orient
.
prouinces
of
the
dioces
called
Pontica
,
which
together
with
the
prouinces
of
the
dioces
Asiana
,
and
of
Thrace
(
three
of
the
thirteene
dioceses
,
into
which
the
whole
Empire
was
diuided
)
were
by
the
councell
of
Chalcedon
,
Concil.
Chalcedon
.
Can.
28.
assigned
,
or
else
confirmed
,
to
the
Patriarch
of
Constantinople
,
for
his
iurisdiction
.
But
at
this
day
,
and
verie
long
since
,
euen
before
Photius
his
time
(
as
is
euident
by
his
circular
Epistle
)
the
Armenians
are
departed
,
Photij
episte
ency●lica
.
ap●d
Baron
.
Tom.
10.
Annal.
Anno
.
863.
both
from
the
gouernement
of
that
Patriarch
,
and
from
the
commuon
of
the
Grecians
(
whom
at
this
present
,
they
haue
in
more
detestation
then
any
other
sect
of
Christians
)
and
that
principally
,
for
the
very
same
occasion
,
for
which
the
Iacobites
of
Syria
withdrew
their
obedience
from
the
Patriarch
of
Antiochia
,
namely
the
heresie
of
one
onely
nature
in
Christ
.
And
euer
since
that
departure
,
they
acknowledge
obedience
,
without
any
further
or
higher
dependence
,
to
two
Patriarchs
of
their
owne
:
whom
they
terme
Catholiques
.
Namely
one
of
the
greater
Armenia
,
the
families
vnder
whose
iurisdiction
exceede
the
number
of
150000
beside
verie
manie
Monasteries
.
Leonard
.
Sidon
episc
.
ap.
Th.
a
Ies.
l.
7.
pa.
1
c.
19
,
who
at
this
present
[
](A16718-e44870-b)*
*
Mirae
Noti●
.
Episcop.
Orb.
pag.
36.
Boter
.
Relation
.
pa.
3.
l.
2
c.
de
Dioscoriani
.
keepeth
residence
,
in
the
monasterie
of
Ecmeazin
,
by
the
citie
,
&c.
Leonard
.
Si
don
.
episc
.
ap
.
Tho.
a
Ies.
loc.
citato
.
by
the
citie
of
Eruan
in
Persia
,
being
translated
thether
by
occasion
of
the
late
warres
betwixt
the
Persians
and
the
Turkes
:
but
his
auncient
seate
was
Sebastia
,
the
Metropolis
of
Armenia
the
greater
:
And
the
other
Patriarch
of
Armenia
the
lesse
,
the
families
of
whose
iurisdiction
are
esteemed
about
20000.
Leonard
.
Sidon
.
vbi
.
supra
.
who
aunciently
kept
at
[
](A16718-e45010-b)**
**
Concil.
Chalced
Action
.
1
in
subscr●ption
b.
Melitene
,
the
Metropolis
of
that
prouince
,
but
now
is
resident
in
the
citie
of
Sis
,
not
farre
from
Tarsus
in
Cilicia
,
the
middle
limit
on
Interstitium
,
of
those
two
Patriarchs
Iurisdictions
,
being
the
riuer
Euphrates
.
Such
at
this
present
is
the
state
of
the
Armenian
Church
,
and
the
iurisdiction
of
their
Patriarchs
.
But
it
should
seeme
,
by
that
I
finde
recorded
,
by
Otho
Phrisingensis
,
Otho
Phrising
l.
●
.
c.
32.
vpon
the
report
of
the
Legates
of
Armenia
,
sent
from
the
Catholique
,
to
the
Bishop
of
Rome
in
his
time
,
that
the
iurisdiction
of
the
Catholique
of
Armenia
,
was
then
farre
larger
,
as
namely
,
that
he
had
aboue
a
thousand
Bishops
vnder
his
obedience
:
Except
Otho
perhaps
mistooke
,
as
I
verily
beleeue
he
did
,
obedience
for
communion
:
for
as
touching
the
communion
,
which
the
Armenians
mainteined
with
other
Iacobites
,
it
extended
indeede
verie
farre
:
But
the
iurisdiction
of
Armenia
,
for
ought
I
can
finde
in
any
record
of
antiquitie
,
contained
onely
foure
prouinces
,
namely
,
the
two
Armeniaes
before
mentioned
,
the
greater
and
lesse
,
and
the
two
prouinces
of
Cilicia
.
In
which
small
circuit
,
that
such
a
multitude
of
Bishop●
should
bee
found
,
is
vtterly
vncredible
,
especially
because
we
finde
registers
extant
,
both
of
the
Bishops
of
the
two
Armeniaes
,
in
the
[
](A16718-e45240-b)*
*
Tom.
1.
Iuris
Oriental
l.
2.
Nouell
of
Leo-Sophus
the
Emperour
,
touching
the
precedence
of
Metropolitans
:
and
likewise
of
the
bishops
of
Cilicia
,
in
[
](A16718-e45280-b)*
*
De
Bel.
sacro
l.
14
c.
12.
Guilielmus
Tyrius
:
and
all
of
them
put
together
,
exceede
not
the
number
of
thirtie
.
And
although
I
finde
that
[
](A16718-e45300-b)*
*
Nouel
.
31.
cap.
1.
Iustinian
diuided
the
two
Armeniaes
into
foure
prouinces
(
which
yet
to
haue
beene
after
reduced
'
againe
into
two
,
the
Nouell
of
Leo
euen
now
mentioned
assureth
vs
)
yet
were
not
for
that
cause
,
the
number
of
Bishops
encreased
anie
whit
the
more
.
Now
,
touching
the
properties
of
their
religion
.
1.
They
are
charged
with
the
opinion
of
one
nature
in
Christ
:
[
](A16718-e45370-b)1
1
Niceph.
hist.
Ecclesiastic
l.
18.
c.
53.
yet
not
as
Eutyches
imagined
it
one
,
namely
,
by
a
permixtion
and
confusion
of
the
diuine
and
humane
natures
,
but
yet
by
such
a
coniunction
and
coalition
of
them
,
that
they
both
together
,
make
but
one
compounded
nature
in
our
Sauiour
,
as
the
body
and
soule
,
but
one
compound
nature
in
man
.
But
neuerthelesse
,
it
seemeth
by
the
confession
of
the
Armenians
,
which
wee
haue
extant
touching
the
Trinitie
,
sent
by
the
mandate
of
the
Catholique
of
Armenia
,
Confess
.
Armenior
.
Art.
26
27.28.29.30
,
&c.
to
the
Patriarch
of
Constantinople
,
not
50
yeares
agoe
,
that
at
this
present
,
they
haue
vtterly
renounced
that
phantasie
.
[
](A16718-e45440-b)2
2
Alfons
.
a
Castro
.
l.
5.
cont.
Haeres
.
Titul
.
de
D●o
.
Haeresi
.
13.
Boem
.
de
Morib
.
gent.
l.
2.
c.
10.
2.
They
beleeue
the
Holy
Ghost
proceedeth
onely
from
the
father
.
3.
They
celebrate
the
sacrament
of
the
Eucharist
with
vnleauened
bread
(
as
the
Romans
doe
.
)
4.
They
denie
the
true
body
of
Christ
to
be
really
in
the
sacrament
of
the
Eucharist
vnder
the
Species
of
bread
&
wine
.
[
](A16718-e45500-b)3
3
Nicepho●
.
loc.
sup.
citato
.
Luturgia
.
Armen
apud
Cassandrum
de
Liturgijs
Guido
sum
.
de
heresib
.
They
mingle
not
water
with
wine
in
the
Eucharist
:
An
auncient
opinion
&
property
of
theirs
,
for
I
finde
it
[
](A16718-e45520-b)*
*
Concil.
Constantinop
.
3.
Can.
32.
recorded
of
them
(
and
condemned
)
in
the
sixt
generall
councell
.
[
](A16718-e45530-b)4
4
Niceph.
loc.
citat
.
Liturg.
Armenior
.
vbi
supra
.
But
they
retaine
it
notwithstanding
still
.
5.
They
receaue
infants
presently
after
baptisme
to
the
communion
of
the
Eucharist
,
affirming
that
baptisme
cannot
bee
conferred
without
the
Eucharist
.
[
](A16718-e45550-b)5
5
Boem
.
de
Morib
gent.
l
2.
c.
10.
Guid
▪
sum
.
de
heresib
.
6.
They
denie
the
virtue
of
conferring
grace
,
to
belong
to
the
sacraments
.
Guido
loc.
alleg
.
They
reiect
purgatorie
,
and
pray
not
for
the
dead
.
[
](A16718-e45590-b)6
6
Guido
.
in
Sum.
de
haeresib
.
Alfons
.
a
Castr
.
l.
12.
co●t
.
Haeres
.
Tit.
de
Purg●torio
.
haeresi
1.
Boem
.
loc.
citato
Th.
a
Ies.
l.
7.
pa.
1.
c
17.
7.
They
beleeue
that
the
soules
of
holy
men
obtaine
not
blessednesse
till
the
vniuersall
iudgement
.
Th.
a
Ies.
l
7.
pa.
1.
c.
17.
They
admit
married
priests
,
and
as
Burchardus
hath
recorded
.
deser.
terr.
sanct.
pa.
2.
c.
2.
§.
9.
admit
none
to
be
secular
priests
,
[
](A16718-e45730-b)7
7
Bellon
.
Obs●ru
.
l.
3.
c.
12.
Postel
.
in
Lingua
Tzeruiana
.
except
they
be
married
.
They
rebaptise
those
that
come
to
their
communion
from
the
Latine
Church
.
Guid.
Sum.
de
heresib
.
but
exclude
their
second
mariage
.
[
](A16718-e45760-b)8
8
Boem
.
loc.
citat
.
8.
They
abstaine
from
eating
vncleane
beasts
.
[
](A16718-e45780-b)9
9
Nichol.
Peregr
.
Orient
.
l.
4.
c.
19.
Boter
.
Rel.
pa.
3.
l.
2.
c.
Dioscoriani
.
9.
They
eate
flesh
on
fridaies
betweene
Easter
and
Ascension
day
.
10.
They
fast
lent
most
strictly
,
without
egges
milkemeats
,
flesh
,
oile
,
wine
,
&c.
onely
with
fruites
herbes
,
[
](A16718-e45820-b)10
10
Vitriac
.
histor.
Orient
.
c.
7.9
.
rootes
,
and
pulse
.
11.
They
celebrate
not
Christmasse
day
when
other
Christians
doe
(
Dec●mb
.
25.
)
but
fast
on
it
:
And
in
stead
of
it
,
[
](A16718-e45850-b)11
11
Vitriac
.
loc.
citato
.
celebrate
the
feast
of
our
Sauiours
baptisme
,
namely
,
on
the
day
of
the
Epiphanie
.
[
](A16718-e45860-b)12
12
Boter
.
loco
.
●itato
.
12.
They
solemnise
the
feast
of
the
Annunciation
,
the
sixt
day
of
Aprill
.
The
purification
the
14
of
Februarie
,
&c.
Of
the
Maronites
.
CHAP.
XXV
.
THe
Maronites
who
were
so
named
,
not
of
an
heretique
called
Maron
,
as
many
falsely
write
,
Prateol
.
de
sect.
Heretic
.
in
verb.
Maronitae
.
But
of
a
holy
man
of
that
name
,
for
wee
finde
mentioned
in
the
booke
of
Councels
the
Monastery
of
St.
Maron
.
Concil.
Constantinop
.
sub
.
Men.
act
.
5.
the
Monks
only
wherof
at
first
were
termed
Maronites
:
they
are
found
in
small
numbers
,
in
Aleppo
,
Damascus
,
Tripolie
of
Syria
,
and
in
Cyprus
:
But
their
maine
habitation
,
is
in
the
Mountaine
Libanus
.
Which
although
it
containe
in
circuit
about
[
](A16718-e46030-b)*
*
Posseuin
.
Appar
.
Sacr.
in
Maronitae
.
700
miles
and
is
possessed
onely
in
a
manner
by
the
Maronites
,
who
for
that
priuiledge
,
namely
to
keepe
themselues
free
from
the
mixture
of
Mahumetans
,
pay
the
Turke
[
](A16718-e46070-b)*
*
Namely
,
for
euery
one
aboue
12
yeares
old
17
Sultanines
by
the
yeare
(
the
Sultanine
weigheth
a
dramme
of
gold
,
about
7s
6d
of
our
money
)
and
for
euery
space
of
grounde
16.
spannes
square
,
one
Sultanine
yearely
,
as
is
recorded
by
Posseuine
.
large
tribute
:
yet
of
all
sects
of
Christians
,
they
are
the
least
,
as
being
esteemed
not
to
passe
in
all
[
](A16718-e46140-b)*
*
Boter
.
Relat.
pa.
3.
l
2.
c.
de
Maroniti
.
Posseuin
.
loco
citato
.
12000
houses
,
(
all
in
scattered
villages
)
beside
a
few
Monasteries
,
by
reason
of
the
indisposition
of
Libanus
in
most
places
,
for
frequent
habitation
.
For
beside
the
craggednesse
or
steepenesse
of
that
Mountaine
,
which
maketh
many
parts
of
it
in
a
maner
inaccessible
,
the
higher
Ridges
of
it
,
(
which
by
Brocardus
his
relation
are
so
eminent
,
Brocard
.
in
D●s●r
.
Terr
.
s●nctae
Tacit
historiar
l.
vltimo
that
they
may
be
discerned
40
leagues
off
)
are
also
couered
in
a
manner
continually
with
snow
,
which
it
retaineth
,
as
Tacitus
with
[
](A16718-e46190-b)*
*
Vit●iac
.
hist.
O●i●nt
.
c.
84.
Postell
.
desc●ipt.
Syr●ae
.
pag
33.
others
,
hath
left
recorded
,
notwithstanding
the
heat
of
that
climate
,
euen
in
the
nearest
approach
of
the
Sun
.
And
is
scarcely
,
as
hath
been
obserued
by
Postell
,
in
one
Summer
of
thirtie
to
be
found
cleare
of
it
:
for
which
very
cause
and
no
other
,
that
Mountaine
seemeth
to
haue
gotten
the
name
of
Lebanon
.
For
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
in
the
ancient
language
of
those
parts
(
the
Phaenician
or
Hebrew
tongue
)
signifieth
White
,
〈…〉
Patal
pom.
〈…〉
in
Dicti
〈◊〉
.
Album
.
and
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
Whitenesse
:
Euen
as
,
for
the
like
whitenesse
of
snow
,
Gerundensis
hath
remembred
Canus
(
the
highest
part
of
the
Pyrene
hilles
)
to
haue
obtained
that
name
.
And
as
Festus
supposeth
the
Alpes
,
for
the
same
cause
,
to
haue
gayned
theirs
,
that
in
the
Sabine
dialect
being
termed
(
saith
he
)
Alpum
,
which
the
Romans
in
theirs
named
Album
.
For
so
touching
the
originall
of
the
name
Libanus
,
Isidor
.
Origin
l
14.
c
8.
had
I
much
rather
think
,
then
be
led
by
the
phantasie
of
Isidorus
&
some
[
](A16718-e46410-b)*
*
Stuk.
in
Cō
.
ad
Arrian
.
●e
●plum
M●r.
●rythrae
.
p.
47.
Adricom
.
Theatr
terr.
sanct.
in
.
Nephtalim
.
Num.
63.
others
,
namely
,
that
Libanus
,
should
purchase
that
name
of
frankincense
which
the
Grecians
cal
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
and
the
Iewes
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
〈◊〉
.
For
,
if
it
bee
not
true
,
which
yet
Theophrastus
and
Plinie
write
,
that
frankincense
is
gotten
onely
in
Arabia
foelix
,
(
according
with
that
of
Virgil
,
Solis
est
Thurea
virga
Sabaeis
)
by
reason
of
which
propertie
of
place
,
to
burne
incense
is
termed
in
Tertullian
,
aliquid
Arabiae
incendere
:
if
that
I
say
be
not
true
,
for
indeed
,
I
finde
in
Dioscorides
,
record
of
frankincense
gotten
in
India
,
&
in
Pedro
Cieza
of
the
like
in
some
part
of
America
,
yet
is
there
no
mention
or
remembrance
in
any
history
of
nature
,
or
other
,
as
I
take
it
,
that
frankincense
was
euer
gotten
in
the
Hill
of
Libanus
.
The
Patriarch
of
the
Maronites
(
to
come
nearer
to
our
pupose
)
who
is
noted
to
be
a
Monke
of
St.
Antonie
,
and
to
haue
vnder
his
Iurisdiction
Theophrast
.
hist
Plantat
.
l.
9.
c.
5.
Plin.
l.
12.
c.
14
Virg.
Georg.
l.
2.
Tertull.
de
coron.
〈◊〉
circa
Med.
Dioscorid
de
Medic.
mate●
l.
1.
c.
7.
8.
or
9.
Bishops
,
keepeth
residence
for
the
most
part
in
Libanus
,
in
a
monasterie
of
St.
Anthonie
,
and
now
and
then
in
Tripolie
:
And
is
[
](A16718-e46650-b)*
*
Posseuin
.
Appar
.
sacr.
〈◊〉
Maronitae
.
one
of
them
,
that
challenge
the
title
of
the
Patriarch
of
Antiochia
,
keeping
euer
the
name
of
Peter
as
the
Patriarch
of
the
Iacobites
,
the
other
challenger
of
the
same
dignitie
,
doth
of
Ignatius
.
But
touching
Religion
,
the
Patriarch
of
the
Maronites
professeth
obedience
at
this
present
,
to
the
Bishop
of
Rome
,
yet
but
lately
,
in
Clement
the
8.
his
time
:
And
both
hee
,
and
all
the
[
](A16718-e46730-b)*
*
Boter
.
Re●
▪
pa.
3.
l.
2.
c.
de
Maroniti
.
Poss●uin
.
loc.
citato
.
Maronites
,
are
become
of
the
Roman
religion
(
being
the
onely
Nation
of
the
East
,
except
the
Indians
,
lately
brought
also
to
the
Roman
Communion
,
that
acknowledgeth
that
obedience
)
and
haue
[
](A16718-e46760-b)*
*
Posseu
.
loc.
citat
.
Boter
.
loc.
citato
.
Mirae
:
notitiae
Episcop.
Orbis
pag.
34.
Tho.
a
Ies.
de
Conu
Gent.
l.
3.
c.
3.
a
Seminary
in
Rome
of
Gregory
the
XIII
his
foundation
,
for
the
trayning
vp
of
the
youth
of
their
nation
in
that
religion
.
But
before
that
alteration
,
these
were
the
characters
of
their
Religion
,
-
1.
That
the
Holy
Ghost
proceedeth
only
from
the
Father
.
Th.
a
Ies.
l.
7.
pa.
2.
c.
6.
-
2.
That
the
soules
of
men
were
all
created
together
from
the
beginning
.
Id.
loc.
citato
.
-
3.
Not
to
baptise
male
children
together
.
Interrog.
Patriarch
.
Maronit
.
ap.
Th.
a
Ies.
l.
7.
pa.
2.
c.
5.
-
3.
That
heretiques
returning
to
the
Church
are
to
be
rebaptised
.
Th.
a
Ies.
l.
7.
pa.
1.
c.
6.
-
5.
That
the
childe
is
made
vnclean
by
the
touch
of
the
mother
till
she
bee
purified
,
which
after
a
male
childe
is
40
dayes
,
and
80
after
a
female
,
for
which
reason
they
baptise
not
their
Infants
afore
those
termes
.
Th.
a
Ies.
loc.
citat
.
-
6.
That
they
celebrated
the
sacrament
of
the
Eucharist
in
both
kindes
.
Posseuin
.
Appar
.
sac
.
in
Maronitae
.
Patriarch
.
Maronit
.
Interrog.
3.
ap
.
Tho.
a
Ies.
l.
7.
pa.
2.
c.
5.
-
7.
And
in
leauened
bread
.
Th.
a
Ies.
l.
7.
pa.
c.
6.
-
8.
Distributing
to
all
the
Communicants
each
one
a
peece
of
the
same
bread
(
which
they
consecrate
in
great
masses
)
together
with
these
words
of
the
Gospell
,
hee
blessed
and
brake
and
gaue
to
his
disciples
,
saying
take
eate
&c.
Mat.
26.26
.
Id.
Patriarch
.
Interrog.
3.
ap.
Th.
a
Ies.
loc.
citat
.
-
9.
To
distribute
the
Sacrament
of
the
Eucharist
to
children
before
the
vse
of
reason
,
&
first
presently
after
baptisme
.
Th.
a
Ies.
l.
7.
p.
2.
c.
5.
§.
9.
&
cap.
6.
-
10.
Not
to
reserue
the
Sacrament
of
the
Eucharih
.
Patriarc
.
Maron
.
vbi
supra
.
-
11.
Nor
to
carry
it
to
any
sicke
person
in
danger
of
death
.
Th.
a
Ies.
l.
7.
pa.
2.
c
,
5.
-
12.
To
omit
confirmation
by
the
Bishop
.
Patr.
Maron
,
Int.
2.
vbi
supr
.
-
13.
To
exclude
the
fourth
matrimonie
,
in
euery
person
as
vtterly
vnlawfull
.
Id.
Ibid.
Interrog.
5.
-
14.
That
marriage
is
not
inferiour
to
single
life
.
Th.
a
Ies.
l.
7.
pa.
2
,
c.
6.
-
15.
Vtterly
to
dissolue
matrimony
in
case
of
adultery
and
marry
another
Patr.
Maronit
.
Inter.
5.
vbi
supra
.
-
16.
That
the
father
may
dissolue
the
matrimonie
of
his
sonne
of
daughter
if
he
mislike
it
.
Th.
a
Ies.
l.
7.
pa.
2.
c.
6.
-
17.
Not
to
ordaine
young
men
Priests
or
deacons
except
they
were
married
.
Patriarch
.
Maronites
Inter.
6.
vbi
supra
.
Posseuin
.
in
Appar
.
sacr.
in
Maronitae
.
But
yet
to
restraine
their
second
marriage
.
Th.
a
Ies.
Ibid.
-
18.
To
create
children
5
or
6
yeares
old
subdeacons
.
Patriarch
.
Maronit
.
Inter.
5
vbi
supra
.
-
19.
That
no
man
entreth
the
kingdome
of
heauen
before
the
generall
Iudgement
.
Th.
a
Ies.
l.
7.
pa.
2.
c.
6.
-
20.
Not
to
fast
on
the
Lords
day
nor
on
the
Sabbath
.
Th.
a
Ies.
loc.
citat
.
-
21.
In
the
daies
of
fasting
not
to
celebrate
masse
till
the
Euening
.
Patr.
Maron
.
ap.
Th.
a
Ies.
l.
7.
pa.
2.
c.
5.
-
22.
Not
to
eate
of
any
thing
strangled
or
of
bloud
.
Id.
l.
7.
pa.
2.
c.
6.
-
23.
To
exclude
women
during
their
monthly
issues
both
from
the
Eucharist
,
and
from
the
Church
.
Vitriac
histor.
O●ient
.
c.
78.
Tyrius
de
Bello
sacro
.
l.
22.
ca.
8.
Patriar
.
Maronit
.
Interr.
8.
vbi
supra
.
-
34.
Their
maine
Errour
was
,
the
heresie
of
the
Monothelites
,
touching
one
onely
will
and
action
in
Christ
.
Which
errour
although
they
renounced
about
400
yeares
agoe
,
and
reconciled
themselues
then
,
Saligniac
.
Itinor
.
Tom.
8.
c.
●
.
to
the
Roman
Church
,
at
what
time
those
parts
of
Palestine
and
Syria
,
were
in
the
Christians
hands
,
as
[
](A16718-e47670-b)*
*
Vitriac
.
&
Tit
locis
●am
〈◊〉
.
Iacobus
a
Vitriaco
,
and
Guilielmus
Tyrius
,
the
one
Bishop
of
Acon
,
and
the
other
of
Tyre
,
haue
recorded
:
yet
shortly
after
,
when
those
parts
were
by
Saladin
,
the
King
of
Aegypt
and
Syria
,
recouered
from
the
Christians
,
those
Maronites
relapsed
,
and
forsooke
againe
the
Roman
communion
,
till
the
late
times
of
Pope
Gregorie
the
XIII
.
and
Clement
the
VIII
.
with
whom
they
againe
renewed
it
.
And
,
this
heresie
of
the
Monothelites
,
springing
out
of
that
bitter
roote
of
the
Iacobites
,
touching
one
onely
nature
in
Christ
,
was
the
last
of
that
long
and
wicked
traine
of
heresies
,
which
vpon
the
contempt
of
the
councell
of
Chalcedon
,
exceedingly
wasted
and
ruined
the
East
Church
,
for
after
that
the
detestation
of
Nestorius
heresie
,
touching
two
Persons
in
our
Sauiour
,
(
condemned
in
the
third
generall
Councel
)
had
so
immoderately
distempered
the
phantasies
of
Eutiches
in
Constantinople
,
&
of
the
Patriarch
of
Alexandria
,
Dioscorus
with
other
their
adherents
,
that
they
thought
not
themselues
safe
enough
from
the
heresie
of
two
persons
,
till
they
were
fallen
into
the
other
and
opposite
extremity
of
one
nature
in
Christ
,
the
Diuine
and
humane
natures
in
Christ
(
in
their
conceits
)
by
permixtion
and
confusion
of
substances
,
&
of
properties
growing
into
one
,
vpon
their
adunation
:
and
withall
,
that
the
humane
nature
of
Christ
,
was
not
consubstantiall
to
ours
,
but
of
another
kind
,
&
condition
,
which
phantasies
the
fourth
generall
councell
condemned
.
After
I
say
this
heresie
of
Eutiches
and
Dioscorus
,
had
growne
to
that
head
in
Aegypt
&
Syria
,
that
like
a
violent
&
furious
streame
,
whose
course
would
not
bee
stayed
,
it
bare
downe
before
it
all
oppositions
,
and
among
the
rest
,
that
great
&
reuerend
councell
of
Chalcedon
,
that
had
condemned
it
,
and
was
contemned
by
it
,
it
gaue
occasion
for
an
infinite
traine
of
heresies
to
follow
at
the
breach
,
which
it
had
made
.
For
first
(
to
omit
infinite
extrauagant
branches
,
Vid.
Nicepl
or
Histor.
Eccles.
l.
18
c
45.
&
●●quent
.
Leont
.
de
Sectis
.
Action
,
5.
&c.
that
sprang
from
it
,
and
infinitely
deformed
the
Church
,
renting
with
many
schismes
the
vnity
,
&
with
as
many
heresies
wounding
the
faith
of
it
)
It
drew
after
it
,
the
heresie
of
the
passiblenesse
of
the
deitie
,
because
the
deity
of
Christ
,
was
become
(
in
their
conceits
)
the
same
nature
with
the
humanity
,
that
was
passible
.
Secondly
,
(
the
absurdity
of
that
being
discerned
)
it
occasioned
an
other
extremely
opposite
,
namely
of
the
Impassibility
of
the
humanity
of
our
Sauiour
,
(
but
on
the
same
ground
)
because
namely
,
it
was
become
one
nature
with
the
deitie
,
which
now
we
know
to
bee
vnpassible
.
Thirdly
,
when
the
fondnesse
of
both
were
discouered
,
It
bred
a
new
deuise
,
touching
one
nature
in
our
Sauiour
(
as
the
wit
of
Heretiques
will
better
serue
them
,
to
deuise
a
thousand
shifts
to
delude
the
truth
,
then
their
pride
will
suffer
them
once
to
yeelde
and
acknowledge
it
)
It
bred
I
say
a
new
deuise
,
namely
,
to
be
one
,
not
by
permixtion
or
confusion
of
substances
,
as
Eutyches
first
taught
,
but
onely
by
composition
,
the
deitie
and
humanitie
,
by
coalition
becomming
one
nature
in
Christ
,
as
the
bodie
and
soule
grow
into
one
nature
in
Man
.
And
fourthly
,
when
this
phantasie
began
also
somewhat
to
abate
,
and
relent
in
manie
:
yet
still
a
fraction
as
it
were
or
rather
a
consequent
of
it
was
retained
(
for
indeede
it
implieth
by
necessarie
consequence
the
vnitie
of
nature
)
namely
that
there
was
but
one
will
,
and
one
action
of
both
natures
in
the
person
of
our
Sauiour
.
And
God
knowes
what
a
traine
and
succession
of
heresies
might
haue
followed
these
,
if
that
Lord
,
whom
they
had
infinitely
wronged
by
their
wanton
and
wandring
conceats
of
him
,
had
not
,
to
stop
the
course
and
streame
of
their
wickednesse
and
follie
,
brought
on
them
,
the
Sarracens
of
Arabia
,
for
euen
while
the
Church
,
specially
that
of
the
Easterne
parts
,
was
in
great
perplexitie
and
trauaile
,
with
the
heresie
of
the
Monethelites
(
which
I
last
mentioned
)
the
Mahumetans
of
Arabia
,
like
a
mightie
inundation
brake
forth
,
and
ouerwhelmed
all
,
and
them
first
,
that
first
,
and
most
had
wronged
the
Sonne
of
God
,
by
fostering
the
forenamed
heresies
,
and
the
infinite
brood
that
sprung
of
them
,
I
meane
Aegypt
and
Syria
,
and
to
this
day
,
both
they
,
and
the
neighbouring
nations
that
had
beene
infected
by
them
,
remaine
in
thraldome
.
But
yet
as
in
the
diseases
and
distempers
of
our
bodies
,
contraries
are
vsually
healed
by
contraries
,
so
seemeth
it
to
haue
fallen
out
in
the
distempers
of
these
mens
religions
,
for
as
worldly
prosperitie
and
wantonnesse
of
wit
(
ordinarie
companions
)
wherewith
these
nations
in
those
times
abounded
,
bred
in
them
their
ordinarie
children
,
namely
,
prosperitie
of
the
world
,
pride
,
and
wantonnesse
of
wit
,
errour
,
which
couple
in
matter
of
faith
and
religion
,
is
wont
to
produce
no
better
issue
then
heresie
.
So
on
the
other
side
hauing
now
at
length
,
their
harts
humbled
,
and
their
wits
taimed
by
that
pouertie
and
affliction
,
wherein
the
tyrannie
and
oppression
of
the
Arabians
and
Turkes
hath
long
holden
them
,
it
seemeth
the
Lord
hath
taken
pi●tie
on
them
(
as
it
is
his
propertie
not
to
dispise
humble
and
broken
spirits
,
and
to
remember
mercie
in
the
middest
of
iudgement
)
and
reduced
them
,
or
the
most
of
them
,
to
the
right
acknowledgement
of
his
sonne
againe
.
For
certainely
,
that
they
and
other
Christians
of
the
East
,
haue
(
at
least
in
these
later
times
)
disclaimed
and
abandoned
,
those
hereticall
phantasies
touching
our
Sauiour
,
wherein
by
their
misleaders
they
had
beene
aunciently
plunged
(
and
which
many
Christians
of
these
West
parts
,
still
charge
them
with
all
)
doth
manifestly
appear
,
First
of
[
](A16718-e48010-b)**
**
Biblioth.
Vot
.
Patr.
Tom.
4
pag.
1049
&
.
1●3
.
the
Iacobites
,
and
Secondly
of
the
[
](A16718-e48030-b)*
*
Confess
.
Armen
.
de
Trinitate
Art.
26.27.28.29.30
.
Nestorians
,
by
their
seuerall
confessions
,
translated
out
of
the
Syriaque
tongue
by
Masius
,
and
extant
in
Bibliotheca
Veterum
patrum
.
Thirdly
of
the
[
](A16718-e48080-b)*
*
Baron
Tom
6.
Annal.
in
fine
.
Armenians
,
by
their
owne
confession
also
,
translated
by
Pretorius
.
Fourthly
,
of
the
[
](A16718-e48110-b)*
*
De
Relig
&
Morib
.
Aethiop
.
ap.
Domian
.
a
Goes
.
Cophti
,
by
the
profession
of
their
faith
extant
in
Baronius
.
Fiftly
of
the
[
](A16718-e48140-b)*
*
Posseuin
.
Appar
.
sac
.
in
Nestoriani
.
Habassines
,
by
the
relation
of
Zaga
Zubo
a
Bishop
of
their
owne
.
Sixtly
,
of
the
[
](A16718-e48170-b)*
*
Posseu●n
.
lib.
citat
.
in
Maronitae
.
Indians
,
by
their
reconcilement
to
the
Church
of
Rome
mentioned
by
Posseuine
.
And
Seuenthly
,
of
the
Boter
Rel.
pa.
3.
l.
2.
c.
Maroniti
.
Maronites
,
by
their
like
reconcilement
,
recorded
by
him
and
by
others
.
Of
the
seuerall
Languages
wherein
the
Liturgies
of
Christians
in
seuerall
parts
of
the
World
are
celebrated
.
CHAP.
XXVI
.
ANd
thus
haue
I
related
,
the
seuerall
sects
of
Christians
,
that
are
abroad
in
the
world
,
with
the
places
of
their
habitations
,
and
the
special
characters
(
that
are
recorded
)
of
their
religions
.
One
point
notwithstanding
of
their
difference
,
haue
I
left
purposely
as
yet
vntouched
,
both
for
the
amplenesse
of
the
matter
,
and
because
I
conceaue
you
would
haue
it
declared
seuerally
.
Namely
,
touching
the
different
languages
,
in
which
all
these
seuerall
sorts
of
Christians
,
celebrate
their
Liturgies
or
diuine
seruice
.
But
first
,
to
speake
a
word
or
two
,
of
the
publique
seruice
of
the
Iewes
,
and
of
the
Mahumetans
,
in
their
Synagogues
,
and
Meskeds
(
seeing
I
intreated
before
of
those
religions
.
)
The
Iewes
where
they
obtaine
libertie
for
their
Synagogues
,
celebrate
theirs
,
in
the
auncient
Hebrew
tongue
,
Michou
.
l.
2.
de
Sarmatia
.
c.
1.
Crus
.
Turcog
.
l.
7.
pa.
487.
&c
as
Michouius
,
with
manie
others
,
hath
related
,
and
as
in
manifest
,
by
their
owne
editions
of
their
publique
praiers
,
printed
both
at
Venice
,
and
in
Polonia
,
in
that
language
.
But
the
Mahumetans
haue
theirs
in
the
Arabique
tongue
(
the
natiue
language
of
their
prophet
)
as
Georgeuitz
,
George●
.
De
R●u●
.
〈◊〉
l
2.
c.
1.
Richer
.
l.
2.
de
Mo●b
&
Instit.
Turca●
.
C●●
.
Turcog
l.
7
pa●
.
487.
Richerius
,
and
sundrie
others
haue
recorded
:
So
that
not
onely
in
Arabia
,
and
Aegypt
,
and
Barbarie
,
and
Palestine
,
and
Syria
,
and
Mesopotamia
(
in
which
parts
the
Arabique
tongue
is
become
the
vulgar
language
)
the
Alchoran
is
read
,
and
their
publique
deuotions
exercised
,
in
Arabique
:
but
also
in
Greece
,
and
Natolia
,
and
other
parts
of
the
Turkish
dominion
,
where
the
Greeke
,
and
Turkish
,
and
Slau●nique
tongues
are
vulgar
,
as
also
in
Persia
,
in
Tartar●e
,
in
India
,
where
they
haue
other
natiue
,
and
peculiar
languages
,
the
Mahumetans
reade
the
Alchoran
[
](A16718-e48670-b)*
*
Georgeuit●
de
Riti●i
.
Turcar
.
l.
2.
c.
de
Sacerdotibus
.
(
which
they
suppose
were
profaned
if
it
were
translated
into
vulgar
tongues
)
and
performe
their
publique
deuotions
,
in
that
language
.
But
Christians
in
celebrating
of
their
diuine
Liturgies
,
differ
touching
the
language
verie
much
,
Durand
Rationat
.
●iti●nor
.
l.
4.
¶
.
10.
Indeede
I
finde
it
recorded
in
Durandus
(
but
vpon
what
warrant
and
authoritie
I
cannot
finde
)
that
til
the
time
of
Hadrian
the
Emperour
(
that
is
about
120
yeares
after
Christ
)
their
Liturgies
were
all
celebrated
in
the
Hebrew
tongue
:
And
that
then
,
the
Orientall
Church
began
,
first
to
celebrate
them
in
Greeke
.
Indeede
mee
thinkes
it
is
possible
,
that
the
Christians
of
the
Gentiles
might
in
honour
of
the
Apostles
,
retaine
the
Apostles
Liturgies
,
in
the
verie
tongue
wherein
by
the
Apostles
themselues
,
they
had
beene
first
ordained
,
for
it
is
not
to
be
doubted
,
but
[
](A16718-e48740-b)*
*
Vide
Baronium
.
Tom.
1.
Annal.
Ad
An
ch.
4●
.
§.
14.
many
yeares
passing
(
about
tenne
)
after
our
Sauiours
assention
,
before
the
Apostles
left
Syria
,
and
sundred
themselues
to
preach
the
Gospell
abroad
in
the
world
among
the
gentile
&
forraine
nations
.
It
is
not
to
be
doubted
I
say
,
but
the
Apostles
,
while
they
remained
in
Iurie
,
ordained
liturgies
in
the
Iewish
tongue
,
for
the
vse
of
those
Iewes
,
whom
they
had
conuerted
to
Christianitie
:
which
liturgies
by
the
Christian
disciples
of
the
Iewish
nation
,
dispersed
in
manie
prouinces
of
the
gentiles
,
might
together
with
Christian
religion
,
be
carried
abroad
,
and
gladly
entertained
among
the
gentiles
.
This
is
possible
I
say
,
but
if
it
be
also
true
(
as
I
haue
not
obserued
any
thing
in
antiquitie
that
may
certainly
impeach
the
truth
of
it
)
yet
that
which
is
spoken
by
Durandus
of
those
Liturgies
in
the
Hebrew
tongue
,
must
be
vnderstood
(
I
doubt
not
)
of
the
Hebrew
then
vulgar
and
vsuall
,
that
is
to
say
the
Syriaque
tongue
:
Not
onely
,
because
in
that
language
,
we
finde
them
in
these
times
,
celebrated
by
the
Christians
of
the
East
:
but
also
because
I
can
conceaue
no
reason
,
either
,
why
the
Liturgies
should
bee
ordained
by
the
Apostles
in
that
language
which
the
Iewes
themselues
(
the
learned
excepted
)
vnderstood
not
,
if
it
were
done
for
the
Iewes
:
or
else
why
the
Gentiles
,
should
translate
them
(
or
vse
them
so
translated
)
out
of
the
Hebrew
into
the
Syriaque
,
seeing
both
were
to
them
alike
,
vulgarly
vnknowne
,
and
not
vnderstood
.
But
howsoeuer
it
was
in
that
most
auncient
and
primitiue
state
of
the
Church
,
in
and
immediately
following
the
Apostles
times
,
the
difference
certainely
among
Christians
in
these
present
times
,
in
that
behalfe
is
verie
great
,
some
of
them
celebrating
their
liturgies
in
their
owne
natiue
and
vulgar
,
and
some
other
in
learned
and
forraine
tongues
.
The
Christians
then
(
to
speake
first
of
the
first
sort
)
that
celebrate
them
in
their
owne
vulgar
languages
,
are
the
Armenians
,
Habassines
,
Moscouttes
with
Russians
,
Sclauonians
,
and
Protestants
.
For
that
the
Armenians
(
howsoeuer
otherwise
in
their
ceremonies
belonging
to
diuine
seruice
,
they
approch
neerer
as
[
](A16718-e48950-b)*
*
Bellon
.
Obseru.
l.
3.
ca
12.
Vitriac
.
Hilt
.
Or.
c.
79.
Brocard
.
descript.
terrae
sanct.
Michou
.
de
Sa●mat
l.
2.
c.
1
Breitenbach
.
Peregrin
.
c.
de
Armen
.
Postel
.
de
Ling●a
Armenica
.
Bellon
loco
.
●i
.
tato
.
Nichol.
Peregrin
.
Orient
.
l.
4.
c.
19.
Villamont
de
Voyages
.
l.
2.
c.
23.
Boter
.
Relat.
pa.
3
l.
2.
&
Alij
plures
.
Bellonius
and
others
report
,
to
the
rites
of
the
Latine
Church
,
then
any
other
sect
of
Christians
)
that
they
I
say
exercise
their
common
diuine
seruice
in
the
Armenian
tongue
,
Iacobus
a
Vitriaco
,
Brocardus
,
Michouius
,
Breitenbachtus
,
and
manie
others
,
some
of
their
owne
experience
,
and
others
of
certaine
relation
,
haue
left
recorded
.
And
namely
,
as
touching
the
translation
of
the
holy
scripture
into
the
Armenian
tongue
,
which
at
this
Present
,
is
in
solemne
vse
among
them
,
the
Armenians
themselues
as
[
](A16718-e49070-b)*
*
Sixt.
Senens
.
l.
4
Biblioth.
sanct
in
●oannes
Constantinopolitanus
Sixtus
Senensis
hath
recorded
,
attribute
it
,
to
no
other
author
then
to
Chrysostome
:
who
also
,
out
of
the
historie
of
George
Patriarch
of
Alexandria
,
written
of
the
life
of
Chrysostome
,
remembreth
it
specially
to
haue
beene
Chrysostomes
worke
after
his
banishment
from
Constantinople
,
while
he
liued
in
those
parts
of
Armenia
,
to
which
as
wee
reade
[
](A16718-e49160-b)*
*
Sozomen
.
H●st
.
l.
8
c.
22.
Theodoret.
l.
5.
de
Curand
.
Graecor
.
Affect
.
b.
post
.
med.
Roccha
.
in
Bibliotheca
Vaticana
.
p.
●57
.
Sozomen
,
hee
was
by
the
Emperours
decree
confined
,
and
there
died
.
And
certainely
,
that
the
holy
scriptures
,
were
translated
into
the
Armenian
tongue
,
before
Theodorets
time
,
who
liued
soone
after
Chrysostome
,
for
he
flourished
about
the
yeare
440
,
Theodoret
himselfe
(
although
he
name
not
the
Author
of
the
Translation
)
hath
left
recorded
:
as
I
finde
also
acknowledged
by
Angelus
Roccha
,
in
his
discourse
of
the
Vatican
Librarie
,
not
onely
that
Chrysostome
is
sayd
to
haue
translated
of
the
Scriptures
into
the
Armenian
tongue
,
but
,
that
he
is
also
celebrated
among
the
Monuments
of
the
same
Vatican
,
as
the
[
](A16718-e49290-b)*
*
Id
pag.
155.
&
M●●
.
Pansa
de
Biblioth.
Vaticana
,
pa.
4
discors
.
21.
Aluarez
.
histor.
Aethiop
.
ca.
159.
Inuentor
of
the
Armenian
characters
still
in
vse
.
And
touching
the
Habassines
,
Aluarez
a
Portuguez
that
liued
many
yeares
among
them
hath
not
only
left
recorded
,
that
they
reade
Scriptures
in
the
Tigian
tongue
,
which
is
a
dialect
of
the
Habassin
,
(
for
Tigia
he
noteth
to
bee
that
part
of
Habassia
,
which
first
receiued
Christianity
)
into
which
language
Sabellicus
Supplem
.
Histor.
l.
8.
recordeth
both
the
old
and
new
testament
to
haue
beene
translated
out
of
the
Chaldee
.
But
Idem
c.
11.
hee
,
with
many
[
](A16718-e49400-b)*
*
Postell
.
de
Ling.
Indica
.
Theu
.
Cos.
l.
2.
ca.
14.
Villamont
.
l.
2.
ca.
24.
Biblioth.
Vet.
Pat.
Tom.
6.
pag
55.
Michou
.
l.
de
Sarmat
.
2
c
1.
Sigum
.
l.
de
Reb.
Moscou
pag.
46.
Posseum
.
l.
de
Rebus
Mose
-
pag.
4.
Theu
.
Co●
.
l.
19.
ca.
12.
others
,
that
they
celebarte
their
Liturgy
in
their
owne
language
,
though
the
Chaldee
be
esteemed
among
them
,
as
their
learnd
tongue
,
which
also
the
Liturgie
it selfe
(
you
may
finde
it
in
the
new
Edition
of
Bibliotheca
veterum
Patrum
)
if
you
marke
the
long
answers
of
the
People
to
the
Priest
,
in
their
Praiers
doth
euidently
import
.
And
no
lesse
certaine
is
it
also
,
of
the
Muscouites
and
Russians
,
that
their
Liturgies
are
likewise
ministred
in
their
vulgar
tongue
(
being
a
kinde
of
Slauonian
)
though
sometimes
intermingling
Greeke
hymnes
as
Guaguinus
hath
obserued
:
Descript.
Moscou
.
ca.
2.
as
is
testified
by
Mathias
Michou
,
by
Sigismund
,
by
Posseuine
,
by
Theuet
,
and
sundry
others
.
And
as
euident
is
it
of
the
Illyrians
,
whom
wee
commonly
call
Slauonians
[
](A16718-e49630-b)*
*
Bapt.
Palat.
de
Ra●
.
scribend
.
Roccha
in
Biblioth
Vatican
pag.
162
that
they
also
exercise
their
publique
diuine
seruice
in
their
owne
language
:
which
to
haue
beene
allowed
them
by
the
Pope
,
at
the
suit
of
Cyrill
their
Bishop
,
or
as
[
](A16718-e49670-b)*
*
Auentin
.
l
4.
Annal.
others
say
,
of
Methodius
(
but
the
difference
is
of
no
importance
,
for
they
both
liued
in
the
same
time
,
and
were
companions
in
preaching
the
Gospell
to
barbarous
nations
)
Aeneas
Siluius
and
others
haue
recorded
.
Aen.
Silu
in
Hist.
Bohemica
.
c.
13.
Auentin
.
loc.
citat
.
Rocch
.
loc.
citato
.
And
,
in
particular
of
the
Liburnians
,
(
the
more
Westerly
part
of
the
Slauouians
)
it
is
affirmed
by
Auentine
:
and
of
the
Dalmatians
,
(
the
more
Easterly
part
of
them
)
by
Angelus
Roccha
,
that
they
celebrate
their
liturgies
in
their
owne
language
:
Which
,
Roccha
saith
the
Dalmatians
are
most
certainely
perswaded
to
haue
beene
of
Hieromes
deuising
.
But
yet
in
determining
the
Antiquity
of
that
custome
,
Roccha
that
referreth
it
to
Pope
Paul
the
second
is
greatly
mistaken
:
Because
wee
finde
it
to
haue
beene
much
more
anciently
granted
them
by
Pope
Iohn
the
eighth
that
they
might
both
reade
the
Scriptures
,
and
celebrate
masse
,
in
their
owne
tongue
,
as
appeareth
by
the
same
[
](A16718-e49840-b)*
*
Epist.
247.
Ioan.
Papae
.
8.
in
Tom.
3.
Concil.
par.
2.
ap.
Bin.
pag.
990.
Roccha
.
lib.
citato
p.
168.
Popes
Epistle
extant
,
to
Sfentopulcher
.
And
euen
Roccha
himselfe
(
forgetting
himselfe
)
confesseth
it
in
another
place
,
to
haue
beene
obtayned
of
the
Pope
by
Cyrill
,
who
was
about
600
yeares
ancienter
then
Paul
the
second
.
And
certainely
(
now
I
am
speaking
of
Popes
)
of
no
other
Iudgement
touching
diuine
seruice
in
vulgar
tongues
,
seemeth
Pope
Innocent
the
third
to
haue
beene
(
and
perhaps
it
was
also
the
decree
of
the
Councell
of
Lateran
)
charging
that
in
citties
,
Concil
Lateran
.
c
9.
&
in
Decret.
l.
1.
Tit.
31.
ca.
14
where
there
as
concourse
of
diuerse
nations
,
that
differed
in
languages
,
and
ceremonies
,
diuine
seruice
and
the
sacraments
,
should
be
celebrated
according
to
that
difference
.
But
to
speake
a
little
in
particular
of
the
vulgar
translation
of
the
holy
Scripture
vsed
among
the
Dalmatians
:
It
is
not
onely
affirmed
by
sundry
writers
to
be
the
worke
of
Hierome
,
but
Hierome
himselfe
in
his
Epistle
to
Sophronius
,
seemeth
to
[
](A16718-e49990-b)*
*
Hosius
de
Sacro
Vernacul
.
legendo
.
Postell
▪
de
lingua
Illyrica
.
Eraim
.
De
clarat
37.
ad
censur
.
theolog
.
Paris
.
some
learned
men
to
intimate
so
much
,
But
yet
there
is
another
translation
also
of
the
Scriptures
into
the
Slanonique
tongue
,
later
then
that
of
Hieromes
as
Sixt
Senens
.
l
4
Biblioth.
Sanct.
in
Hieronymus
Stridonensis
Scalig
Diatrib
.
de
Ling●●s
Europae
.
&
alij
plu●es
.
Scaliger
hath
obserued
,
being
written
in
the
Seruian
character
(
as
the
former
is
in
the
Dalmatian
)
vsed
in
Rascia
,
Bosina
,
Bulgaria
,
Moldauia
,
Russia
,
Moscouia
,
and
other
nations
of
the
Slauonian
language
in
the
Easterne
parts
,
that
celebrate
their
Liturgies
after
the
Greeke
Ceremonie
,
and
professe
obedience
to
the
Patriarch
of
Constantinople
:
Of
which
later
translation
[
](A16718-e50100-b)*
*
Sixt.
Senens
.
loco
citato
.
Hieron
.
in
Epist
ad
Sophron
.
Tom.
3
Scalig.
loc.
iam
citato
.
Auentin
.
l.
4.
Annal.
Pansa
de
Biblioth.
Vatican
par.
4.
Discor
.
23.
Methodius
the
companion
of
Cyrill
in
preaching
of
the
Gospell
to
Gentile
Nations
is
certainely
reported
to
haue
been
the
Author
.
Which
Cyrill
(
if
you
question
what
hee
was
)
was
neither
he
of
Alexandria
,
nor
he
of
Ierusalem
,
as
Mutius
Pansa
hath
vainely
imagined
,
but
another
,
farre
later
then
either
of
them
,
whom
in
the
Slauonique
tong
they
call
Chiurill
,
one
that
liued
about
the
yeare
860.
namely
,
he
that
in
the
time
of
the
Emperour
Michael
the
third
,
and
Pope
Nicholas
the
first
together
with
Methodius
,
first
brought
the
Mengrelians
,
Circassians
and
Gazarans
,
and
after
that
[
](A16718-e50260-b)*
*
Martyrolog.
Rom.
Martij
.
9
Michou
.
de
Sarmatia
.
l.
1.
c
7.
many
of
the
Slauonians
)
to
the
faith
of
Christ
,
as
Michouius
hath
recorded
.
Neither
neede
we
any
other
testimony
,
to
refell
the
phantasie
of
Pansa
touching
Cyrill
of
Ierusalem
,
then
Pansa
himselfe
,
as
namely
ac-acknowledging
,
that
Cyrill
was
the
Inuenter
of
another
sort
of
Illyrian
characters
then
by
Hierome
had
beene
formerly
deuised
(
for
of
the
Dalmatian
characters
,
that
are
in
vse
in
Dalmatia
,
Liburnia
,
Istria
,
Morauia
,
[
](A16718-e50380-b)*
*
Postell
de
Ling.
Dalmatica
.
Roccha
.
Biblioth.
Vatican
.
pag
▪
●61
.
&
Al●j
plu●●mi
.
Silesia
,
Bohemia
,
Polonia
&c.
Hierome
is
acknowledged
to
be
the
Author
)
It
could
not
bee
therefore
Cyrill
of
Ierusalem
,
as
being
ancienter
then
Hierome
,
and
by
him
registred
in
his
catalogue
of
Writers
.
And
indeede
(
to
make
an
end
)
what
reason
or
occasion
might
the
Bishop
of
Ierusalem
haue
to
deuise
characters
for
the
Illyrians
?
But
to
intreate
a
little
more
(
on
this
occasion
)
of
translations
of
the
holy
Scripture
,
made
by
the
ancient
fathers
into
vulgar
languages
:
Besides
those
already
mentioned
,
of
Hierome
and
Chrysostome
,
by
the
one
,
into
the
Dalmatian
,
and
by
the
other
into
the
Armenian
tongue
;
It
is
also
recorded
by
Socrates
,
and
Nicephorus
,
and
sundry
Socrat.
Hist.
Eccles.
l.
4.
c.
27.
Niceph
Hist.
Eccles.
l
11.
c.
48.
Tripart
.
Histor.
l.
8.
c.
13.
Paul
.
Diacon
.
Hist.
Miscell
.
l.
12.
Sozomen
.
l.
2.
c.
37.
Socrat
l.
2.
c.
32.
Vulcan
.
in
praef.
de
Littur
.
&
Lingua
Getarum
.
Inscrip
.
Vet.
pag.
146.
others
of
Vulphilas
,
bishop
of
the
Gothes
one
more
ancient
then
either
of
the
former
,
for
hee
flourished
in
the
time
of
Constantius
the
Emperour
,
and
was
successor
to
Theophilus
,
whose
subscription
wee
finde
in
the
first
Nicene
Councell
(
being
the
same
man
,
to
whom
the
Inuention
of
the
Gothique
Alphabet
is
likewise
attributed
by
the
same
Authors
)
that
hee
translated
the
holy
Scripture
into
the
Gothique
tongue
.
A
copie
of
which
translation
is
remembred
by
Bonauentura
Vulcanius
,
to
be
yet
remaining
in
some
Librarie
of
Germany
:
And
it
may
be
,
that
the
Gothique
translation
of
the
foure
Euangelists
,
mentioned
by
Gruter
in
the
booke
of
ancient
Inscriptions
,
to
be
of
a
thousand
yeares
antiquity
and
remaining
in
the
Abbey
of
Werdin
,
might
be
part
of
that
translation
of
Vulphilas
:
But
yet
that
besides
these
translations
into
vulgar
languages
,
hitherto
mentioned
of
Vulphilas
,
Chrysostome
,
and
Hierome
,
the
holie
scriptures
were
likewise
aunciently
translated
into
the
languages
of
many
nations
,
is
affirmed
by
Hierome
:
And
in
particular
(
although
the
translators
names
be
not
recorded
)
into
the
Aegyptian
,
Hieron
.
in
praesat
.
in
4.
Euangel.
Persian
,
Indian
,
Scythian
,
&
Sarmatian
tongues
,
nay
into
all
the
languages
of
other
nations
,
as
Theodoret
,
Theodoret.
l.
5.
de
Carand
.
Graecor
Affe
●●ibus
post
med.
that
flourished
in
the
time
of
the
Ephesine
and
Chalcedon
councels
(
almost
1200
yeares
agoe
)
hath
left
testified
:
As
also
in
the
following
times
(
yet
auncient
)
we
reade
of
the
like
translations
of
the
Scriptures
,
to
haue
beene
made
by
[
](A16718-e50850-b)*
*
V●sco
.
in
Chron.
Hisp●n
ad
An.
717.
Iohn
Archbishop
of
Siuill
into
the
Arabique
,
about
An.
717
,
which
then
was
the
vulgar
speech
of
that
part
of
Spaine
and
some
part
of
it
,
into
the
Saxon
or
English
by
Beda
,
about
the
same
time
:
Into
the
Slauonique
by
[
](A16718-e50930-b)*
*
Io●n
.
Treuis
.
l.
5.
c.
24.
Methodius
about
An.
860.
&c.
Into
the
Italian
by
[
](A16718-e50960-b)*
*
Auentin
.
l.
4.
Annal.
Iacobus
de
Voragine
about
An.
1290.
&c.
[
](A16718-e50990-b)*
*
Sixt.
Senens
.
B●bl
Sa●ct
l.
4.
in
Iacobus
Archiepiscopus
Genuensis
.
And
now
to
intreate
of
those
sects
of
Christians
that
celebrate
their
liturgies
in
learned
and
forraine
tongues
:
which
the
vulgar
people
doe
not
vnderstand
:
I
finde
onely
three
languages
,
wherein
they
are
all
performed
.
Vitriac
.
Histor.
Orient
.
●a
.
77.
Barbos
.
in
Vol.
●
.
de
Viaggi
.
apud
Ra●u●●
.
pag.
3●3
.
V●liam
l
2.
c.
1●
Boter
Rel.
par
3.
l.
2.
c
d.
Nestoriani
.
Namely
,
the
Greeke
,
the
Latine
,
and
the
Chaldee
,
or
Syriaque
tongues
.
And
First
,
touching
the
Chaldee
or
Syriaque
,
in
it
are
celebrated
the
liturgies
of
the
Nestorians
,
as
Vitriacus
,
Ba●bosa
,
V●llamont
,
Boter●
,
and
others
haue
recorded
:
for
Genebrard
that
pronounceth
peremptorily
the
Hebrew
tongue
,
and
not
the
Syriaque
to
be
the
vsuall
language
wherein
all
the
orientall
nations
minister
their
diuine
seruice
,
bewraies
but
too
much
,
Genebrard
.
Chronog
.
l.
3.
ad
.
An.
Chr.
3●
.
both
his
bouldnesse
and
his
ignorance
,
as
being
not
able
,
I
am
certainely
perswaded
,
to
produce
any
historie
,
or
other
lawfull
testimonie
,
that
recordeth
the
Liturgies
of
any
Christians
in
all
the
East
,
to
be
performed
in
the
Hebrew
tongue
.
But
yet
it
may
bee
obserued
,
that
where
in
sundrie
writers
we
finde
it
mentioned
,
that
the
N●storians
exercise
their
diuine
offices
in
the
Chaldee
,
we
are
not
to
vnderstand
them
of
the
pure
and
auncient
,
but
of
the
degenerate
or
Iewish
Chaldee
,
which
beside
the
Chaldee
and
Hebrew
whereof
it
is
principally
tempered
and
compounded
,
hath
much
mixture
also
both
of
Greeke
and
Arabique
,
such
as
the
Iewes
language
was
after
our
Sauiour
and
his
Apostles
time
,
that
is
(
in
a
word
)
the
Syriaque
,
for
the
Iewish
Chaldee
(
to
declare
this
point
a
little
better
)
is
of
two
sorts
:
One
of
those
that
returned
not
againe
after
the
captiuitie
to
Ierusalem
,
but
setled
themselues
to
inhabite
about
Babilon
,
whose
language
(
although
somewhat
degenerating
also
from
the
right
Chaldee
)
is
termed
the
Babilonian
tongue
,
of
which
sort
,
the
Iewes
dialect
of
Neardea
in
Mesopotamia
(
the
compilers
of
the
Babilonian
Talmud
)
was
:
The
other
of
those
that
returned
from
the
captiuitie
,
whose
language
is
properly
termed
the
Syrian
or
Ierusalem
Chaldee
,
varying
somewhat
farther
from
the
natiue
Chaldee
then
the
former
,
by
reason
of
the
mixture
of
forraine
words
,
Arabique
,
Greeke
,
Roman
,
and
others
,
which
in
course
of
time
it
contracted
:
In
which
dialect
,
the
Talmud
and
Targum
,
both
named
of
Ierusalem
,
and
the
bookes
of
the
later
Rabbines
,
are
written
.
And
in
this
second
sort
of
Chaldee
,
is
the
holy
scripture
by
the
East
Christians
translated
,
and
their
Liturgies
at
this
day
celebrated
.
Oser
.
de
R●b
.
Emmanuel
.
l.
3
Posseuin
.
in
Appar
.
sacr.
in
Diam●eriense
Concilium
.
Linschot
.
l.
1.
c.
15.
Secondly
of
the
Indians
,
that
they
in
like
sort
performe
their
Liturgie
(
not
in
the
Hebrew
,
as
is
confidently
affirmed
by
Genebrard
,
but
)
in
the
Chaldee
or
Syriaque
,
is
testified
by
Osorius
,
Posseuine
,
Linschot
,
&c.
and
confirmed
by
their
Liturgie
,
extant
in
Bibliotheca
Veterum
Patrum
,
which
is
there
remembred
to
be
translated
out
of
the
Syriaque
.
Bibl.
Vet.
Patr.
in
Auctario
.
Tom.
2.
in
fine
.
And
so
doe
Thirdly
the
Iacobites
:
Namely
,
they
of
Mesopotamia
,
of
Babilon
,
of
Palestine
,
of
Syria
,
and
of
Cyprus
,
which
are
peculiarly
knowne
by
that
appellation
.
Vitriac
.
Histor
Orient
.
c.
76.
Of
whom
Vitriacus
long
since
obserued
,
that
they
read
the
diuine
scriptures
,
in
a
language
vnknowne
to
the
Lay
people
:
And
that
language
by
the
new
Testament
[
](A16718-e51650-b)*
*
Vide
Widmanstad
.
in
paraefat
.
Testamenti
.
Syriaci
.
brought
from
them
by
Moses
Mardenus
into
Europe
,
to
bee
printed
(
for
the
more
commodious
dispersing
of
it
abroade
in
their
Churches
)
we
now
certainely
know
to
be
the
Syriaque
tongue
,
euen
as
it
is
also
knowne
and
[
](A16718-e51690-b)*
*
Post.
de
lingua
.
Chaldaic
.
Boter
.
Rel.
pa.
3.
l.
2.
c.
de
Gia
cobiti
.
recorded
touching
the
rest
of
their
diuine
seruice
,
that
it
is
performed
in
the
same
Syriaque
language
,
which
they
terme
the
Chaldee
.
And
it
is
thought
,
that
the
Liturgie
commonly
termed
Anaphora
Basi●ij
,
which
,
we
haue
by
Masius
translated
out
of
the
Syriaque
into
Latine
(
and
is
found
in
Bibliotheca
Veterum
Patrum
)
is
the
Iacobites
Liturgie
:
Biblioth.
Vet.
Pa●
.
Tom.
6.
pag.
27.
which
language
although
it
be
now
vnknowne
among
them
,
(
their
clarkes
or
learned
men
excepted
)
yet
that
it
was
vulgarly
vnderstood
,
when
that
liturgie
was
first
ordained
,
the
long
answers
of
the
people
to
the
priest
,
in
their
praiers
which
wee
finde
in
it
,
may
be
demonstrations
.
But
touching
the
old
testament
,
which
they
haue
also
(
as
Arias
writes
he
hath
heard
from
their
owne
relations
,
Arias
.
Montan.
in
Admonit
.
praefix.
Biblijs
Reg.
de
Versione
Syriaca
.
Postel
.
i●
Lingua
Chaldaica
and
Postell
,
that
he
hath
seene
)
vsuall
in
all
those
East
parts
in
the
Syriaque
tongue
,
it
is
specially
obserued
by
Arias
Monatanus
,
to
be
translated
,
not
out
of
the
Hebrew
,
but
out
of
the
Greeke
of
Origens
emendation
.
And
Fourthly
,
of
the
Cophti
or
Christians
of
Aegypt
,
it
is
likewise
[
](A16718-e51890-b)*
*
Boter
.
Relat.
pa.
3.
l.
3.
c
de
Christiani
dell
Egitto
.
obserued
,
that
they
celebrate
their
liturgies
in
the
same
language
:
(
reading
yet
the
Gospell
after
it
is
done
in
the
Chaldee
,
in
the
Arabique
tongue
,
which
is
now
,
and
long
hath
beene
the
vulgar
language
of
Aegypt
.
)
And
it
may
further
appeare
,
beside
the
testimonie
of
histories
,
by
the
Liturgie
of
Seuerus
,
Patriarch
of
Alexandria
,
in
vse
among
them
,
translated
out
of
Syriaque
into
latine
by
Guido
Fabritius
.
And
Fifthly
,
Posscu●n
.
in
Appar
.
sacro
in
Maronitae
.
Postel
.
de
ling.
Chaldaica
.
Villam
.
l.
2.
c.
24.
the
Maronites
in
their
Liturgies
,
(
which
Posseuine
obserueth
to
bee
the
Liturgies
of
Peter
,
of
Iames
,
and
of
Sixtus
)
vse
the
same
Syriaque
language
(
the
Arabique
being
also
their
vulgar
)
as
beside
Posseuine
,
Postell
,
also
,
and
Villamont
,
and
others
haue
recorded
.
And
so
doe
Sixtly
,
and
lastly
(
to
make
an
end
of
this
reckoning
)
the
poore
Christians
of
the
Isle
of
Zocotora
(
an
Island
after
Barros
his
dimension
of
60
miles
in
length
and
27
in
bredth
)
without
the
bay
of
Arabia
,
Barros
.
de
Asia
.
Decad.
2.
l.
1.
cap.
3.
for
although
I
finde
it
questioned
touching
the
religion
,
whether
they
bee
Iacobites
or
Nestorians
;
Iuan
Barros
affirming
the
first
(
and
it
may
seem
so
for
their
nerenesse
to
the
dominions
of
Habassia
)
and
Ananias
proouing
the
latter
because
they
are
vncircumcised
,
Anan
.
Fab.
ic
.
del
.
Mondo
.
Trat
.
3.
p.
292.
which
Iacobites
are
not
,
and
professe
obedience
to
the
Patriarch
of
Mozal
,
who
is
knowne
to
be
Patriarch
of
the
Nestorians
:
yet
in
this
they
both
agree
,
that
their
diuine
seruice
(
such
as
it
is
)
is
performed
in
the
Chaldee
tongue
.
Boter
.
Relat.
par.
3.
l.
3.
de
Christiani
di
Socotena
.
And
although
Botero
relate
it
to
be
done
in
the
Hebrew
,
yet
hee
meaneth
(
out
of
doubt
)
not
the
auncient
and
pure
Hebrew
,
but
the
latter
or
degenerate
language
of
the
Hebrew
,
that
is
to
say
the
Syriaque
.
As
the
other
also
that
affirme
the
publique
and
solemne
deuotions
either
of
these
Zocotorini
,
or
anie
other
Christians
in
all
the
East
,
or
South
parts
of
the
world
,
to
be
red
in
the
Chaldee
,
require
also
the
like
interpretation
:
Namely
to
be
vnderstoode
,
not
of
the
right
,
and
Babilonian
,
but
of
the
Iewish
and
corrupted
Chaldee
.
But
now
to
speake
of
those
Christians
,
that
celebrate
their
Liturgies
in
the
Greeke
tongue
:
I
obserue
them
to
be
these
.
1.
The
Graecians
themselues
:
Namely
all
they
whose
vulgar
speech
the
Greeke
tongue
is
,
inhabiting
in
Greece
,
and
a
great
part
of
N●tolia
,
of
Macedon
,
and
of
Thrace
,
together
with
all
the
Islands
of
the
Aegaean
Sea
,
and
the
other
manie
scattered
Islands
,
about
the
coasts
of
Greece
.
But
yet
they
doe
it
,
not
in
the
present
vulgar
,
but
in
the
pure
and
auncient
Greeke
tongue
,
whereof
as
I
before
obserued
,
the
common
people
vnderstande
but
little
:
vsing
namely
,
on
festiuall
daies
,
the
auncient
Liturgie
of
Basil
,
and
on
common
daies
that
of
Chrysostome
,
as
Ieremie
a
late
Patriarch
of
Constantinople
hath
recorded
.
Ierem.
Resp.
1.
ad
Germano●
cap.
13.
And
namely
,
as
touching
the
holie
scriptures
,
vsing
the
Septuagints
Greeke
translation
,
and
specially
that
of
Lucians
Emendation
.
At
least
it
was
so
with
them
in
Hieromes
time
(
and
I
finde
no
mention
at
all
recorded
of
any
alteration
)
who
obserueth
the
Edition
of
the
70
Interpreters
by
Lucianus
,
Hieron
.
in
praef
ad
Lib.
Paralipom
.
to
haue
beene
receiued
in
vse
from
Constantinople
as
farre
as
Antiochia
:
As
also
that
of
Origens
emendation
,
from
Antiochia
to
Aegypt
and
in
Aegypt
,
that
of
Hesychius
.
But
(
howsoeuer
it
may
be
touching
the
edition
vsuall
among
them
)
yet
certainely
,
that
the
Graecians
haue
not
the
scriptures
translated
into
the
vulgar
Greeke
,
the
[
](A16718-e52640-b)*
*
Theodos.
Zygomal
in
epist.
ad
Crus
.
l.
7.
Turcog●●cae
.
pag.
431.
Graecians
themselues
haue
directly
recorded
.
2.
The
Syrians
,
namely
those
,
that
for
distinction
of
religion
from
the
Iacobites
(
who
likewise
inhabite
Syria
)
are
termed
so
,
that
is
to
say
the
Melchites
,
for
they
(
hauing
the
Arabique
for
their
vulgar
language
)
as
they
agree
in
other
points
of
their
religion
,
and
ceremonie
,
and
order
of
diuine
seruice
,
with
the
Grecians
,
so
doe
they
as
touching
their
Liturgie
,
in
language
also
,
as
is
obserued
by
[
](A16718-e52730-b)*
*
Vitriac
.
Histor.
Orient
.
c.
75.
Ha●tho
.
l.
de
.
Tartaris
▪
c.
14.
B●eitenbach
.
Peregrin
.
c.
de
Surianis
.
Bau●ngart
.
Peregr
.
l.
2.
c
9.
Villamont
.
l.
2
c.
22.
Boter
.
Rel.
pa.
3.
l
●
.
c.
d●
Melchi●i
.
Vitriacus
,
Haiths
,
Breitenbachius
,
and
manie
others
.
3.
The
Georgians
,
who
hauing
for
their
vulgar
speech
,
a
peculiar
language
of
a
middle
temper
(
which
well
agreeth
with
the
position
of
their
Countrie
)
betwixt
Tartarian
and
Armenian
,
as
Gesner
and
Postell
and
R●c●ha
in
their
bookes
of
languages
haue
obserued
,
exercise
notwithstanding
their
liturgies
in
the
Greeke
tongue
,
as
[
](A16718-e52830-b)*
*
Vitriac
.
lib.
citat
.
c.
80.
Iacobus
a
Vitriaco
,
Gesner
.
●ithrid
.
in
Lingua
Georgian
.
Postel
.
de
12.
Ling.
Tit.
de
Ling.
Georg.
Roccha
.
de
Dialect
i●
G●●orgiana
,
&
in
Grae3●a
Vet.
Baumgart
.
loc
〈◊〉
.
Villamont
.
l.
●
.
c.
23.
Gesner
,
Postel
,
Roccha
,
and
diuerse
others
haue
certainely
recorded
.
4.
The
Circassians
:
who
yet
in
such
sort
celebrate
their
diuine
seruice
in
the
Greeke
,
that
their
priests
themselues
by
reason
of
their
grosse
ignorance
,
vnderstand
not
what
they
reade
[
](A16718-e52900-b)*
*
Inter●an
.
de●la
vita
de
.
1.
Zychi●ca
.
1●
Bellon
.
Obseruat
.
l.
1.
c.
35.
as
Intireano
(
that
liued
among
them
)
hath
remembred
.
5.
And
lastly
,
in
the
Greeke
tongue
are
celebrated
,
the
Liturgies
of
all
the
monasteries
,
that
are
of
the
Greeke
religion
,
wheresoeuer
dispersed
within
the
Turkish
dominions
,
in
Afrique
or
Asia
:
As
in
mount
Sinai
,
the
Cities
of
Petra
and
Eltor
in
Arabia
:
In
Ierusalem
,
Alexandria
,
Damascus
,
and
in
sundrie
other
places
,
as
Bellonius
with
others
hath
left
recorded
.
And
to
come
at
last
to
the
nation
,
that
celebrate
their
Liturgies
in
the
Latine
tongue
:
To
speake
of
them
,
euen
this
little
will
be
enough
:
Namely
,
that
all
the
Christians
,
that
are
found
of
the
Roman
Communion
,
in
America
,
and
in
Africa
,
celebrate
their
liturgies
in
the
Roman
tongue
.
As
all
likewise
in
Europe
(
except
the
Slauonians
aboue
mentioned
.
)
And
in
Asia
,
except
the
two
new
Roman
purchases
,
of
the
Maroni●es
in
Syria
,
and
of
the
Christians
of
Saint
Thomas
in
India
,
who
retaine
still
,
the
old
accustomed
language
,
which
as
I
obserued
before
,
is
in
the
Liturgies
of
both
those
Nations
,
the
Syriaque
tongue
.
FINIS
.